RCS-985G X Instruction Manual en Domestic General X R1.01 (En YJBH2041.0086.0002)

RCS-985G
Generator Protection
Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

RCS-985G Generator Protection
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured

goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that
printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety
The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD i

DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous
ii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed
 Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Copyright
Manual: R1.01 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
P/N: EN_YJBH2041.0086.0002 69 SuYuan. Avenue, Nanjing 211102，China
Copyright © NR 2012. All rights reserved
Tel: 86-25-87178185, Fax: 86-25-87178208
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information Website: www.nari-relays.com
contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and Email: NR_TechSupport@nari-relays.com
dissemination to third parties is strictly forbidden except where
expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically,

and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or
improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without
notice.
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD iii

Table of contents
Preface .............................................................................................................................................. i
Introduction..................................................................................................................................i
Health and Safety........................................................................................................................i
Instructions and Warnings ..........................................................................................................i
Table of contents ............................................................................................................................. i
Chapter1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Application .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Typical applications .................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Constitution of the scheme ....................................................................................... 2
1.2 Functions .................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Features...................................................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 High performance hardware ..................................................................................... 5
1.3.2 New philosophy used in RCS-985G ......................................................................... 5
1.3.3 Intellectuality ............................................................................................................. 8
Chapter2 Technical Data ............................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Electrical Specifications ............................................................................................ 11
2.1.1 Power supply .......................................................................................................... 11
2.1.2 Analog current input ratings.................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 Analog voltage input ratings ................................................................................... 11
2.1.4 Binary input ............................................................................................................. 12
2.1.5 Binary output ........................................................................................................... 12
2.1.6 Power supply output for Optical isolators ............................................................... 12
2.2 Mechanical Specifications ........................................................................................ 12
2.3 Atmospheric Environment tests................................................................................ 13
2.4 Communication Interface ......................................................................................... 13
2.5 Type test ................................................................................................................... 14
2.5.1 Environmental tests ................................................................................................ 14
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD i

2.5.2 Mechanical tests ..................................................................................................... 14
2.5.3 Electrical tests ......................................................................................................... 14
2.5.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................... 14
2.6 Certifications ............................................................................................................. 15
2.7 Protective functions related parameters................................................................... 15
2.7.1 Accurate Operating scope ...................................................................................... 15
2.7.2 General error of analog input metering .................................................................. 16
2.7.3 Generator differential protection ............................................................................. 16
2.7.4 Phase-splitting transverse differential protection ................................................... 17
2.7.5 High sensitive transverse differential protection..................................................... 17
2.7.6 Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection for turn-to-turn fault...................... 18
2.7.7 Earth fault protection of stator ................................................................................ 18
2.7.8 Earth fault protection of rotor .................................................................................. 19
2.7.9 Overload protection of stator .................................................................................. 19
2.7.10 Negative sequence overload protection ............................................................... 19
2.7.11 Overload protection of excitation winding (AC quantity) ...................................... 20
2.7.12 Overload protection of excitation winding (DC quantity) ...................................... 20
2.7.13 Loss of excitation protection of generator ............................................................ 20
2.7.14 Out-of-step protection of generator ...................................................................... 21
2.7.15 Voltage protection of generator ............................................................................ 21
2.7.16 Over excitation protection ..................................................................................... 22
2.7.17 Power protection of generator .............................................................................. 22
2.7.18 Frequency protection of generator ....................................................................... 22
2.7.19 Accidental energization protection of generator ................................................... 22
2.7.20 Startup/shutdown protection of generator ............................................................ 23
2.7.21 Low impedance protection.................................................................................... 23
2.7.22 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection............................................................. 23
2.7.23 Measurements and Recording Facilities .............................................................. 24
Chapter3 Description of Operation Theory ............................................................................... 25
3.1 Software Structure .................................................................................................... 25
ii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

3.2 Fault detectors .......................................................................................................... 25
3.2.1 Using fault detector improves the security of tripping ............................................ 25
3.2.2 Fault detector of differential protection, phase-splitting transverse differential

protection of generator..................................................................................................... 26
3.2.3 Interturn fault protection of generator ..................................................................... 27
3.2.4 Earth fault protection of stator of generator ............................................................ 27
3.2.5 Generator rotor earth fault protection ..................................................................... 27
3.2.6 Generator stator overload protection...................................................................... 28
3.2.7 Negative sequence overcurrent protection of generator ........................................ 28
3.2.8 Generator loss-of-excitation protection .................................................................. 28
3.2.9 Generator out-of-step protection ............................................................................ 28
3.2.10 Generator overvoltage protection ......................................................................... 28
3.2.11 Generator over excitation protection .................................................................... 28
3.2.12 Generator reverse power protection..................................................................... 28
3.2.13 Generator frequency protection ............................................................................ 29
3.2.14 Generator accident energization protection ......................................................... 29
3.2.15 Startup and shutdown protection of generator ..................................................... 29
3.2.16 Differential current and overcurrent protection of excitation transformer ............. 29
3.2.17 Overload protection of rotor winding .................................................................... 29
3.2.18 Mechanical protection ........................................................................................... 29
3.3 Theory of protective elements .................................................................................. 30
3.3.1 Differential protection, phase-splitting transverse differential protection of generator

......................................................................................................................................... 30
3.3.2 DPFC Current Differential Element ........................................................................ 34
3.3.3 Interturn fault protection of generator ..................................................................... 36
3.3.4 Backup protection of generator .............................................................................. 40
3.3.5 Earth fault protection of stator ................................................................................ 43
3.3.6 Earth fault protection of rotor .................................................................................. 47
3.3.7 Generator stator overload protection...................................................................... 49
3.3.8 Negative sequence overload protection ................................................................. 51
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD iii

3.3.9 Loss-of-Excitation protection .................................................................................. 53
3.3.10 Out-of-step protection ........................................................................................... 57
3.3.11 Voltage protection ................................................................................................. 59
3.3.12 Over excitation protection ..................................................................................... 60
3.3.13 Power protection ................................................................................................... 61
3.3.14 Frequency protection ............................................................................................ 62
3.3.15 Accidental energization protection ....................................................................... 63
3.3.16 Breaker failure protection ..................................................................................... 65
3.3.17 Generator startup and shutdown protection ......................................................... 66
3.3.18 Excitation winding overload protection ................................................................. 67
3.3.19 Excitation transformer and exciter protection ....................................................... 69
3.3.20 CT circuit failure alarm .......................................................................................... 70
3.3.21 VT circuit failure alarm .......................................................................................... 71
3.3.22 Output contacts driven by overcurrent element ................................................... 72
3.3.23 Mechanical protection ........................................................................................... 72
Chapter4 Self-supervision, metering and records ................................................................... 73
4.1 Self-supervision ........................................................................................................ 73
4.1.1 Start-up self-testing................................................................................................. 73
4.1.2 Continuous self-testing ........................................................................................... 74
4.1.3 List of alarm messages ........................................................................................... 75
4.2 Metering .................................................................................................................... 81
4.2.1 Measured voltages and currents ............................................................................ 81
4.2.2 Sequence voltages and currents ............................................................................ 81
4.2.3 Rms. voltages and currents .................................................................................... 81
4.2.4 Differential current and relevant quantities ............................................................. 81
4.2.5 Phase angles .......................................................................................................... 82
4.2.6 Measurement display quantities ............................................................................. 82
4.2.7 All metering data displayed on LCD ....................................................................... 82
4.3 Signaling ................................................................................................................... 93
4.3.1 Enabling Binary Inputs of generator ....................................................................... 94
iv NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

4.3.2 Enabling Binary Inputs of excitation protection ...................................................... 96
4.3.3 Binary Inputs of mechanical protection .................................................................. 96
4.3.4 Auxiliary Contacts ................................................................................................... 97
4.3.5 Internally generated binary inputs by MON ............................................................ 98
4.3.6 Other Binary Inputs ............................................................................................... 100
4.4 Event & fault records .............................................................................................. 100
4.4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 100
4.4.2 Event & Fault records ........................................................................................... 100
4.4.3 Type of event ........................................................................................................ 101
4.4.4 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs ................................................................ 101
4.4.5 Relay alarm signals .............................................................................................. 103
4.4.6 Protection element ................................................................................................ 104
4.4.7 Viewing event records via RCSPC support software ........................................... 106
4.5 Disturbance Record ................................................................................................ 107
4.6 Time Synchronization ............................................................................................. 108
Chapter5 Hardware Description ............................................................................................... 109
5.1 Hardware overview ................................................................................................. 109
5.1.1 Front view ............................................................................................................. 109
5.1.2 Rear view .............................................................................................................. 111
5.1.3 Functional block diagram of RCS-985G ............................................................... 111
5.2 Standard connectors and terminals ....................................................................... 112
5.2.1 General description............................................................................................... 112
5.2.2 Pins definition of ‗1A‘ connectors. ........................................................................ 113
5.2.3 Pins definition of ‗1B‘ connectors ......................................................................... 114
5.2.4 Pins definition of ‗2A‘ connectors ......................................................................... 114
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD v

5.2.10 Pins definition of ‗5B‘ connectors ....................................................................... 122
5.2.11 Pins definition of ‗6B‘, ‗7B‘ connectors ............................................................... 124
5.2.13 Pins definition of ‗8C‘ connectors ....................................................................... 126
5.2.15 Pins definition of ‗9C‘ connectors ....................................................................... 128
5.3 Output ..................................................................................................................... 129
5.3.1 Tripping outputs .................................................................................................... 129
5.3.2 Signaling outputs .................................................................................................. 130
5.3.3 Alarming outputs ................................................................................................... 131
5.3.4 Other outputs ........................................................................................................ 131
Chapter6 Software Overview .................................................................................................... 133
6.1 Software Overview ................................................................................................. 133
6.2 System services software ....................................................................................... 133
6.3 Platform software.................................................................................................... 134
6.3.1 Record logging...................................................................................................... 134
6.3.2 Settings database ................................................................................................. 134
6.3.3 Database interface................................................................................................ 134
6.3.4 Protection and control software ............................................................................ 134
6.4 Software downloading ............................................................................................ 136
Chapter7 Settings ....................................................................................................................... 141
7.1 Equipment parameters ........................................................................................... 141
7.1.1 Setting list ............................................................................................................. 141
7.1.2 Setting instruction of the parameters.................................................................... 141
7.1.3 Setting path ........................................................................................................... 143
7.2 System Settings ...................................................................................................... 143
7.2.1 Logic settings of configuring functions ................................................................. 143
7.2.2 Generator system parameters .............................................................................. 146
7.2.3 System parameters of excitation transformer or exciter ...................................... 149
7.2.4 Implicit configuration settings ............................................................................... 151
vi NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

7.3 Protection Settings ................................................................................................. 154
7.3.1 Differential protection settings .............................................................................. 154
7.3.2 Splitting-phase transverse differential protection settings.................................... 158
7.3.3 Settings of turn-to-turn fault protection of generator ............................................ 159
7.3.4 Settings of backup protection of generator .......................................................... 162
7.3.5 Settings of earth fault protection of stator windings ............................................. 166
7.3.6 Settings of earth fault protection of rotor .............................................................. 170
7.3.7 Settings of thermal overload protection of stator .................................................. 171
7.3.8 Settings of negative sequence overload protection ............................................. 173
7.3.9 Settings of Loss-of-Excitation protection .............................................................. 176
7.3.10 Settings of out-of-step protection ....................................................................... 182
7.3.11 Settings of voltage protection ............................................................................. 185
7.3.12 Settings of overexcitation protection of generator .............................................. 187
7.3.13 Settings of power protection of generator .......................................................... 190
7.3.14 Settings of underfrequency and overfrequency protection ................................ 191
7.3.15 Settings of startup and shutdown protection of generator ................................. 194
7.3.16 Settings of accidental energization protection of generator ............................... 196
7.3.17 Settings of differential protection of excitation transformer or exciter ................ 198
7.3.18 Settings of backup protection of excitation transformer or exciter ..................... 199
7.3.19 Settings of overload protection of excitation ...................................................... 200
7.3.20 Settings of mechanical protection ...................................................................... 202
7.3.21 Settings of breaker failure protection of generator ............................................. 203
7.4 Calculated parameters ........................................................................................... 204
7.4.1 Setting list ............................................................................................................. 204
7.4.2 Explanation of the parameters.............................................................................. 205
7.4.3 Setting path ........................................................................................................... 207
Chapter8 Human Machine Interface ......................................................................................... 209
8.1 User interfaces and menu structure ....................................................................... 209
8.2 Introduction to the relay .......................................................................................... 209
8.2.1 Front panel ............................................................................................................ 209
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD vii

8.2.2 LCD ....................................................................................................................... 210
8.2.3 LED indications ..................................................................................................... 221
8.2.4 Keypad operation.................................................................................................. 223
8.2.5 Menu ..................................................................................................................... 223
8.2.6 Operation instruction of Menu .............................................................................. 226
Chapter9 Communications........................................................................................................ 245
9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 245
9.2 Rear communication port of EIA(RS)485 ............................................................... 245
9.2.1 Rear communication port EIA(RS)485 interface .................................................. 245
9.2.2 EIA(RS)485 bus .................................................................................................... 246
9.2.3 Bus termination ..................................................................................................... 246
9.2.4 Bus connections & topologies .............................................................................. 246
9.3 IEC60870-5-103 communication ............................................................................ 247
9.3.1 Overview of IEC60870-5-103 ............................................................................... 247
9.3.2 Messages description in IEC60870-5-103 protocol type ..................................... 247
9.4 MODBUS protocol .................................................................................................. 252
9.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 252
9.4.2 Fetch real time status (Binary).............................................................................. 252
9.4.3 Fetch metering values of equipment .................................................................... 259
9.4.4 Fetch settings value of equipment ........................................................................ 262
9.4.5 Diagnostics (Function Code: 08H) ....................................................................... 272
9.4.6 Exception Responses ........................................................................................... 273
9.5 EIA(RS)232 Interface ............................................................................................. 273
9.6 Communication with printer .................................................................................... 274
9.7 Communication with External GPS pulse Source .................................................. 274
Chapter10 Installation ................................................................................................................ 277
10.1 Receipt of Relays ................................................................................................... 277
10.2 Handling of Electronic Equipment .......................................................................... 277
10.3 Storage ................................................................................................................... 278
10.4 Unpacking ............................................................................................................... 278
viii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

10.5 Relay Mounting ....................................................................................................... 278
10.5.1 Rack Mounting .................................................................................................... 278
10.5.2 Panel mounting ................................................................................................... 280
10.6 RELAY WIRING ..................................................................................................... 280
10.6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections ......................................... 280
10.6.2 EIA(RS)485 port ................................................................................................. 281
10.6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) ...................................................................... 281
10.6.4 EIA(RS)232 front port of downloading/monitoring.............................................. 281
10.6.5 Ethernet port (if applicable) ................................................................................ 281
10.6.6 Test port .............................................................................................................. 282
10.6.7 Earth connection ................................................................................................. 282
Chapter11 Commission ............................................................................................................. 283
11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 283
11.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................. 283
11.3 Relay commission tools .......................................................................................... 284
11.4 Setting Familiarization ............................................................................................ 285
11.5 Product checks ....................................................................................................... 285
11.5.1 With the relay de-energized................................................................................ 285
11.5.2 With the relay energized ..................................................................................... 288
11.5.3 Setting Testing .................................................................................................... 296
11.5.4 Rear communications port EIA (RS) 485 ........................................................... 296
11.5.5 On-load checks ................................................................................................... 296
11.5.6 Final check .......................................................................................................... 297
11.6 Use of assistant test software RCSPC................................................................... 297
11.6.1 Function summary of RCSPC communication software .................................... 297
11.6.2 Connection way of protection equipment and personal computer ..................... 298
11.6.3 Configuration of PC and the software before use .............................................. 298
11.6.4 Operation instruction of the software.................................................................. 299
Chapter12 Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 301
12.1 Maintenance period ................................................................................................ 301
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD ix

12.2 Maintenance checks ............................................................................................... 301
12.2.1 Alarms ................................................................................................................. 301
12.2.2 Binary Inputs ....................................................................................................... 301
12.2.3 Binary output ....................................................................................................... 301
12.2.4 Analog inputs ...................................................................................................... 301
12.3 Method of Repair .................................................................................................... 302
12.3.1 Replacing the complete relay ............................................................................. 302
12.3.2 Replacing a PCB ................................................................................................ 303
12.4 Changing the relay battery ..................................................................................... 303
12.4.1 Instructions for replacing the battery .................................................................. 304
12.4.2 Battery disposal .................................................................................................. 304
12.5 Cleaning.................................................................................................................. 304
Chapter13 Decommissioning and Disposal ............................................................................ 305
13.1 Decommissioning ................................................................................................... 305
13.1.1 Switching Off ....................................................................................................... 305
13.1.2 Disconnecting Cables ......................................................................................... 305
13.1.3 Dismantling ......................................................................................................... 305
13.2 Disposal .................................................................................................................. 305
Chapter14 Ordering Form.......................................................................................................... 307
14.1 Loose equipment .................................................................................................... 307
14.2 Panel installed ........................................................................................................ 308
Chapter15 Manual version history ........................................................................................... 309
Chapter16 ANNEX ...................................................................................................................... 311
16.1 Appendix A: RCSPC for RCS-985 (User Version) ................................................. 311
16.1.1 General ............................................................................................................... 311
16.1.2 Menu bar ............................................................................................................. 312
16.1.3 Tool bar ............................................................................................................... 314
16.1.4 Report ................................................................................................................. 320
16.1.5 Trip Tests ............................................................................................................ 321
x NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter1 Introduction
1.1 Application
RCS-985G is a microprocessor based generator protection relay integrated with main and backup
protection. It provides complete electrical protection for large-sized generators, including
turbo-generator, hydro-generator, gas turbine generator and pumped-storage generator. The
RCS-985G relay is suited for wall surface mounted or flush mounted into a control panel. Figure
1.1-1 shows a typical application of RCS-985G.
1.1.1 Typical applications

Figure 1.1-1 typical protection configuration scheme consists of three protection panels. In which
panels A and B comprises of one set of electric quantity protection of generator respectively.
Different groups of CT are used for them respectively. Panel C comprises of mechanical protection
as well as pole disagreement protection, circuit breaker failure initiation and circuit breaker
operation relay set if needed.
Panel A Panel B Panel C
RCS-985G RCS-985G RCS-974AG
B B
Exciting
Transformer
Generator B B
Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of RCS-985G
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 1

1.1.2 Constitution of the scheme
1.1.2.1 Differential protection
For a large-sized generator, panel A and B are both equipped with generator differential protection
and exciting transformer (exciter) differential protection. RCS-985G is equipped with two kinds of
percentage differential protection (variable slope percentage differential protection and DPFC
percentage differential protection) in order to meet high performance not only in speed but also in
security.
1.1.2.2 Backup protection
Panel A and B are equipped with a complete set of backup protection for generator and use two
groups of independent CTs.
For earth fault protection of rotor, two sets of such protection cannot work simultaneously as
influence between them will appear. Therefore only one set of earth fault protection of rotor can be
enabled during operation. If the other set will be switched on at anytimes, this current set shall first
quit before letting the other set operates.
1.1.2.3 Current transformer
Panels A and B adopt different independent CTs.
Main protection and backup protection adopt one common group of CTs.
1.1.2.4 Voltage transformer
Panel A and B shall adopt different potential transformer VTs or its different windings so far as
possible.
For turn-to-turn fault protection of generator, in order to prevent unwanted operation due to VT
circuit failure at HV side which is used dedicatedly for this protection, one set of protection shall
adopt two groups of VT. However, if we consider adopting only independent VT windings, then
too many VTs will be installed at generator terminal which is not reasonable. Therefore it is
recommended to equip three VTs at generator terminal, named VT1, VT2 and VT3.
Panel A adopts voltage from VT1 and VT3 while panel B from VT2 and VT3. During normal
operation, panel A adopts VT1 and panel B adopts VT2 while VT3 is as a backup VT to both of
them. If circuit of VT1 or VT2 fails, VT3 will be switched over to automatically by the software.
For zero sequence voltage, there are no two independent windings adopted by two sets of
protection equipments simultaneously in general.
1.1.2.5 Circuit Breaker Failure Initiation
Circuit breaker failure initiation is very important to a power plant. In general, generator protection
tripping contact is an essential condition to circuit breaker failure initiation. Considering importance
of such protection, it is recommended to realize it as follows:
Only one set of circuit breaker failure initiation shall be equipped.
In order to make it more reliable, circuit breaker failure initiation function can‘t be integrated into
2 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

any equipment with electric quantity protection relays.
1.2 Functions
Table 1.2-1 Protective functions for generator
No. Protection function overview for generator IEEE

1. Current differential protection 87G
2. Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection 87UG
3. DPFC current differential protection 7/87G
4. High sensitive transverse differential protection 87G
5. Longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage protection for turn-to-turn fault 59N/60
6. DPFC directional protection for turn-to-turn fault 7/67
7. Two stages phase-to-phase distance protection 21G
8. Voltage controlled overcurrent protection 51V
9. Current blocking element at generator‘s terminal
10. Fundamental zero sequence overvoltage protection for stator earth fault 64G1
11. Third harmonic protection for stator earth fault 27/59TN,
64G2
12. Two stages of one-point-earth fault protection of rotor 64R
13. Two-point earth fault protection of rotor 64R
14. Definite and inverse time stator thermal overload protection 49S
15. Definite and inverse time negative sequence overload protection of rotor 46/50, 46/51,
49R
16. Loss-of-excitation protection 40
17. Out-of-step protection 68/78
18. Two stages phase-to-phase overvoltage protection 59G
19. Phase-to-phase undervoltage protection 27G
20. Two stages definite time over-excitation protection 24
21. Inverse time over-excitation protection 24
22. Reverse power protection 32G
23. Reverse power protection during generator shutting down 32G
24. Three stage underfrequency protection 81G
25. Two-stage overfrequency protection 81O
26. Startup/shutdown protection of generator
27. Accidental energization protection 50/27
28. Voltage balance function 60
29. Under-frequency overcurrent protection
30. Voltage transformer supervision 47,60G
31. Current transformer supervision 50/74
Table 1.2-2 Protective functions for excitation

No. Protection function overview for excitation IEEE

1. Current differential protection for exciting-transformer 87T
2. Current differential protection of AC exciter 87G
3. Overcurrent protection 50P/51P
4. Definite and inverse time thermal overload protection for exciting 87G
windings
5. Current transformer supervision of excitation set 50/74
Table 1.2-3 Mechanical protection of generator
No. Mechanical protection function overview for generator IEEE

1. Mechanical protection 1
Table 1.2-4 Other functions of RCS-985G
Other functions overview

Automatic self-supervision relay hardware supervision and secondary
circuit supervision
Metering 24 samples per cycle

Fault recording CPU module 32 latest fault reports, 8 latest fault waveforms
MON module 4 or 8 seconds continuous oscillogram function
for latest fault
Event self-supervision report 32 latest abnormality reports
recording binary input chang report 32 latest binary status input change reports
Present recording One normal operating waveform triggered
manually
Loacal HMI LCD and keypad
Remote HMI RCSPC software or substation automation
system software
Front communication port (RS232) for software RCSPC with local protocol
Rear communication ports Ports type four RS-485 ports
to host (two can be configured as fiber port)
Protocol type IEC 60870-5-103/MODBUS
Rear communication port to printer one RS-485 or RS-232
Time synchronisation port IRIG-B (optional)
Voltage and current drift
auto-adjustment.

1.3 Features
1.3.1 High performance hardware
1.3.1.1 Parallel calculation of double CPU system
The hardware of any one CPU system comprises a 32 bit microprocessor and two digital signal
processors (DSP). The two CPU systems can operate in parallel acompanied by a fast A/D
converter. The 32-bit microprocessor performs logic calculations and the DSPs perform the
protection calculation. A high performance hardware ensures real time calculation of all protection
relays within a sampling interval.
On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and logic
discrimination could be done within one sampling period. The event recording and protection logic
calculation are completed simultaneously.
1.3.1.2 Independent Fault Detectors
There is a set of independent fault detectors in the CPU processor in the RCS-985G relay. Its
operation supervises the tripping outputs. They will connect power supply to output relays when in
operation. There are different fault detectors in the CPU module used for various protective
functions. The relay can drive a tripping output only when the fault detectors in the CPU module
and the fault detectors in the MON module operate simultaneously. This kind of independent
supervision of tripping outputs using fault detectors can avoid any maloperation possibly caused
by any hardware component failures. This highly increases the security to a very high level.
1.3.1.3 Integration Of Main And Backup Protection
Main and backup protection are integrated in one set of protection equipment. Protection
information such as sampled data and binary inputs are shared by all protective elements and no
more than one CT or VT at the same side of the transformer needs to be input into the equipment
for different protective elements. Shunt connection of VT and serial connection of CT that is
usually seen in secondary circuits before can be avoided. This greatly reduces the possibility of
circuit failure.
The equipment can gather all information of any fault and record all relevant waveforms of it for
offline analysis.
1.3.1.4 Flexible configuration of output
Elaborately designed tripping matrix makes it possible for the operation circuit to be suitable for
various circuit breakers.
1.3.2 New philosophy used in RCS-985G
1.3.2.1 Variable slope percentage differential protection
The percentage differential protection adopts variable slope restraint characteristics and the actual
unbalanced differential current effect can be simulated. In order to prevent unwanted operation of
differential protection due to CT saturation, countermeasures to discriminate CT saturation are
provided by means of waveform identification of phase current at each side.

1.3.2.2 DPFC percentage differential protection
DPFC percentage differential protection reflects only deviation components of differential current
and restraint current and is not affected by load current. It can detect slight fault within generator.
Besides this, it is insensitive to CT saturation since its restraint coefficient is set comparatively
higher than that of conventional differential protection.
1.3.2.3 Ratio corrected by software for differential protection
Current from CTs of each side under different ratios are corrected to a single standard before
calculation.
1.3.2.4 Provide two inrush current distinguishing methods
Two discrimination principles for inrush current are provided: harmonics restraint and waveform
distortion restraint.
1.3.2.5 CT saturation detection
Based on the operation sequence of DPFC restraint current element and the DPFC differential
current element of differential protection, external fault with CT saturation and internal fault can be
distinguished correctly.
In case of internal fault, the relay will operate immediately, while in case of external fault with CT
saturation, the criterion of current waveform is adopted. The relay will not operate in case of a
persisting external fault with CT saturation which occur no less than 5ms after the fault detectors
pickup. The relay will operate quickly though when an evolving external to internal fault occurs.
1.3.2.6 High sensitive transverse differential protection
Transverse differential protection adopts a percentage phase current restraint and floating
threshold to get high sensitivity in internal fault and high security in external fault.
In addition, by adopting a frequency tracking technique, digital filter technique and Fourier
transformation technique, the filtration ratio of third component can reach more than 100. These
countermeasure guarantees the reliability of the protection in all occasions as mentioned below:
Advantages of percentage restraint by phase current:
（1）The transverse differential protection can get reliable restraint effect as the faulty phase
current increases greatly while transverse differential current increases less in external fault
situation.
（2）The protection has very high operation sensitivity because the transverse differential current
increases exponentially in comparison to phase current change whose increase is minimal in
slight interturn fault situation.
（3）The insensitive stage of transverse differential current protection will operate quickly and
reliably when severe interturn fault occurs in stator winding.
（4）In case of phase-to-phase fault of stator winding, not only does the transverse differential
current increase greatly, but so also the phase current. Therefore just low percentage restraint by

phase current guarantees the reliable operation of transverse differential protection against the
fault.
（5）As for other increment of transverse differential unbalanced current in normal operation
condition, transverse differential current protection uses float threshold technique to avoid
unwanted operation.
1.3.2.7 Performance of percentage restraint interturn protection
By adopting frequency tracking technique, digital filter technique and Fourier transformation
technique, the filtration ratio of the third harmonic component can reach more than 100.
New criteria of generator current percentage restraint:
（1）Fault current increases greatly while longitudinal residual voltage increase less in external
three-phase fault, therefore the protection tends to be reliably restrained thanks to current
increment as restraint quantity.
（2）If external asymmetric fault occurs, phase current increases greatly with negative sequence
current, but the longitudinal residual voltage has very little increment, therefore the protection
tends to be reliably restrained by the mixing the quantity of current increment and the
negative-sequence component.
（3）The protection has very high operation sensitivity as the longitudinal residual voltage increase
is comparatively large whereas the phase current hardly changes in the situation of slight interturn
fault.
（4）The high-setting stage of transverse differential current protection will operate quickly and
reliably when severe interturn fault occurs in stator winding.
（5）As for the other increment of unbalanced longitudinal residual voltage in normal operation
condition, the protection uses floating-threshold technique to avoid unwanted operation.
1.3.2.8 Performance of stator earth fault protection
（1）By adopting frequency tracking techniques, digital filter techniques and Fourier transformation
techniques, the filtration ratio of third component can reach more than 100.
（2）The sensitive stage of foundational residual voltage protection operates and issues trip
command only if the dual criteria of residual voltages of generator terminal and neutral point are
satisfied at the same time.
（3）The ratio settings of third harmonic of generator terminal to that of neutral point used in third
harmonic ratio criteria, which will automatically suit to the change of ratio of third harmonic voltage
of the plant unit fore-and-aft incorporated in the power network. This automation adjustment
function ensures the correctness of signals generated and issued by the third harmonic voltage
criteria even during incorporation or during isolation course of generator.
(4) The ratio and phase-angle difference of third harmonic voltage of generator terminal to that of
neutral point which is kept almost stable when the generator is in normal operation condition; also
it is a slow developing course. Through real time adjustment of coefficient of amplitude value and

phase, RCS-985 makes differential voltage between generator terminal and neutral point as 0 in
normal operation condition. When stator earth fault occurs, the criteria tend to operate reliably and
sensitively.
1.3.2.9 Performance of rotor earth fault protection
Rotor earth fault protection adopts a sampling-switch（ping-pong type）principle. Direct current is

input by a high-performance isolated amplifier. By switching two different electronic switches，the
RCS-985 solves four different ground-loop equations to compute rotor winding voltage, rotor
ground resistance and earthing position on real time and display these information on LCD of the
protection.
If one point earth fault protection only issues alarm signals instead of tripping after operation, then
the two-points earth fault protection will be automatically put into service with a certain fixed delay
and will operate to trip when two-point earth fault of rotor occurs.
1.3.2.10 Performance of loss-of-excitation protection
Loss-of-excitation protection adopts optimizing protection scheme in which the stator impedance
criteria, reactive power criteria, rotor voltage criteria, busbar voltage criteria and criteria of stator
active power decrement，could be optionally combined to meet various demands of operation of
the unit for different generators.
1.3.2.11 Performance of out-of-step protection
Out-of-step protection adopts three-impedance element (which is got from positive-sequence

current and positive sequence voltage of generator) to distinguish out-of-step from steady swing.
The protection more than that can also accurately locate the position of swing center and record
the slid numbers of external and internal swing respectively in real time.
1.3.2.12 VT circuit failure supervision
Two groups of VT inputs are equipped at generator terminal. If one group fails, the equipment will
issue an alarm and switch over to the healthy one automatically. It does not need to block any
protective elements relevant to voltage.
1.3.2.13 CT circuit failure alarm and blocking
This function adopts percentage differential principle. Detection ability of CT circuit failure can be
enhanced significantly and unwanted operations can be avoided.
1.3.3 Intellectuality
1.3.3.1 Friendly HMI interface
The HMI interface with a LCD and a 9-button keypad on the front panel is very user friendly. Real
time data, connection diagram, phase current, differential current and voltage can be displayed on
LCD during normal condition.
1.3.3.2 Transparency
More than 500 sampled data including differential current and phase angle etc. can be displayed

on LCD and more than 1500 internal data of the equipment can be supervised through dedicated
auxiliary software RCSPC that provides the user with a greater convenience to know about the
operational situation of RCS-985.
1.3.3.3 Perfect fault recording function
CPU module: the latest 32 groups of fault data and event sequence, 8 groups of fault oscillograms,
32 status changes of binary inputs and 32 self-supervision reports can be recorded.
MON module: when the equipment picks up, oscillograms of all analog sampling quantity,
differential current and operation of the protection equipment can be recorded with duration of up
to 4 seconds or 8 seconds (depending on the sample rate configured).
The format of event or fault report is compatible with the international COMTRADE format.
1.3.3.4 Communication ports
One front RS232 port ( For RCSPC software)
Two rear RS-485 ports with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol or MODBUS protocol which can be
re-configured as optical fiber ports.
One rear RS-485 with clock synchronization,
One rear RS-232 or RS-485 with printer.
1.3.3.5 Various clock synchronizations
Various GPS clock synchronizations: second/minute pulse via binary input or RS-485, message
via communication ports and IRIG-B synchronization.


Chapter2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Power supply
Rated Voltage (Un) 24Vdc, 110Vdc, 125Vdc, 220Vdc, 250Vdc

Variation (80% ~ 120%)Un
Ripple in the DC Max 15% of the DC value. Per IEC 60255-11
auxiliary voltage
Voltage dips and Per IEC 61000-4-11，IEC 60255-11:1979
voltage short 20ms for interruption without de-energizing，dips 60% of Un
interruptions without reset up to 100ms
Burden Quiescent <40W
condition
Operating <70W
condition
Backup battery type 1/2AA, 3.6V, 60mAh
2.1.2 Analog current input ratings
Rated frequency 50Hz, 60Hz, ±10%

Phase rotation ABC
Rated Current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 40In (Transformer related) 40In (Transformer related)
(non-offset AC current) 20In (Generator related) 20In (Generator related)
2In (for metering CT) 2In (for metering CT)
Thermal continuously 3×In 3×In
withstand for 10s 30×In 30×In
capability for 1s 100×In 100×In
for half 250×In 250×In
a cycle
Burden < 0.2 VA/phase @ In < 0.5 VA/phase @ In
2.1.3 Analog voltage input ratings
Standard Per IEC 60255-6, IEC 60288

Rated Voltage (Un) 100V/√3, 110V/√3 100V, 110V 200V
linear to 100V 173 V 230V
Thermal continuously 120 120 V 200V
withstand 10s 200 200 V 350V
capability 1s 250 250 V 400V
Burden <0.2 VA/phase @ Un <0.5 VA/phase @ Un <2.5VA/phase@ Un

2.1.4 Binary input
Rated Voltage 110VDC 125VDC 220VDC 250VDC

Pickup voltage 77VDC 87.5VDC 154VDC 175VDC
Dropout voltage 60.5VDC 68.8VDC 121VDC 137.5VDC
Maximum permitted 150V 150V 300V 300V
voltage
Withstand 2000Vac
Resolving time for <1ms
logic input
2.1.5 Binary output
Item Used for tripping contact Used for signal contacts

Output model Potential free contact
Max system voltage 250VAC/DC
Test voltage across 1000VAC rms fro 1min
open contact
Making Capacity 30A
Breaking capacity 0.4A resistance 0.2A resistance
(L/R=40ms at 250VDC) 0.2A inductive(L/R=40ms) 0.05A inductive (L/R=40ms)
Continuous carry 8A 5A
Short duration current 50A for 200ms 50A for 200ms
Pickup time(Typ/Max) 5ms/10ms 10ms/15ms
Dropout time(Typ/Max) 8ms/10ms 8ms/10ms
Bounce time 1ms 1ms
Durability loaded 100,000 operations minimum 100,000 operations minimum
contact
unloaded 10,000,000 operations minimum 10,000,000 operations minimum
contact
2.1.6 Power supply output for Optical isolators
Rated Voltage 24V

Rated current 200mA
Max current 500mA
2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions 482.6mm(W)×532.6mm(H)×285 mm(D)
Trepanning dimensions 450mm(W)×534mm(H)，M6 screw
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Weight per device Approx. 30kg
Local control panel Small control module: 5 LED indicators, a 9-key Keypad and a
320×240-dot LCD
Display language English

Housing material Aluminum

Housing color Silver grey
Location of terminals Rear panel of the device
Protection class Front side: IP51
(per IEC60529:1989) Rear side, connection terminals: IP20
Other Sides: IP30
2.3 Atmospheric Environment tests

Standard IEC60255-6:1988
Operating temperature -25°C~+55°C
Transport and storage -40°C~+70°C
temperature range
Permissible humidity 5% ~ 95%, condensation not permissible
2.4 Communication Interface

Communication Parameters
medium
Interfaces for communicating with RTU/SCADA
RS-485 Electrical Port number 2
(EIA) Baud rate 4800 ~38400bps
Transmission distance < 1000m@4800bps
Maximal capacity 32
Twisted Pair Screened twisted pair cable
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Optical Port number 2
(Optional) Connector type ST
Baud rate 4800 ~ 38400bps
Transmission standard 100Base-FX,
Transmission distance <1500m
Optical Fiber Type Multi-mode Fiber
Wavelength 850/820nm
Fiber size 62.5/125μm (core DIA/cladding DIA)
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997
Transmission distance < 1500m
Optical Fiber Type Multi-mode or single-mode
Wavelength 853/1310nm for multi-mode
1310/1550nm for single-mode
Fiber size 62.5/125μm (core DIA/cladding DIA)
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997 or IEC61850

Rear interface for local HMI with personal computer via RCSPC software
RS-232 (EIA) Port number 1
Application Local human-machine communication
Download program of protection relay
Connector type 9 pin D-type female connector
Interfaces for communicating with a printer
RS-232 (EIA) Port number 1
Printer type EPSON® LQ-300K
2.5 Type test

2.5.1 Environmental tests
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:1974, test Ad for 16 h at +55°C

Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:1990, test Bd for 16 h at -25°C
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:1980, test Db, two (12+12 hours) cycles, 95%RH,
low temperature +25°C, high temperature +55°C
2.5.2 Mechanical tests
Vibration IEC60255-21-1:1988, Class I

Shock and bump IEC60255-21-2:1988, Class I
2.5.3 Electrical tests
Dielectric tests IEC60255-5:2000, test voltage: 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Impulse voltage tests IEC60255-5:2000, test voltage: 5kV, unipolar
impulses, waveform 1.2/50μs, source energy 0.5J
Insulation IEC60255-5:2000, insulation resistance >100MΩ, 500Vdc
measurement
2.5.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1MHz burst disturbance tests IEC60255-22-1:1988

(idt IEC61000-4-2:1995), Class III
- Common mode 2.5kV
- Differential mode 1.0kV
Electrostatic discharge tests IEC60255-22-2 :1996 (idt IEC 61000-4-2)
Class IV
-For contact discharge 8.0kV
-For air discharge 15.0kV
Radio frequency interference tests IEC60255-22-3:2000 (idt IEC
61000-4-3:1995 ) class III

Frequency sweep
-Radiated amplitude-modulated 10V/m(rms), f=80…1000MHz
Spot frequency
-Radiated amplitude-modulated 10Vm(rms), f=80MHz/160MHz
/450MHz/900MHz
- Radiated pulse-modulated 10Vm(rms), f=900MHz
Fast transient disturbance tests IEC60255-22-4:2002 (idt IEC 61000-4-4)
- Power supply, I/O & Earth terminals Class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
- Communication terminals Class IV, 2kV, 5.0kHz, 5/50ns
Surge immunity tests IEC60255-22-5:2002 (idt IEC
61000-4-5:1995) , Class III
- Power supply, AC inputs, I/O terminals 1.2/50us,
2kV, line to earth;
1kV, line to line
Conducted RF electromagnetic disturbance IEC60255-22-6, Class III
- Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. terminal 10V(rms), 150kHz~80MHz
Power frequency magnetic field immunity IEC61000-4-8:1993, Class V
100A/m for 1min
1000A/m for 3s
Pulse magnetic field immunity IEC61000-4-9:1993, Class V
6.4/16 us
1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity IEC61000-4-10:1993, Class V
100kHz & 1MHz – 100A/m
2.6 Certifications
 ISO9001: 2000
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001: 1999
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L4
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001
2.7 Protective functions related parameters

2.7.1 Accurate Operating scope
Current: 0.05In～20In
Voltage: 0.4V～100V

frequency: 45Hz～55Hz
df/dt: 0.3Hz/s～10Hz/s
time delay: 0～100s
2.7.2 General error of analog input metering

Current, voltage: ≤0.2%
Real power, reactive power: ≤0.5%
Power frequency metering: ≤±0.01Hz
Accuracy of GPS synchronization: ≤1ms
Resolution of SOE: ≤1ms
2.7.3 Generator differential protection

Pickup setting of percentage differential current fault detector [I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.1 Ie – 1.5 Ie
Setting accuracy: ±5% or ±0.01In whichever is greater
Setting of unrestrained instantaneous differential protection [I_InstDiff_Gen]
Scope: 2 Ie – 14 Ie
Setting accuracy: ±2.5%
Setting of first slope of percentage differential protection [Slope1_PcntDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.00 – 0.50
Setting of maximum slope of percentage differential protection [Slope2_PcntDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.30 – 0.80
Operation time of percentage differential protection
≤25 ms （Id≥2×[I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen]）
Operation time of unrestrained instantaneous differential protection
≤20 ms (Id≥1.5×[I_InstDiff_Gen])
Note:
In—rated secondary current of CT
Ie – rated secondary current of generator

Id—differential current
2.7.4 Phase-splitting transverse differential protection

Pickup setting of fault detector [I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.1 Ie – 1.5 Ie
Setting accuracy: ±5% or ±0.01In whichever is greater
Setting of unrestrained instantaneous differential protection [I_InstSPTDiff_Gen]
Scope: 2 Ie – 14 Ie
Setting of first slope [Slope1_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.00 – 0.50
Setting of maximum slope [Slope2_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.30 – 0.80
Operation time of percentage phase-splitting transverse differential protection
≤25 ms （Id≥2×[I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]）
Operation time of unrestrained instantaneous phase-splitting transverse differential protection
≤20 ms (Id≥1.5×[I_InstSPTDiff_Gen])
Note:
In—rated secondary current of CT
Ie – rated secondary current of generator
Id—differential current
2.7.5 High sensitive transverse differential protection

Current setting of transverse differential protection [I_SensTrvDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.1A – 50A
Setting accuracy: ±2.5% or 0.01In whichever is greater
High setting of transverse differential protection [I_InsensTrvDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0.1A – 50A
Setting accuracy: ±2.5% or 0.01In whichever is greater

Additional delay of transverse differential protection [t_TrvDiff_Gen]
Scope: 0 s – 10 s
Setting accuracy: ±1% setting + 40ms
Operation time of transverse differential protection
Scope: ≤35 ms (at 1.5×current setting)
2.7.6 Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection for turn-to-turn fault

Longitudinal zero sequence voltage setting [V_SensROV_Long1_Gen]
Scope: 1 V – 10 V
Setting accuracy: ±2.5% or ±0.05V whichever is greater
Longitudinal Zero sequence voltage high setting [V_InsensROV_Long1_Gen]
Scope: 1 V – 20 V
Time delay setting [t_ROV_Long1_Gen]
Scope: 0 s – 10 s
Setting accuracy: ±1% setting+40 ms
Operation time of longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection
Scope: ≤40 ms (at 1.5×setting)
Operation time of DPFC directional protection
Scope: ≤40 ms
2.7.7 Earth fault protection of stator

Zero sequence voltage setting [V_SensROV_Sta]
Scope: 0.1 V – 50 V
Zero sequence voltage high setting [V_InsensROV_Sta]
Scope: 0.1 V – 50 V
Ratio setting of third harmonic voltage protection [k_V3rdHRatio_PreSync(PostSync)_Sta]
Scope: 0.5 – 10

Setting accuracy: ±5%
Slope setting of third harmonic voltage differential protection [k_V3rdHDiff_Sta]
Scope: 0.1 – 2.0
Setting accuracy: ±5%
Time delay setting
Scope: 0 s – 10 s
2.7.8 Earth fault protection of rotor

One point ground resistance setting [R_1PEF_RotWdg]
Scope: 0.1kΩ – 100 kΩ
Setting accuracy: ±10% setting or ±0.5kΩ whichever is greater
Second harmonic voltage setting 0.1 V – 10 V
Time delay setting
Scope: 0s – 10s
Setting accuracy: ±1% setting +1S
2.7.9 Overload protection of stator

Definite time current setting 0.1 A – 50 A
Definite time delay setting 0 s – 10 s
Inverse time initiating current setting 0.1 A – 100 A
Heat capacity of rotor‘s winding 1 – 100
Heat emission factor 0– 10.00
Tolerance of definite and inverse time current setting
±2.5% or ±0.01 In whichever is greater
Tolerance of time delay setting ±1% setting+40 ms
2.7.10 Negative sequence overload protection

Definite time negative sequence current setting
0.1 A – 20 A
Inverse time initiating negative sequence current setting

0.05 A – 5 A
Heat constant of rotor 1 – 100
Continuous tolerable negative sequence current of generator
0.05 A – 5 A
Tolerance of definite and inverse time negative sequence current setting
2.7.11 Overload protection of excitation winding (AC quantity)

Definite time current setting 0.1 A – 100 A
Inverse time initiating current setting 0.1 A – 50 A
Heat capacity factor 1 – 100
Reference current 0.1 A – 50 A
2.7.12 Overload protection of excitation winding (DC quantity)

Definite time current setting 0.1 kA – 100.0 kA
Inverse time initiating current setting 0.1 kA – 50 kA
Heat capacity factor 1 – 100
Reference current 0.1 kA – 50 kA
2.7.13 Loss of excitation protection of generator

Impedance setting Z1 0Ω– 200Ω
Impedance setting Z2 0Ω– 200Ω
Reverse reactive power setting 0 – 50% Pn

Under voltage setting of rotor 0.1 V – 500 V
No-load voltage setting of rotor 0.1 V – 500 V
Under voltage factor setting of rotor 0 – 10
Under voltage setting of busbar 0.1 V – 100 V
Reduced active power setting 0.1%–100%Pn
Time delay setting of stages 1/2/3 0 s – 10 s
Tolerance of impedance setting ±2.5% or ±0.1Ω whichever is greater
Tolerance of rotor‘s voltage setting ±5% or ±0.1Un whichever is greater
Tolerance of power setting ±1%Setting or ±0.2% Pn whichever is greater
Tolerance of busbar voltage setting ±2.5% or ±0.05 V
Note:
Pn: rated active power of generator.
Un: rated voltage of generator.
2.7.14 Out-of-step protection of generator

Impedance setting ZA/ZB/ZC 0Ω– 200Ω
Phase angle setting 0°– 90°
Interior angle setting of lens 0°– 150°
Number of pole slipping setting 0 – 10000
Tolerate tripping current setting 0.1 A – 100 A
Tolerance of current setting ±2.5% or ±0.01 In whichever is greater
Tolerance of angle setting ±3°
2.7.15 Voltage protection of generator

Overvoltage setting 0.1 V – 200 V
Under voltage setting 0.1 V – 110 V
Time delay setting 0 s – 10 s
Tolerance of voltage setting ±2.5% or ±0.05 V whichever is greater

2.7.16 Over excitation protection

Definite time V/F setting 1.00 – 2.00 pu
Time delay setting of definite time stage 1 0 s – 25 s
Time delay setting of definite time stage 2 0.1 s – 3000 s
Inverse time V/F setting 1.00 – 2.00
Time delay of inverse time protection 0 s – 25 s
Tolerance of V/F measurement ±2.5% or ±0.01 whichever is greater
Tolerance of definite time delay setting ±1% setting+40 ms
2.7.17 Power protection of generator

Reverse power setting 0.5% - 10% Pn
Power setting of reverse power sequent trip protection
0.5% - 10% Pn
Time delay of reverse power protection 0.1 s – 3000 s
Time delay of reverse power sequent trip protection
0.01s – 10s
Tolerance of reverse power setting ±10% or ±0.2% Pn whichever is greater
2.7.18 Frequency protection of generator

Setting of under frequency stage 1-3 45 Hz – 51 Hz
Setting of over frequency stage 1-2 50 Hz – 60 Hz
Time delay of frequency protection (accumulated) *
0 min – 300 min
Time delay of frequency protection (not accumulated) *
0 s – 100 s
Tolerance of frequency setting ±0.02 Hz
2.7.19 Accidental energization protection of generator

Current setting 0.1 A – 50 A
Blocking frequency setting 40 Hz – 50 Hz

Time delay of unwanted closing protection 0s–1s
Negative sequence current setting 0.1 A – 20 A
Time delay of circuit breaker flashover protection
0.0 s – 10 s
Tolerance of current setting ±2.5% or ±0.01 In
2.7.20 Startup/shutdown protection of generator

Blocking frequency setting 40 Hz – 50 Hz
Differential current setting 0.1 Ie – 14 Ie
Overcurrent setting in low frequency 0.1A — 100A
Zero sequence voltage setting 5 V – 25 V
Tolerance of differential current setting ±5% or ±0.02 In whichever is greater
Tolerance of zero sequence voltage setting ±5% or ±0.02 Un whichever is greater
Tolerance of overcurrent setting in low frequence ±5% or ±0.02 In whichever is greater
Working frequency range 15 Hz – 65 Hz
2.7.21 Low impedance protection

Forward impedance setting 0Ω– 100Ω
Reverse impedance setting 0Ω– 100Ω
2.7.22 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection

Negative sequence voltage setting 1 V – 20 V
Under voltage setting 2 V – 100 V
Current setting 0.1 A – 100 A
Tolerance of voltage setting ±2.5% or ±0.05 V whichever is greater

Tolerance of current setting ±2.5% or ±0.01 In whichever is greater
Tolerance of time delay ±1%setting ± 40 ms
2.7.23 Measurements and Recording Facilities
Measurements
Current: 0.05… 20In
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
Voltage: 0.05…2Vn
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
Performance
Real time clock accuracy: <±2% seconds/day
External clock synchronization: Conforms to IRIG standard 200-98, format B

Chapter3 Description of Operation Theory
3.1 Software Structure

The RCS-985G protection is composed of current differential protection as main protection and
the kinds of protection mentioned in Table 1.2-1 as backup protection and abnormal operation
protection. VT supervision (VTS) and CT supervision (CTS) function is also included.
Every protective element has its own fault detector element in CPU and DSP respectively. When
the fault detector in CPU picks up, power supply of output relays will be connected. When both the
detector elements and operational element pick up, the protection element will operate to trip.
3.2 Fault detectors

3.2.1 Using fault detector improves the security of tripping
The additional output blocking circuit controlled by general fault detectors calculated in MON
module makes the output circuit more secure, because not only is the relationship between the
tripping command sending and additional output blocking circuit is of logic ―AND‖ in software, but
they also keep the logic ―AND‖ relationship in hardware. It is displayed in below figure.
+24V QDJ
controlled by fault
detectors in MON +24V
module
trip
relay R
trip
contact
tripping G1
1
commands >=1 1
tripping
from CPU 1 transistor
module "or" gate
Figure 3.2-1 Logic relationship of CPU and MON module
QDJ contact is controlled by general fault detectors calculated independently in MON module.

When the contact closes, the DC power supply source of tripping relay is provided. The function of
gate G1 is to receive the tripping commands issued by the CPU module. When a tripping
command arrives at the gate G1, the driving transistor will be activated, and the trip relay‘s contact
will close to trip the breaker.
The general fault detectors calculated in MON module and operation elements calculated in CPU
module use their own independent data samples. This ensures that the equipment will not operate
by mistake due to any of module‘s data channel‘s failure.
3.2.2 Fault detector of differential protection, phase-splitting transverse

differential protection of generator
This fault detector of differential protection will pick up when any one of the following two elements
is satisfied.
3.2.2.1 Fault detector of differential current of generator
I d max  [I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen ]
(Equation 3.2-1)
Where:
I d max is the maximum value of three phase differential currents of generator.
[I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen] is the setting of phase differential currents of generator.
3.2.2.2 Fault detector of DPFC differential current of generator
I d  1.25I dt  I dth
  
I d   I 1   I 2  ...   I m (Equation 3.2-2)
Where:
I dt
is the floating threshold value which will arise automatically and gradually according to the
increasing of the output of the deviation component. In order to ensure that the threshold value of
the voltage is slightly higher than the unbalance output, the deviation component gets multified by
1.25 which is reasonable.
 
 I 1 ….  I m are the DPFC current of each side of generator respectively.
I d
is the half-cycle integral value of differential current.
I dth
is the fixed threshold.

This fault detector is not influenced by the direction of power flow and so it is very sensitive. The
setting is already fixed and need not to be set on site. It is used to enable DPFC percentage
differential protection of generator.
3.2.2.3 Fault detector of phase-splitting transverse differential current of generator
When the phase-splitting transverse differential current reaches pickup value

[I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen], the fault detector picks up.
3.2.3 Interturn fault protection of generator
3.2.3.1 Fault detector of transverse differential current of generator
The fault detector will operate when the transverse differential current is greater than the setting
[I_SensTrvDiff_Gen].
3.2.3.2 Fault detector of longitudinal zero sequence voltage of generator
The fault detector will operate when the longitudinal zero sequence voltage is greater than the
setting [V_SensROV_Longl_Gen].
3.2.3.3 Fault detector of DPFC direction interturn protection of generator
The fault detector will operate when the calculated directional element meets operating condition.
3.2.4 Earth fault protection of stator of generator
3.2.4.1 Fault detector of zero sequence overvoltage element
The fault detector will operate when the calculated zero sequence voltage is in excess of the
setting [V_SensROV_Sta].
3.2.4.2 Fault detector of third harmonic ratio of stator
The fault detector will operate when the ratio of 3rd harmonics voltage of neutral point to 3rd
harmonics voltage at the terminal is greater than its ratio setting [k_V3rdHRatio_PreSync_Sta] or
[k_V3rdHRatio_PostSync_Sta].
3.2.4.3 Fault detector of deviation of third harmonic of generator
The fault detector will operate when the differential 3rd harmonic voltage of neutral point and 3rd
harmonics voltage at the terminal of generator is greater than its setting [k_V3rdHDiff_Sta].
3.2.4.4 Fault detector of stator earth fault protection with injection principle
The fault detector will operate when the calculated grounded resistor is less than the resistor
setting [R_Trp_Inj_EF_Sta].
3.2.5 Generator rotor earth fault protection
3.2.5.1 Fault detector of one-point earth fault of rotor
The fault detector operates when grounded resistance of rotor is less than its setting.

3.2.5.2 Fault detector of two-point rotor earth fault protection
The fault detector operates when change of rotor grounding location is greater than its setting.
3.2.6 Generator stator overload protection
3.2.6.1 Definite time overload fault detector
The fault detector operates when the maximum value of three-phase current is greater than its
setting [I_OvLd_Sta].
3.2.6.2 Inverse time overload fault detector
The fault detector operates when any of three phase currents is greater than its setting
[I_InvOvLd_Sta].
3.2.7 Negative sequence overcurrent protection of generator
3.2.7.1 Definite time negative sequence overload fault detector
The fault detector operates when negative sequence current is greater than its setting.
3.2.7.2 Inverse time overload fault detector
The fault detector operates when negative sequence current is greater than its setting.
3.2.8 Generator loss-of-excitation protection

The fault detector operates when locus of calculated impedance enters into impedance circle.
3.2.9 Generator out-of-step protection

The fault detector operates when locus of calculated impedance leaves boundary of impedance
operation zone.
3.2.10 Generator overvoltage protection

The fault detector operates when maximum value of three phase-to-phase voltage is greater than
its setting.
3.2.11 Generator over excitation protection
3.2.11.1 Definite time over excitation Fault detector
The fault detector operates when measured U/F is greater than definite time setting.
3.2.11.2 Inverse time over excitation Fault detector
The fault detector operates when over excitation value is greater than inverse time pickup setting.
3.2.12 Generator reverse power protection

When measured reverse power is greater than setting, the fault detector of reverse power of
generator picks up.

3.2.13 Generator frequency protection
3.2.13.1 Under frequency fault detector
The fault detector operates when frequency is lower than its setting for a specified period.
3.2.13.2 Over frequency fault detector
The fault detector operates when frequency is greater than its setting for a specified period.
3.2.14 Generator accident energization protection
3.2.14.1 Fault detector of unwanted closing
The fault detector operates when maximum phase current of generator is greater than setting of
unwanted closing protection.
3.2.14.2 Fault detector of circuit breaker flashover
The fault detector operates when negative sequence current of generator is greater than setting of
circuit breaker flashover protection.
3.2.15 Startup and shutdown protection of generator

The fault detector operates when differential current of generator or excitation transformer is
greater than its setting, or zero sequence voltage of generator is greater than its setting.
3.2.16 Differential current and overcurrent protection of excitation transformer
3.2.16.1 Fault detector of differential current of excitation transformer or exciter
The fault detector operates when the maximum value of three phase differential current is greater
than its setting.
3.2.16.2 Fault detector of overcurrent of excitation transformer or exciter
The fault detector operates when the maximum value of three phase current is greater than its
setting.
3.2.17 Overload protection of rotor winding
3.2.17.1 Fault detector of definite time overload of excitation winding
The fault detector operates when maximum value of three phase current of rotor winding is greater
than its definite time setting.
3.2.17.2 Fault detector of inverse time overload of rotor winding
The fault detector operates when inverse time accumulated value is greater than inverse time
setting.
3.2.18 Mechanical protection

The fault detector operates when duration of operation of mechanical protection is greater than its
delay setting.

3.3 Theory of protective elements
Note:
In the following logic diagrams, all logic inputs starting with ―En_**‖ represent enabling logic
settings which will be explained in Chapter7. All logic inputs starting with ―EBI_**‖ represent
enabling binary inputs from panel, those starting with ―Flg_**‖ represent internally generated flags
indicating whether or not a certain element is met, those words begin with ―Alm_‖ and ―Op_‖
represent output for alarming and operation of protective elements respectively.
3.3.1 Differential protection, phase-splitting transverse differential protection of

generator
3.3.1.1 Percentage differential protection
Operation characteristic of this percentage differential protection is as shown in Figure 3.3-1.
unrestraint operation
Id
area
Icdsd
operation Kbl2
area
restraint
area
Kbl1
Icdqd
0
Ie nIe Ir
Figure 3.3-1 Operation characteristic of percentage differential protection
Operation equation of this percentage differential protection is
 I d  K bl  I r  I cdqd ( I r  nIe )

 K bl  K bl1  K blr  ( I r / I e )

 I d  K bl 2  ( I r  nIe )  b  I cdqd ( I r  nIe )

 K blr  ( K bl 2  K bl1 ) /( 2  n)
b  ( K bl1  K blr  n)  nIe
(Equation 3.3-1)
  
I 1 I2

 Ir 
 2
  
I d  I 1  I 2

Where:

I d is differential current,
I r is restraint current,
I cdqd is pickup value of differential current [I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen] and
I e is rated current of generator.
Definition of current of various sides:
For differential protection of generator and exciter, I 1 and I 2 are currents of terminal and neutral
point respectively.
Definition of percentage differential restraint coefficient:
K bl is percentage differential restraint coefficient and K blr is its increment.
K bl1 is the initial slope [Slope1_PcntDiff_Gen] of percentage differential with setting range 0.05 –
0.15. 0.05 is recommended usually.
K bl2 is the maximum slope [Slope2_PcntDiff_Gen] of percentage differential with setting range
0.30 – 0.70. 0.50 is recommended usually.
n is the multiple of restraint current at maximum percentage restraint coefficient and is fixed at 4.
3.3.1.2 High performance blocking technique during CT saturation
In order to prevent unwanted operation of steady state percentage differential protection due to CT
transient or steady state saturation during external fault, the discrimination of waveform of
differential current principle is adopted as criterion of CT saturation.
When fault occurs, the equipment decides first whether it is an internal or an external fault. If it is
external fault, criterion of CT saturation is enabled. If any differential current of differential
protection meets the criterion, the differential current will be recognised due to CT saturation and
the percentage differential protection will be blocked.
3.3.1.3 High setting percentage differential protection
A percentage differential protection with high percentage and high setting is equipped with the
equipment to prevent operation of percentage differential protection from being delayed by CT
saturation and other factors during serious internal faults. It can prevent influence of steady state
and transient CT saturation during external fault due to its percentage restraint characteristic and
can operate correctly and quickly during internal fault and when CT is saturated. Operation
criterion of this high setting percentage differential protection is

I d  1.2  I e

I d  1.0  I r (Equation 3.3-2)
Where differential current Id and restraint current Ir are the same as mentioned in section 3.3.1.1.
When fault occurs, the operation criterion will be discriminated phase by phase and percentage
differential protection will operate if the criterion is met.
Parameters of this protection are configured during manufacturing and not need to be configured
on site.
3.3.1.4 Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection
This protection will operate and trip immediately if differential current of any phase is greater than
its setting.
3.3.1.5 Abnormal differential current alarm and CT circuit failure blocking
Abnormal differential current alarm function with percentage restraint characteristic and blocking
functions in case of miniature CT open circuit or short circuit are equipped with the equipment. See
section 3.3.25.
CT circuit failure blocking function can be configured by logic setting

[Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Gen.]. When such failure occurs and is discriminated, issuing alarm
signal only or blocking percentage differential protection is optional. If the logic setting is set as 1,
percentage differential protection will be blocked immediately.

3.3.1.6 Logic diagram of percentage differential protection
Id.max>[I_InstDiff_Gen]
[EBI_Diff_Gen]
&
& Op_InstDiff_Gen
[En_Diff_Gen]
[En_InstDiff_Gen]
[FD_Diff_Gen]
[Op_InsensDiff_Gen]
[EBI_Diff_Gen]
& & &
[En_Diff_Gen]
[En_PcntDiff_Gen]
[Flg_InstanCTS]
Op_PcntDiff_Gen
≥1
[FD_Diff_Gen]
[Flg_Sat_CT]
[Op_PcntDiff_Gen]
[EBI_Diff_Gen]
& &
&
[En_Diff_Gen]
[En_PcntDiff_Gen]
[Flg_InstanCTS]
[FD_Diff_Gen]
Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of percentage differential protection of generator or exciter
Where:
I d . max is the maximum value of differential current among three phases.
[EBI_Diff_Gen] is the position flag of binary input for enabling all kinds of differential protection of
generator.
[FD_Diff_Gen] is the internally generated flag indicating that fault detector of differential protection
picks up.
[Op_InsensDiff_Gen] is the internally generated flag indicating that equation 3-4 is met.
[Flg_IntanCTS] is the internally generated flag indicating that CT supervision program detects
failure of CT circuit with no delay considered into account.
[Flg_Sat_CT] is the internally generated flag indicating CT is in saturation condition.

[Op_PcntDiff_Gen] is the internally generated flag indicating equation 3-3 is meet.
3.3.2 DPFC Current Differential Element

Based on the theory of Deviation of Power Frequency Component (DPFC), DPFC percentage
differential current protection provides a sensitive protection for the generator, especially under the
heavy load conditions when comparing with the steady state percentage restraint differential relay.
3.3.2.1 Operation characteristic of DPFC
The operation criteria of DPFC percentage differential are as follows:
I d  1.25 * I dt  I dth


I d  0.6 * I r I r  2 I e (Equation 3.3-3)
I  0.75 * I  0.3 * I I r  2 I e
 d r e
Where:
2
I r is the restraint current, I r   I i , for RCS-985G, the number 1,2 represents terminal
i 1
and neutral point of generator respectively.
 2 
 I d is the DPFC differential current, I d   I
i 1
i
I dt is the floating threshold value which will arise automatically and gradually according to the
increment of deviation component. In order to ensure that the threshold value is slightly higher
than the unbalance output, multiple 1.25 of the deviation component is reasonable and the
unwanted operation of relays will not occur during power swing or power frequency deviation.
 
 I 1 …  I m are DPFC phase currents on each side of generator.
I dth is the fixed threshold value of current.
I e is the secondary rated current of generator.
Note:
Calculation of restraint current of DPFC percentage differential protection is different from the
steady state percentage differential protection, it is difficult to test this function on site, so we
recommend only qualitative function test on site.
DPFC differential protection is equipped to each phase of generator, but user should know that the

restraining DPFC quantity for every phase is the same maximum value among the three phases.
The following figure shows operating characteristic of DPFC percentage differential protection.
operating current 0.75
0.6
0.2 Ie
restraint current
2 Ie
Figure 3.3-3 Operating characteristic of DPFC percentage differential protection
The criteria are checked phase by phase. If the criterion mentioned above is met, the DPFC
percentage differential protection will operate. Tripping command will be issued under control of
inrush current and overexcitation discrimination.
This protective element has high ability to eliminate the effects of transient and steady saturation
of CT during the external fault because the restraint coefficient is set at a higher value.
3.3.2.2 Logic scheme of DPFC differential protection
[Flg_DPFC_Diff_Gen]
0 20
& &
[EBI_Diff_Gen] Extend &
20ms
[En_Diff_Gen] Op_DPFC_Diff_Gen
[En_DPFC_Diff_Gen]
[Flg_InstanCTS] 1
0 500
[FD_Diff_Gen]
Extend 500ms
Figure 3.3-4 Logic diagram of DPFC percentage differential protection
In the figure:
[Flg_DPFC_Diff_Gen] is the internally generated flag indicating (Equation 3.3-3) is met.
[EBI_Diff_Gen] is the position flag of binary input for enabling all kinds of differential protection of
generator.
[Flg_IntanCTS] is the internally generated flag indicating that CT supervision program detects

failure of CT circuit with no delay considered into account.
Settings of DPFC percentage differential protection is are fixed and need not to be set on site.
3.3.3 Interturn fault protection of generator
3.3.3.1 High sensitive transverse differential protection
Transverse differential protection installed on connection between two neutral points of the
generator is used as the main protection for short circuit interturn fault of generator‘s stator
winding, open circuit fault of branches and short circuit fault between phases.
Since this protection adopts frequency tracking technique, digital filtering and full cycle Fourier
algorithm, the third harmonic can be reduced to 1/100 within the frequency tracking range and the
protection can respond to the fundamental component only.
This protection comprises two stages: insensitive stage (high setting stage) and sensitive stage.
3.3.3.2 High setting stage of the protection
This stage is equivalent to traditional transverse differential protection. When the transverse
differential current is in excess of the setting [I_InsensTrvDiff_Gen], the protective element
operates.
3.3.3.3 Sensitive stage of the protection
Phase current percentage restraint principle is used for this stage. The operation criterion is
I d  I hcZD when I MAX  I e

 I MAX  I e
I  (1  K
hcZD  )  I hcZD when I MAX  I e


d
Ie (Equation 3.3-4)
Where:
I d is the transverse differential current ,
I hcZD
is the transverse differential current setting [I_SensTrvDiff_Gen],
I MAX is the maximum value of three phase current of generator,
Ie is the rated current of generator and
K hcZD is the restraint coefficient.
Phase current percentage restraint transverse differential principle can ensure no unwanted
operation during external fault and sensitivity during internal fault. As this principle is adopted,
current setting of the transverse differential protection shall be only higher than unbalance current
during normal operation and much less than that of traditional transverse differential current

protection. Sensitivity for interturn fault of generator can be enhanced then.
This protection also has a floating threshold for high transverse differential unbalance current
during other normal operating conditions.
Operation of the high sensitive transverse differential protection will lead to a tripping immediately.
When the rotor of a generator is grounded at one point, a configurable time delay [t_TrvDiff_Gen]
will be inserted in the tripping course.
Figure 3.3-5 shows logic diagram of this protection.
3.3.3.4 Logic diagram of sensitive transverse differential protection
[Alm_1PEF_RotWdg]
[En_1PEF_RotWdg] & t
&
[En_Alm_1PEF_RotWdg]
[Flg_TransDiff_Gen]
=1
&
Op_SensTrvDiff_Gen
[En_IntTurn_Gen] &
&
[En_Sens_TransDiff_Gen]
[EBI_IntTurn_Gen]
[FD_Diff_Gen]
Figure 3.3-5 Logic diagram of transverse differential protection of generator
Where:
[Alm_1PEF_RotWdg] is internally generated flag indicating the one-point earth fault protection of
rotor operates.
[EBI_1PEF_RotWdg] is enabling binary input for one-point earth fault protection of rotor. ―1‖
means enabled.
[EBI_IntTurn_Gen] is enabling binary input for interturn protection of generator, including

transverse differential protection, longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection and directional
DPFC protection. ―1‖ means enabled.
3.3.3.5 Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection
Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection is configured for inter-turn fault of stator winding of
generator. It uses open-delta voltage of dedicated VT at the terminal of generator as the criterion.
Since this protection adopts frequency tracking technique, digital filtering and full cycle Fourier
algorithm, the third harmonic can be reduced to less than 1/100 within the frequency tracking
range and the protection can respond to the basic wave component only.
This protection comprises two stages: insensitive stage (high setting stage) and sensitive stage.
Insensitive stage of the protection

Setting of this stage shall be higher than the maximum unbalanced voltage during external fault,
during this time the directional flag indicating internal fault must be satisfied. When measured
longitudinal zero sequence voltage is in excess of the setting [V_InsensROV_Longl_Gen] and
lasts for longer than the delay setting [t_ROV_Longl_Gen], this protective element will trip
breakers according to the configuration of [TrpLog_IntTurn_Gen].
Sensitive stage of the protection
Phase current percentage restraint principle is used for this stage. The operation criterion is
U zo  [ 1  K zo  I m / I e ]  U zozd

I m  3  I 2 when I MAX  I e (Equation 3.3-5)
 I m  (I MAX - I e )  3  I 2 when I MAX  I e
Where:
U zozd
is the zero sequence voltage setting [V_SensROV_Longl_Gen],
I MAX is the maximum value among three phase current of generator,
I 2 is the negative sequence current of generator,
I e is the rated current of generator and
K z0
is the restraint coefficient.
Like transverse differential principle, this protective element can ensure no unwanted operation
during external fault and sensitive operation during internal fault. As for the percentage restraint
characteristic, zero sequence voltage setting of the zero sequence voltage protection shall be only
higher than the unbalanced voltage during normal operation. Sensitivity for interturn fault of
generator can be enhanced then.
This protective element also has a floating threshold for high unbalanced longitudinal zero
sequence voltage during other operational conditions.
Operation of this element is usually configured to be delayed shortly by 0.1 s – 0.2 s.
3.3.3.6 VT circuit failure alarm and blocking
Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection for inter-turn fault of stator shall be blocked when
the dedicated VT2 circuit at the terminal of generator fails. There are two criteria to decide on
whether not block or block the protection.
Criterion 1 (including 3 sub-criteria):
— Negative sequence voltage of VT1: 3U2 < U2_set1;

— Negative sequence voltage of VT2: 3U2‘ < U2_set2;
— Calculated zero sequence voltage of VT2: 3U0‘>[V_SensROV_Longl_Gen].
In the above three criterion, if one of the former two and the third are met simultaneously, the
longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection will be blocked.
Criterion 2 (including 3 sub-criteria):
U AB - U ab  5V
U BC - U bc  5V
(1) U - U  5V (Equation 3.3-6)
CA ca
And (2) calculated zero sequence voltage of VT2: 3U0‘>[V_SensROV_Longl_Gen].
U BC U CA U ab U bc U ca
Where: U AB , , are phase-to-phase voltages of VT1 and , , are
phase-to-phase voltages of VT2.
That one of these three sub-criteria in (1) and (2) is met will result in pickup of criterion 2.
When any of criterion 1 and criterion 2 operates, alarm of VT2 circuit failure will be issued after a
delay of 40 ms and zero sequence voltage protection will be blocked.
After the VT circuit failure reverts to normal condition, blocking can be released by pressing the
Target-reset button on the faceplate of the protection.
3.3.3.7 Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection logic diagram
[Flg_NegDir_Gen]
[Flg_InsensROV_Longi_Sta] &
[Flg_VTS] & & t

Op_InsensROV_Sta
[En_IntTurn_Gen]
[En_InsensROV_Longl_Gen]
[EBI_IntTurn_Sta]
[FD_Diff_Gen]
[Flg_SensROV_Longi_Sta]
&
[Flg_VTS] & & t
Op_SensROV_Sta
[En_IntTurn_Gen]
[En_SensROV_Longl_Gen]
[EBI_IntTurn_Sta]
[FD_Diff_Gen]
Figure 3.3-6 Logic diagram of longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection

Where:
[Flg_NegDir_Gen] is internally generated flag indicating the directial element calculated by

negative sequence quantities is met for fault situation.
[Flg_InsensROV_Longi_Sta] is internally generated flag indicating the insensitive stage of

longitudinal zero-sequence overvoltage protection of stator operates.
[Flg_SensROV_Longi_Sta] is internally generated flag indicating the sensitive stage of

longitudinal zero-sequence overvoltage protection of stator operates.
3.3.3.8 Directional DPFC protection for interturn fault
The operation criterion is:
 
F ＝Re[ U 2   I 2  e j ]    1.25  dF
(a)
U 2  0.5V  1.25du
(b) (Equation 3.3-7)
I 2  0.02In  1.25di (c)
If the three criterions are met simultaneously, the directional flag of protection is set. Under
negative sequence voltage and negative sequence current controlling, the protection operates
after 0.2-0.5s time delay.
AC current and voltage input used in directional DPFC protection are from the generator terminal
directly. When the VT1 at the generator terminal fails, the directional DPFC protection is blocked.
The sensitivity is about 3V of longitudinal zero sequence voltage.
Directional DPFC protection for inter-turn fault cannot responsd to inter-turn fault before the
generator is connected into the power grid.
3.3.4 Backup protection of generator
3.3.4.1 Phase-to-phase impedance protection
The Two stage impedance protection is equipped at the terminal of the generator as its
phase-to-phase backup protection. Phase-to-phase current used in impedance relay is derived
from CT at the neutral point of generator. Circular impedance, directional circular impedance or
drifted circular impedance characteristic can be selected to act for these two stages. Circular
characteristic suits case of forward setting of a zone being equal to its reverse setting. Directional
circular characteristic suits case of reverse setting of a zone being set as 0. Drifted circular
characteristic suits case of forward setting of a zone which is greater than its reverse setting.
Reach angle of impedance protection is 78°. Positive direction of the impedance protection is
configurable and generally points to generator.
Figure 3.3-7 shows operation characteristic of impedance element. In this figure, I is

phase-to-phase current, U is corresponding phase-to-phase voltage, Zn is reverse impedance
setting, Zp is forward impedance setting.

Operation criterion:
 
(U  I Z P )
90   Arg  
 270 
(U  I Z n ) (Equation 3.3-8)
DPFC of phase-to-phase current and negative current element are adopted as fault detector of
impedance protection. Initiation of the fault detector will be extended to 500 ms and will be kept if
impedance relay operates during this time interval. Operation criterion of the fault detector is
I  1.25I t  I th
(Equation 3.3-9)
Where:
I t is floating threshold which increases gradually along with DPFC increment. Take its multiple
as 1.25 can ensure threshold voltage always a bit higher than unbalance voltage.
jX

I Zp
 
U I Zp
m 
U
R
 
 U  I Zn
 I Zn
Figure 3.3-7 Operation characteristic of impedance element
Therefore unwanted operation of the equipment can be avoided during system swing and
frequency deviation conditions. I th is the fixed threshold. When DPFC of phase-to-phase current
is greater than 0.2 Ie, the fault detector operates.
The protection adopts two sets of VT at the terminal of generator. If one set of VT circuit fails,
another set of VT can be switched over automatically on the premise of the funciton of voltage
balance is enabled.

3.3.4.2 Logic diagram of distance protection of generator
[Flg_VTS]
&
[Flg_Zn_Gen]
& [Op_Zn_Gen]
& t
[En_PPF_Gen]
[EBI_PPF_Gen]
[FD_PPF_Gen]
Figure 3.3-8 Logic diagram of distance protection of generator
Where:
[Flg_Zn_Gen] is internally generated indicating stage n of distance protective element of generator

operates.
[EBI_PPF_Gen] is the position flag of binary input for enabling phase-to-phase backup protection
of generator which including phase-to-phase distance protection and voltage-controlling
overcurret protection. ―1‖ means enabled.
3.3.4.3 Voltage-controlled Overcurrent protection
This protection is used as a backup protection of generator, main transformer, HV busbar and
neighboring power lines. There are two stages with their own delay settings respectively. Stage 1
is used to trip bus couple breaker or other circuit breaker and stage 2 to shut down the generator.
Figure 3.3-9 shows its logic diagram.
(1) Composite voltage element
Composite voltage element consists of phase-to-phase undervoltage element and negative

sequence overvoltage element. These two elements are jointed together by the ‗OR‘ gate. By
this relevant logic setting both the stage 1 and the stage 2 of the overcurrent protection can be
configured to be controlled by composite voltage elements respectively.
(2) Function of current memory
For generators with self shunt excitation, current will decrease so quickly during fault that it may be
lower than overcurrent setting before tripping. So function to remember fault current is equipped
with this protection. Logic setting [Opt_ExcMode_Gen] is used for configuration of this function.
See details about the setting in section 7.3.4.
(3) Protection performance during VT circuit failure
A logic setting [Opt_VTS_Ctrl_OC_Gen] is used to configure action of composite voltage element

during VT circuit failure. When this logic setting is set as 1, if this side VT circuit failure is
detected, the composite voltage element will not meet conditions to operate. When this logic
setting is set as 0, if this side VT circuit failure is detected, composite voltage element is disabled,

the overcurrent protection will not be blocked and becomes a pure overcurrent protection.
3.3.4.4 Logic Diagram of voltage-controlling Overcurrent Protection
Upp<[Vpp_VCE_Gen]
=1
&
U2>[V_NegOV_VCE_Gen]
=1 Op_VCE_Gen
[Flg_VTS]
[Opt_VTS_Ctrl_OC_Gen] &
[Opt_ExcMode_Gen] &
[Flg_OCn_Gen] =1
&
[Op_VCE_Gen]
& t Op_OCn_Gen
=1
[En_VCE_Ctrl_OCn_Gen]
[En_PPF_Gen]
&
[EBI_PPF_Gen]
[FD_PPF_Gen]
Figure 3.3-9 Logic diagram of overcurrent relay with composite voltage blocking
Where：
[Upp ] represents any one of the three phase-to-phase voltage of generator.
[U2 ] is negative sequence voltage of generator calculated by protection.
[Flg_OCn_Gen] is internally generated flag indicating stage n of overcurrent operates, which

means the measured current is in excess of its setting [I_OCn_Gen]. Where n represents stage
serial number 1 and 2.
As for principle of discrimination of VT circuit failure see section 3.3.21.
3.3.5 Earth fault protection of stator
3.3.5.1 Fundamental zero sequence overvoltage earth fault protection
Single-phase earth fault within 85% - 95% range from terminal of stator winding can be protected
by fundamental zero-sequence overvoltage protection.
Fundamental zero-sequence overvoltage protection reacts to magnitude of zero sequence voltage

of generator. Since it adopts frequency tracking, digital filtering and full cycle Fourier algorithm, the
third harmonic can be reduced to 1/100 within the frequency tracking range and the protection can
respond to the basic wave component only.

This protection comprises two stages: sensitive stage and insensitive stage (high setting stage).
(1) Sensitive stage of the protection
Operation criterion for alarm of this stage is
U n0  U0zd
(Equation 3.3-10)
Where:
U 0zd  K rel U unb.max , U 0zd is operation threshold setting of fundamental zero sequence voltage
[V_SensROV_Sta].
U unb.max is the maximum measured value of unbalance zero sequence voltage.
K rel is reliability coefficient, 1.2~1.3 in general.
To assure its security, this device is designed to use the open-delta voltage obtained from the VT
at the generator terminal.
The voltage is a blocking element for a sensitive stage of this function. If the voltage is in excess of
the automatically-set setting according to the VT ratio of both at terminal and at the neutral point
set by user in system parameter item, the function will be blocked.
(2) Insensitive stage of the protection
Operation criterion for alarm of this zone is
U n0  U0hzd
(Equation 3.3-11)
Where:
[ U n0 ] is zero sequence voltage of neutral point of generator
[ U 0hzd ] is the zero sequence voltage high setting. 20V ~ 25V is recommended generally.
3.3.5.2 Third harmonic voltage ratio earth fault protection of stator
This protection is designed to cover only about 25% of earth fault of the stator. Third harmonic
voltage of generator terminal is got from its open-delta zero sequence voltage. Third harmonic
voltage of neutral point side is got from neutral point VT of the generator.
Operation criterion of this protection
U 3T / U 3N  K3wzd
(Equation 3.3-12)
Where:

U 3T and U 3N are third harmonic voltage of generator terminal and neutral point respectively.
K 3wzd is the third harmonic voltage percentage setting [k_3rdHRatio_PreSync_Sta] and
[k_3rdHRatio_PostSync_Sta].
During incorporation of generator to power system, the ratio U 3T / U 3N changes considerably
owing to variation of equivalent capacitive reactance at the generator terminal. So two different
settings are designed for protection before and after the connection of generator with system.
These two settings can be switched over with alternation of contacts‘ position of the terminal
breaker.
In addition, the settings are provided for deciding whether the ratio protection of third harmonics
voltage is used for alarming or tripping or both.
3.3.5.3 Third harmonic voltage differential ground protection
Operation criterion of this protection
  
U 3T  K t  U 3 N  Kre  U 3 N
(Equation 3.3-13)
Where:
 
U 3T and U 3 N are third harmonic vector voltage of generator terminal and neutral point,
K t is automatic tracing regulation coefficient.
K re is third harmonic differential percentage setting [k_3rdHDiff_Sta].
This protection is enabled automatically when the generator has been connected with the system
and load current is greater than 0.2 Ie (generator rated current). It only issues alarms if it is
operating.
3.3.5.4 VT circuit failure blocking
(1) Open-delta VT circuit failure alarm of terminal and neutral point of generator
Since open-delta voltages of VT at neutral point and generator terminal are taken for zero
sequence voltage protection of stator, failure of these VT circuits will make this protection fail to
operate and an alarm shall be issued in this case. The third harmonic voltage ratio criterion and
third harmonic voltage differential criterion shall be disabled during VT circuit failure at the
generator neutral point.
Criterion of VT circuit failure:

Positive sequence voltage of secondary winding of the generator terminal is greater than 0.9Un
and the third harmonic of zero sequence voltage is lower than 0.1V.
VT circuit failure alarm will be issued after a delay of 10s and reverted automatically after delay of
10s when the failure vanishes.
(2) Primary circuit failure of VT1 at generator terminal
Secondary circuit failure of VT1 at generator terminal will not influence earth fault protection of
stator. Primary circuit failure of VT1 at generator terminal will cause fundamental component of
zero sequence voltage increase and third harmonic component decrease, and so will not lead to
unwanted operation of fundamental zero sequence voltage protection and third harmonic voltage
ratio protection. However, it will cause unwanted operation of third harmonic voltage differential
protection, so this protection shall be blocked during this failure. Operation criterion of this failure
is:
Negative sequence voltage of VT2, 3U2‘ <3 V;
Negative sequence voltage of VT1, 3U2> 8V.
Calculated zero sequence voltage of VT1, 3U0> 8V.
Open-delta voltage of VT1, 3U0> 8V.
When these criterion are met, VT1 primary circuit failure alarm will be sent with short delay and
third harmonic voltage differential protection will be blocked.
3.3.5.5 Logic diagrams of earth fault protection of stator
Figure 3.3-10 shows logic diagram of fundamental zero sequence voltage earth fault protection
and Figure 3.3-11 shows logic diagram of third harmonic voltage earth fault protection
respectively.
[En_Alm_ROV_Sta]
[Flg_VTS]
& t Alm_ROV_Sta
[Flg_SensROV_Sta] &
[En_EF_Sta]
& t
[En_Trp_ROV_Sta] & Op_SensROV_Sta
[EBI_ROV_Sta]
[FD_EF_Sta]
Figure 3.3-10 Logic diagram of fundamental zero sequence overvoltage earth fault protection of
stator
Where:
[Flg_SensROV_Sta] is internally generated flag indicating fundamental zero-sequence

overvoltage element operates, that is, fundamental zero-sequence voltage exceeds its setting.

[EBI_ROV_Sta] is binary input of enabling fundamental zero sequence overvoltage and zero
sequence overcurrent earth fault protection of stator.
[En_Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta]
[Flg_VTS]
& t Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta
&
[Flg_V3rdHRatio_Sta]
[En_EF_Sta]
[En_Trp_V3rdHRatio_Sta] & t
& Op_V3rdHRatio_Sta
[EBI_V3rdH_Sta]
[FD_EF_Sta]
[En_Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta]
[Flg_VTS]
& t Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta
&
[Flg_V3rdHDiff_Sta]
[En_EF_Sta]
[En_Trp_V3rdHDiff_Sta] & t
& Op_V3rdHDiff_Sta
[EBI_V3rdH_Sta]
[FD_EF_Sta]
Figure 3.3-11 Logic diagram of third harmonic voltage protection
Where:
[Flg_Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta] is internally generated flag indicating alarm issued by ratio element of

3rd harmonics voltage is available, that is, the ratio is in excess of its setting.
[Flg_Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta] is internally generated flag indicating alarm issued by differential
element of 3rd harmonics voltage is available.
[EBI_V3rdH_Sta] is state flag of binary input of enabling ratio protection of 3rd harmonics voltage.
―1‖ means enabled.
3.3.6 Earth fault protection of rotor

3.3.6.1 Ping-pang type (Switch-over sampling) rotor one point earth fault protection
If one-point earth fault of rotor occurs, insulation resistance between rotor winding and the axis will
drop down.
Rotor earth fault protection measures earthing resistance Rg of the winding by an unbalance
bridge as shown in Figure 3.3-12. Corresponding equations can be got by switching over S1 and
S2 alternately, and earthing resistance Rg and location of the earthing point ―  ― can be found by
calculation.
There are two stages equipped for one-point earth protection: sensitive stage and regular stage.

Sensitive stage is used for alarm and regular stage for tripping or alarm.
U
+ aU -
rotor
R Rg R
R S1 S2 R
Figure 3.3-12 Measurement of earth resistance of rotor
3.3.6.2 Two-points earth protection of rotor
If one-point earth protection is used for alarm only, when earth resistance Rg is less than the
setting of its regular stage, it will switch over to two-point ground protection program with a delay
automatically. If the location of the earthing point varies and the variation reaches its setting value
(fixed value 3%), two-point ground protection will trip.
Figure 3.3-13 and Figure 3.3-14 show logic diagram of one-point and two-point earth fault
protection of rotor.
3.3.6.3 Logic diagram of earth fault protection of rotor
Rg < [R_Sens_1PEF_RotWdg]
t Alm_Sens_1PEF_RotWdg
&
[En_Alm_Sens_1PEF_RotWdg]
[En_Alm_1PEF_RotWdg]
Alm_1PEF_RotWdg
& t
Rg <[R_1PEF_RotWdg]
&
[t_1PEF_RotWdg]
[En_EF_RotWdg]
[En_Trp_1PEF_RotWdg] &
& t Op_1PEF_RotWdg
[EBI_1PEF_RotWdg] [t_1PEF_RotWdg]
[FD_EF_RotWdg]
Figure 3.3-13 Logic diagram of one-point earth fault protection of rotor

t
[Op_1PEF_RotWdg]
[Flg_2PEF_RotWdg] &
[En_EF_RotWdg]
[Flg_V2ndH_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg] t Op_2PEF_RotWdg
&
=1
[En_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg]
[En_2PEF_RotWdg]
[EBI_EF_RotWdg]
[FD_EF_RotWdg]
Figure 3.3-14 Logic diagram of two-points earth fault protection of rotor
Where:
Flg_2PEF_RotWdg: is internally generated flag indicating two-point earth element operates
3.3.7 Generator stator overload protection

Stator overload represents average heating of winding of the stator. This protection takes current
at generator terminal and neutral point as its criterion.
3.3.7.1 Definite time stator overload protection
There are two stages equipped with definite time stator overload protection: one for alarm and the
other for tripping. Figure 3.3-16 shows its logic diagram.
3.3.7.2 Inverse time stator overload protection
Inverse time stator overload protection consists of three parts: low setting initiator, inverse time
part and upper limit definite time part.
Inverse time part can simulates generator-heating process including heat accumulation and
dissipation. When stator current reaches its low setting I SZD ([I_InvOvLd_Sta]), inverse time part
initiates and the heat is accumulated. When the stator current is lower than rated value, the heat
accumulation will decrease accordingly.
Figure 3.3-15 shows the inverse time curve. In the figure, t min is delay of upper limit of inverse
time curve and I SZD is setting of the inverse time protection.

I
Ih
Iszd
t min t max
Figure 3.3-15 Operation curve of inverse time stator overload protection
Operation criterion of inverse time part:
[(I Iezd  K srzd  ]  t  K szd

2 2
(Equation 3.3-14)
Where:
K SZD is thermal capacity constant of generator ([A_Therm_Sta]),
K SRZD is heat dissipation factor of generator ([Kb_Therm_Sta])
I eZD is rated secondary current of generator.
Figure 3.3-17 shows logic diagram of inverse time stator overload protection.
3.3.7.3 Logic diagram of stator overload protection
I>[I_Alm_OvLd_Sta] Definite time stator

t
& overload alarm
[En_OvLd_Sta]
I>[I_OvLd_Sta]
& t Definite time stator
& overload protection trips
[En_OvLd_Sta]
[TrpLog_OvLd_Sta].bit0 &
[EBI_Ovld_Sta]
[FD_Ovld_Sta]
Figure 3.3-16 Logic diagram of stator definite time overload protection

I > [I_InvOvLd_Sta]
& &
[TrpLog_InvOvLd_Sta].bit0 tmin
& Op_InvOvLd_Sta
[TrpLog_InvOvLd_Sta].bit0
&
[EBI_EF_Sta]
[FD_OvLd_Sta]
Figure 3.3-17 Logic diagram of inverse time stator overload protection
3.3.8 Negative sequence overload protection

Negative sequence overload reflects overheating on surface of the rotor and other abnormality
due to negative sequence current. This protection takes negative sequence current in generator
end and neutral point as its criterion.
3.3.8.1 Definite time negative sequence overload protection
There are two stages equipped with definite time negative sequence overload protection: one for
alarm and the other for tripping. Figure 3.3-19 shows its logic diagram.
3.3.8.2 Inverse time negative sequence overload protection
Inverse time negative sequence protection consists of three parts: low setting initiator, inverse
time part and upper limit definite time part.
Inverse time part can simulate generator-heating process including heat accumulation and
dissipation. When negative sequence current reaches its low setting [I_InvNegOC_Gen], inverse
time part initiates and the heat is accumulated. When the stator current is lower than permissive
continuous negative sequence current [I_Neg_Perm_Gen], the heat accumulation will decrease
accordingly.
Operation criterion of inverse time part:
[(I 2 / I ezd ) 2  (I 2 l ) 2 ]  t  A
(Equation 3.3-15)
Where:
I 2 is generator negative sequence current,
I eZD is generator rated current,
I 21 is permissive continuous negative sequence current (per unit value), and
A is negative sequence heating constant of rotor.
Figure 3.3-18 shows the inverse time curve. In the figure, t min ([tmin_InvNegOC_Gen]) is delay of

upper limit of inverse time curve and I 2 SZD ([I_InvNegOC_Gen]) is setting of the inverse time
negative sequence overload protection.
I2zd
t min t max
Figure 3.3-18 Operation curve of inverse time negative sequence overload protection of stator
3.3.8.3 Logic diagram of negative sequence overload protection of stator
[En_NegOC_Gen]
t Alm_NegOC_Gen
&
I2>[I_Alm_NegOC_Gen]
[t_Alm_NegOC_Gen]
I2>[I_NegOCn_Gen]
& & t Op_NegOCn_Gen
[En_NegOC_Gen] [t_NegOCn_Gen
]
[TrpLog_NegOCn_Gen].bit0
&
[EBI_NegOC_Gen]
[FD_PPF_Gen]
Figure 3.3-19 Logic diagram of definite time negative sequence overload protection

I >[I_InvNegOC_Gen]
& &
[En_NegOC_Gen] t min
& Op_InvNegOC_Gen
[TrpLog_InvNegOC_Gen].bit0
&
[EBI_NegOC_Sta]
[FD_PPF_Gen]
Figure 3.3-20 Logic diagram of inverse time negative sequence overload protection
3.3.9 Loss-of-Excitation protection
3.3.9.1 Theory of loss-of-excitation protection
Loss of excitation represents abnormal operation of generator due to excitation failure. There are
four criterions used for loss-of-excitation protection: under voltage, stator side impedance, rotor
side undervoltage/excitation voltage and power output reduction.
3.3.9.2 Under voltage criterion
Three phase voltages on bus generally and those at generator terminal sometimes are taken as
this criterion. Criterion of simultaneous three phases under voltage is
U pp  U lezd
(Equation 3.3-16)
Where:
Upp is phase-to-phase voltage of busbar or of generator terminal.
Ulezd is undervoltage setting [V_BusUV_LossExc_Gen].
The protection will be blocked, when bus voltage is taken as the criterion and the bus VT circuit
fails. When the generator terminal voltage is taken as the criterion, if one group of VT circuit fails,
the other group of VT will be switched over to automatically.
3.3.9.3 Stator side impedance criterion
This criterion is impedance circle including asynchronous impedance circle and steady state
stabilization limit circle. The operation criterion is
Z  jX B
270   Arg  90 
Z  jX A (Equation 3.3-17)
Where:
X A can be set as the system impedance Xs for steady state stabilization limit circle and
X A  1/2X d' for asynchronous impedance circle;

X B is taken as Xd  1/2X ' for round rotor generator and (X  X )/2  X ' /2 for salient pole
d d q d
generator.
The impedance criterion can be combined with reverse reactive power criterion, i.e.,
Q  [Q_RevQ_LossExc_Gen].
Figure 3.3-21 (a) and (b) show operation characteristics of steady state stabilization impedance
relay and asynchronous impedance relay, where the hatched area is operating area, and the
dotted line is operation limit of reverse reactive power.
jx jx
Z1
R Z1
R
-Qzd -Qzd
Z2 Z2
a) b)
(a) (b)
Figure 3.3-21 Operation characteristic of stator side impedance relay
Besides operation criterion mentioned above, there are also auxiliary operation criterions, namely:
Positive sequence voltage is greater than or equal to 6 V;
Negative sequence voltage U2 is lower than 0.1 Un (rated voltage of generator); and
Current of generator is no less than 0.1 Ie (rated current of generator).
3.3.9.4 Rotor side criterion
Rotor side criterion comprises:
Rotor undervoltage criterion: U r  U rlzd ;
Variable exciter voltage criterion: U r  K r  X dz  S  U f0
Where:
Ur is exciting voltage.
U rlZD is the setting [V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen].
X dz  X d  X s , X d is synchronous reactance of generator (per unit value);

Xs is equivalent reactance on system side connected with the generator (per unit value);
S is rated apparent power of generator (per unit value);
U f0
is rated voltage of exciter during generator without load;
K r is reliability coefficient.
If Ur drops to zero or goes to minus value suddenly during loss of excitation, the rotor under
voltage criterion will be met quickly before steady state stability limit of the generator is reached. If
Ur drops to zero or reduces to a value gradually during loss of excitation, the variable excitation
voltage criterion will be reached. Excitation under voltage or loss of excitation will cause
out-of-step, and then excitation voltage and output power of the generator will swing seriously. In
this case, the rotor under voltage criterion and the variable excitation voltage criterion will be met
and withdrawn periodically in general. So the excitation voltage element will revert with delay
during out-of-step condition while the impedance entering the steady state stability limit circle.
3.3.9.5 Reduced power output
Active power criterion for power output reduction is P > Pzd.
When out-of-step occurs during loss of excitation, power output of generator will swing within a
certain range. P represents average power output within an oscillation period. Pzd is the setting
[P_LossExc_Gen].
3.3.9.6 Logic diagram of loss-of-excitation protection
Three stages are equipped with loss-of-excitation protection: stage 1 is used for reduction of
power output and alarm, stage 2 (with bus undervoltage criterion) is used for tripping, stage 3 is
used for tripping with long delay.
Figure 3.3-22 shows logic diagram of stage 1 of loss-of-excitation protection. If excitation is lost,
this stage will be used to reduce power output to a pre-set level and issue alarm.

[En_Alm_LossExc1_Gen]
Alm_LossExc_Gen
& t
P > [P_OvPwrLossExc_Gen]
&
≥1
[En_P_LossExc1_Gen]
Ur<[V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen] t Op_LossExc1_Gen
&
≥1
Ur Kr XdzSn Uf0 &
≥1
[En_RotUV_LossExc1_Gen]
Z  jX B
270   Arg  90 
Z  jX A &
&
[En_Z_LossExc1_Gen] ≥1
&
Q>[Q_RevQ_LossExc_Gen]
[En_RevQ_LossExc_Gen]
[En_LossExc_Gen]
[EBI_LossExc_Gen]
[TrpLog_LossExc1_Gen].bit 0
[FD_LossExc&OOS_Gen]
Figure 3.3-22 Logic diagram of loss-of-excitation protection stage 1
Figure 3.3-23 shows logic diagram of stage 2 of loss of excitation protection. If excitation is lost
and voltage on HV side bus of main transformer is lower than its setting, this stage will trip with
delay. In configuring this stage with consideration to security, it is strongly recommended that
impedance criterion should be used as well as busbar criterion rather than the model where only
busbar undervoltage criterion and rotor undervoltage criterion are used.

Upp<[V_UV_LossExc_Gen
&
[En_UV_LossExc2_Gen] ≥1
Ur<[V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen]
≥1
&
Ur  Kr  Xdz  Sn  Uf0
≥1
t Op_LossExc2_Gen
&
Z  jX
270   Arg B
 90  &
Z  jX
&
A
≥1
[En_Z_LossExc2_Gen]
&
[En_LossExc_Gen]
[EBI_LossExc_Gen]
Figure 3.3-23 Logic diagram of stage 2 of loss of excitation protection
Figure 3.3-24 shows logic diagram of stage 3 of loss of excitation protection. It is used for
switching over backup excitation or for tripping. It is also used for tripping with long delay in case of
failure of all measures taken by the former stages, such as power output reduction and switching
over backup excitation and has no effects on the more and more worse system.
Ur<[V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen]
≥1
Ur  Kr  Xdz  Sn  Uf0 &
≥1
Z  jX
270   Arg B
 90 
Z  jX A & &
[En_Z_LossExc3_Gen] t Op_LossExc3_Gen
≥1 &
&
[En_LossExc_Gen]
[EBI_LossExc_Gen]
Figure 3.3-24 Logic diagram of stage 3 of loss of excitation protection
3.3.10 Out-of-step protection

Out-of step represents asynchronous operation of generator due to out-of-step. Figure 3.3-25

shows operation characteristic of this protection that comprises three parts: lens part, boundary
part and reactance line part.
jx
Za
U
D
Zc
OL
IL 3
2
1 IR 1
OR
0
R
L R
Zb
Figure 3.3-25 Operation characteristic of out-of-step protection
In Figure 3.3-25, lens ① divides impedance plane into inside part I and outside part O, boundary
② divides the impedance plane into left part L and right part R, and reactance line ③ divides the
impedance plane into upper part U and lower part D.
Considering lens ① and boundary ② comprehensively, the impedance plane is divided into four
areas: OL, IL, IR and OR. If trace of impedance is passing through these four areas in sequence
from right to left or vice versa, and staying in each area for a moment longer than the setting, this
case is considered as system swing. Times of the passing through are accumulated and the grand
total is considered as the times of pole sliding. When the grand total reaches its setting value,
out-of-step protection operates.
As to reactance line ③, if the impedance trace passes through the upper part U, the swing center
is considered outside the generator; if the trace passes through the lower part D, the swing center
is considered within the generator. Settings of times of pole sliding can be configured separately
for these two cases.
Out-of-step protection can be used either for alarm only or tripping. Minimum swing period which
can be identified by this protection is 120 ms.
Figure 3.3-26 shows logic diagram of out-of-step protection.
[En_Alm_Ext(Int)_OOS_Gen]
[Flg_Blk_OOS] t
&
[Flg_OOS_Gen] & Alm_Ext(Int)_OOS_Gen
[En_OOS_Gen]
[TrpLog_OOS_Gen].bit0 &
Op_Ext(Int)_OOS_Gen
& t
[EBI_OOS_Gen]
Figure 3.3-26 Logic diagram of out-of-step protection

3.3.11 Voltage protection

Voltage protection of generator comprises overvoltage and undervoltage protection.
3.3.11.1 Overvoltage protection
Overvoltage protection is used as protection against stator overvoltage occurring in various

operation conditions. It will issue tripping command when the maximum phase-to-phase voltage at
the terminal of generator is in excess of the setting. Calculation of voltage is independent of
variation of frequency. Two stages of overvoltage protection are equipped with RCS-985G for
Upp>[V_OVn_Gen]
&
[En_VoltProt_Gen] &
& t Op_OVn_Gen
[TrpLog_OVn_Gen].bit0 t_OVn_Gen
[EBI_VoltProt_Gen]
[FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen]
tripping.
Figure 3.3-27 shows logic diagram of overvoltage protection.
3.3.11.2 Undervoltage protection
Undervoltage protection responses to reduction of phase-to-phase voltage at the terminal of

generator and will trip terminal breaker of the generator with configurable delay. The protection is
controlled by external equipment such as control equipment of synchronous condenser. Only one
stage of undervoltage protection is equipped with RCS-985G. Figure 3.3-28 shows logic diagram
of undervoltage protection.
3.3.11.3 Logic diagram of overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection
Upp>[V_OVn_Gen]
&
[En_VoltProt_Gen] &
& t Op_OVn_Gen
[TrpLog_OVn_Gen].bit0 t_OVn_Gen
[EBI_VoltProt_Gen]
[FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen]
Figure 3.3-27 Logic diagram of overvoltage protection
[BI_SyncCondenser]
Upp.max<[V_UV_Gen] &
&
& t Op_UV_Gen
[En_VoltProt_Gen]
t_UV_Gen
[TrpLog_UV_Gen].bit0
[EBI_VoltProt_Gen]
[FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen]
Figure 3.3-28 Logic diagram of under voltage protection

3.3.12 Over excitation protection

Over excitation protection is used to prevent generator or transformer from damage due to over
excitation. It represents multiples of over excitation of generator (or LV side of main transformer)
and comprises two kinds of protection: generator over excitation protection and main transformer
over excitation protection. Besides, each kind of over excitation protection comprises definite time
protection and inverse time protection.
3.3.12.1 Definite time over excitation protection
Two stages for tripping and one stage for alarm are equipped for definite over excitation protection.
Their time delay can be configured.
Multiple of over excitation n can be expressed as follows:
n  U pu / Fpu
(Equation 3.3-18)
U pu Fpu
Where and are per unit value of voltage and frequency respectively.
Figure 3.3-30 shows logic diagram of definite time over excitation protection.
3.3.12.2 Inverse time over excitation protection
Inverse time over excitation protection realizes inverse time characteristic by linear processing on
given inverse time operation characteristic, obtaining multiple of over excitation by calculation, and
getting corresponding operation delay by sectional linear insertion. It reflects heat accumulation
and radiation.
Figure 3.3-30 shows inverse time operation characteristics of over excitation protection. It can be
specified by 8 over excitation multiple settings n0 – n7.
U/F
n0
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
n6
n7
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t(s) t7
Figure 3.3-29 Inverse time operation characteristics of over excitation protection
The over excitation multiple settings n (= U/F) are within range of 1.0 – 1.5 in general. Maximum
time delay t is considered as long as 3000 s. Relation between various settings of n and t are:
n0 ≥ n1 ≥ n2 ≥ n3 ≥ n4 ≥ n5 ≥ n6 ≥ n7
t0 ≤ t1 ≤ t2 ≤ t3 ≤ t4 ≤ t5 ≤ t6 ≤ t7

Figure 3.3-31shows logic diagram of inverse time over excitation protection.
3.3.12.3 Logic diagram of excitation protection
[En_OvExc_Gen]
t Alm_OvExc_Gen
&
U/F > [k_Alm_OvExc_Gen] [t_Alm_OvExc_Gen]
U/F > [k_OvExc n_Gen]

t Op_OvExcn_Gen
&
&
[En_OvExc_Gen]
[t_OvExcn_Gen]
[TrpLog_OvExc n_Gen].bit0
&
[EBI_OvExc_Gen]
[FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen]
Figure 3.3-30 Logic diagram of time over excitation protection
U/F >[k n_InvOvExc_Gen]

&
[En_OvExc_Gen] &
Op_InvOvExc_Gen
[TrpLog_InvOvExc_Gen].bit0
&
[EBI_OvExc_Gen]
[FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen]
Figure 3.3-31 Logic diagram of inverse time over excitation protection
3.3.13 Power protection

Power protection comprises reverse power protection, sequence-tripping reverse power
protection.
Reverse power protection can prevent turbine blades or gears from damage in the case when
the generator transforms into a motor mode and flows reverse power due to loss of its motive
force.
Operation criterion of this reverse power protection is P  - [P_RevP_Gen] , where P is the
power calculated from three phase voltage and current and [P_RevP_Gen] is the reverse power
setting.
One stage for tripping and the other stage for alarm with independent delay setting respectively
are equipped with this protection.
Range of reverse power setting is 0.5% - 10% Pn, where Pn is rated active power of the generator.
Range of delay is 0.1 s – 600 s.

Figure 3.3-32 shows logic diagram of reverse power protection.
Sometimes, when overload, over excitation or loss-of-excitation protection of generator initiate and
tripping is needed, the steam valve of turbine has to be closed first. Sequent-tripping reverse
power protection is used for this condition. Such protection is a reverse power protection that is
blocked by the position contact of steam valve and circuit breaker of generator. It can trip relevant
circuit breakers with a certain delay since the steam valve being closed. Its setting range is 0.5% -
10% Pn.
Figure 3.3-33 shows logic diagram of sequent-tripping reverse power protection.
P>-[P_RevP_Gen]
& &
[En_PwrProt_Gen] & t Op_RevP_Gen
[TrpLog_RevP_Gen].bit0 [t_Trp_RevP_Gen]
[EBI_PwrProt_Gen]
[FD_Pwr&AccEnerg_Gen]
Figure 3.3-32 Logic diagram of reverse power
[BI_52b_GCB]
[BI_Valve_Turbine]
&
Op_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
P>-[P_SeqTrp_RevP_Gen]
& t
&
[En_PwrProt_Gen]
[t_SeqTrp_RevP_Gen]
[TrpLog_SeqTrp_RevP_Gen].bit0
[EBI_PwrProt_Gen]
Figure 3.3-33 Logic diagram of program reverse power protection
3.3.14 Frequency protection

Frequency protection of generator comprises underfrequency and overfrequency protection.
Permissive range of frequency of large generator is 48.5 Hz – 50.5 Hz. When frequency is lower
than 48.5 Hz and if the accumulated time or duration of underfrequency operation in one
continuous process reaches the setting value, the protection will issue an alarm signal or trip. This
protection is blocked by the position contact of circuit breaker and no-current flag.

Three stages of underfrequency protection are equipped for RCS-985G, of which stages 1 is
fixedly configured as accumulating time underfrequency protection, but stage 2 and stage 3 are
designed as continuous time underfrequency characteristic.
As to over frequency protection, two stages are equipped for RCS-985G and they will issue alarm
or trip when it operates.
[En_Alm_UFn_Gen]
[Flg_Blk_FreqProt_Gen] & t Alm_UFn_Gen
& [t_Alm_UF_Gen]
f<[f_UFn_Gen]
[En_FreqProt_Gen]
[f_UFn_Gen].bit0 & t Op_UFn_Gen

&
[EBI_FreqProt_Gen] [t_UFn_Gen]
[FD_FreqProt_Gen]
Figure 3.3-34 Logic diagram of underfrequency protection of generator
[En_Alm_OFn_Gen]
[Flg_Blk_FreqProt_Gen] & t Alm_OFn_Gen
& [t_Alm_OF_Gen]
f<[f_OFn_Gen]
[En_FreqProt_Gen]
[f_OFn_Gen].bit0 & t Op_OFn_Gen

&
[EBI_FreqProt_Gen] [t_OFn_Gen]
[FD_FreqProt_Gen]
Figure 3.3-35 Logic diagram of overfrequency protection of generator
3.3.15 Accidental energization protection

Accidental energization protection comprises of unwanted closing protection and breaker
flashover protection.
3.3.15.1 Unwanted closing protection
Unwanted closing protection is used for following cases:
(1) In the course of generator‘s hand turning (low frequency condition), if it has been excited,
breaker closure by accident may lead to asynchronous starting of the generator. The protection is
put into use automatically with time delay t1 when two groups of voltage derived from two

independent VTs are all less than undervoltage setting and exit with time delay t2 (designed to
cooperate with low-frequency blocking criterion) when the two groups of voltage revert to normal
level.
(2) In the case of the generator breaker being closed by accident in excited condition but the
frequency is under normal level which may occur in startup-and-shutdown process. The protection
is put into use automatically with a time delay t3 during which the Low Frequency criterion is met
and it returns with a time delay t4 after the frequency criteria is released. Here, t4 should be set so
long as to ensure the completion of the tripping course.
(3) If the circuit breaker is closed by accident when the phase angle difference of bus and
generator voltage is very high, say, around 180°, the through closing current will also be too high.
In this case the excitation shall be shut off first and the breaker of the generator can be tripped
until the generator current falls to a level below the standard setting.
In considering the security of the protection, both currents from generator terminal and neutral
point are used in the logic as criteria.
Figure 3.3-36 shows logic diagram of unwanted closing protection of generator.
3.3.15.2 Breaker flashover protection
During the process of synchronization of generator, flashover in circuit breaker is possible when
the difference of phase angle of bus voltage and generator voltage is around 180°. Breaker
flashover protection is provided for this fault. One phase and two phases flashover is considered
by this protection but three phase flashovers are ignored.
Criterion of circuit breaker flashover:
Position contacts of three phases of circuit breaker are open;
Negative sequence current is greater than setting;
Excitation has been applied to generator, and generator voltage is greater than setting.
Operation of this protection will shut off excitation and activate circuit breaker failure protection.
Figure 3.3-37 shows logic diagram of breaker flashover protection. Generally, the protection is
equipped with two delay settings, the first is for shut off excitation and the second is for tripping the
local line breaker.

3.3.15.3 Logic diagram of accidental energization protection
[Flg_UV_Blk] & t1 t2
F<[f_UF_AccEnerg_Gen] =1
& t3 t4
[En_UF_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen]
[BI_52b_CB]
[Flg_NoCurr_CB_Gen] t3 t4 =1
&
[En_CB_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen]
I>[I_OC_AccEnerg_Gen] Trip of circuit

& & t breaker
&
[En_CB_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen]
I_T>[I_OC_AccEnerg_Gen]
&
I_N>[I_OC_AccEnerg_Gen]
[Flg_NoCurr_CB_Tr] Trip of other

& t
breakers
[En_AccEnerg_Gen]
& &
[EBI_AccEnerg_Gen]
Figure 3.3-36 Logic diagram of unwanted closing protection of generator
[BI_52b_CB]
I2>[I2_Flash_GCB] & Op_Flash11_GCB

& & t
U>Uset.fix t>[t_Flash11_GCB]
[En_AccEnerg_Gen] Op_Flash12_GCB
t
[EBI_AccEnerg_Gen] t>[t_Flash12_GCB]
Figure 3.3-37 Logic diagram of breaker flashover protection
3.3.16 Breaker failure protection

If breaker at the terminal of the generator fails when a generator internal fault occurs, it need to trip
breakers at HV side of the transformer and plant transformer. So the breaker failure initiation for
HV side breakers will be active. The current used is from terminal CT of generator.
Breaker failure initiation (BFI) in RCS-985 is initiated by one of three elements: phase overcurrent
element, zero sequence current element or negative sequence current element.
Figure 3.3-38 shows logic diagram of breaker failure protection.

[BI_52b_GCB]
≥1
[En_CB_Ctrl_BFP_GCB]
[BI_ExtProtTrp]
≥1
[En_ExtTrpCtrlBFP_GCB]
I>[I_BFP_GCB]
I2>[I_NegOC_BFP_GCB]
& & & t Op_BFP11_GCB
& ≥1
[En_NegOC_BFP_GCB]
[t_BFP11_GCB]
3I0>[I_ROC_BFP_GCB]
t Op_BFP12_GCB
&
[En_ROC_BFP_GCB]
[t_BFP12_GCB]
[En_BFP_GCB]
&
[EBI_BFP_Gen]
[FD_Bak_Gen]
Figure 3.3-38 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
3.3.17 Generator startup and shutdown protection

Protection for phase-to-phase fault and stator earth fault is provided during startup and shutdown
process of the generator.
Differential current protections are provided for faults of generator. A zero sequence overvoltage
protection is provided for stator earth fault.
Since frequency during startup and shutdown process is usually very low, algorithm independent
of frequency is used for this protection.
Whether the protection should be blocked or not by frequency element or auxiliary contact of
circuit breaker can be determined by logic setting.
F<[f_UF_Ctrl_StShut_Gen] t0
T>[t_**_StShut_Gen]
[En_StShut_Gen] & &
& t
Op_**_StShut_Gen
[Flg_**_StShut_Gen]
[TrpLog_**_StShut_Gen].bit0
[EBI_StShut_Gen]
[FD_StShut_Gen]
Figure 3.3-39 Logic diagram of generator startup and shutdown protection
Where:

―**‖ represent one of the three protective elements, ―GenDiff‖, ―UF_OC‖ and ―StaROV‖. The three
protective elements‘ diagrams are so likely that they can be expressed in a figure instead of three
for them respectively.
3.3.18 Excitation winding overload protection

Excitation winding overload protection is equipped to reflect average heating condition of
excitation winding. Excitation transformer current, exciter current or rotor current of generator can
be taken as criterion of this protection. To exciter, frequency can be configured as 50 Hz or 100
Hz.
Excitation winding protection comprises definite time and inverse time protection.
3.3.18.1 Definite time excitation winding overload protection
One stage of alarm and one stage of tripping are equipped for definite time excitation winding
overload protection.
Figure 3.3-41 shows logic diagram of definite time excitation winding overload protection.
3.3.18.2 Inverse time excitation winding overload protection
Inverse time excitation winding overload protection consists of three parts: low setting initiator,
inverse time part and high setting definite part. Minimum operation time delay
([tmin_InvOvLd_RotWdg]) is provided for extreme overload condition.
When current in excitation circuit reaches the low setting [I_InvOvLd_RotWdg], the inverse time
protection initiates and the heating accumulation process starts. When the heating accumulation
reaches its setting, alarm will be issued. The inverse time protection can simulate heating
accumulation and radiation process.
Il
Ilh
Ilszd
t min tmax t
Figure 3.3-40 Operation characteristic of inverse time overload protection of excitation winding
In the figure,
I l is the current in excitation circuit,
I lh is corresponding value to tmin of the protection;

I lsZD is the low setting of the protection [I_InvOvLd_RotWdg];
tmin is minimum delay [tmin_InvOvLd_RotWdg] .

Tmax is corresponding time value to [I_InvOvLd_RotWdg] of the protection;
Its operation criterion is:
[( I l I jzzd）  1]  t  KLzd
2
(Equation 3.3-19)
Where:
I jzzd is inverse time reference current of excitation circuit;
KLzd is setting of heat capacity factor of excitation
I>[I_InvOvLd_RotWdg]
& &
[En_OvLd_RotWdg]
tmin Op_InvOvLd_RotWdg
[TrpLog_InvOvLd_RotWdg].bit0 &
[EBI_OvLd_RotWdg] &
[FD_Prot_Exc]
circuit.
Figure 3.3-42 shows logic diagram of inverse time excitation winding overload protection.
I>[I_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg]
& t Alm_OvLd_RotWdg
[En_OvLd_RotWdg]
I>[I_OvLd_RotWdg]
& & t Op_OvLd_RotWdg
[En_OvLd_RotWdg]
[TrpLog_OvLd_RotWdg].bit0
&
[EBI_OvLd_RotWdg]
[FD_Prot_Exc]
Figure 3.3-41 Logic diagram of definite time excitation winding overload protection

I>[I_InvOvLd_RotWdg]
& &
[En_OvLd_RotWdg]
tmin Op_InvOvLd_RotWdg
[TrpLog_InvOvLd_RotWdg].bit0 &
[EBI_OvLd_RotWdg] &
[FD_Prot_Exc]
Figure 3.3-42 Logic diagram of inverse time excitation winding overload protection
3.3.19 Excitation transformer and exciter protection
3.3.19.1 Excitation transformer and exciter differential protection
(1) Operation criterion of excitation transformer differential protection is:
 I d  K bl  I r  I cdqd ( I r  nI e )

 K bl  K bl1  K blr  ( I r / I e )

 I d  K bl 2  ( I r  nIe )  b  I cdqd ( I r  nIe )

 K blr  ( K bl 2  K bl1 ) /( 2  n)
b  ( K bl1  K blr  n)  nIe
. (Equation 3.3-20)
  
I 1  I2

 Ir 
 2
  
I d  I 1  I 2

The criterion is the same to Equation 3-1 except the differential current and restraint current. Here:
For excitation transformer: I 1 and I 2 are currents of HV side and LV side respectively.
(2) Operation criterion of exciter differential protection section 3.3.1.
3.3.19.2 Excitation transformer and exciter overcurrent protection
Two stages of overcurrent protection are equipped for excitation transformer or exciter overcurrent
protection as backup protection. These two stages will trip the circuit breaker with configurable
delay.
Figure 3.3-43 shows its logic diagram.

[I>[I_OC n_Exc]
t Op_OC n_Exc
&
[En_Bak_Exc]
[t_OC n_Exc]
[EBI_Bak_Exc] &
[TrpLog_OC n_Exc].bit0
[FD_Prot_Exc]
Figure 3.3-43 Logic diagram of excitation transformer or exciter overcurrent protection
3.3.20 CT circuit failure alarm
3.3.20.1 Three-phase current circuit failure alarm
Operation criterion of the alarm is:
I 2  0.04 In  0.25I max

(Equation 3.3-21)
Where:
I 2 is negative sequence current;
In is secondary rated current and
I max
is maximum phase current.
If this criterion is met, CT circuit failure alarm will be issued with 10s delay. Once the condition
reverts to normal condition, the alarm will be reset with a 10s delay.
3.3.20.2 Differential current alarm in differential protection circuit
This function is enabled only when relevant differential protection logic setting is set as enabled.
If the criterion is met, the alarm will be sent after a delay of 10 s and corresponding differential
protection will not be blocked. When the differential current is eliminated, the alarm will be reset
with a delay of 10 s.
In order to increase sensitivity of this alarm, the percentage restraint differential current alarm
criterion is adopted as shown below.
 I d  I dbjzd

I d  k bj  I res (Equation 3.3-22)
If the differential current reaches its threshold and also reaches the differential alarm level of
percentage restraint factor multiplied by the restraint current, the differential current alarm will be
issued.

3.3.20.3 Alarm or blocking to differential protection by CT circuit failure
Function of instantaneous CT circuit failure discrimination is equipped for differential protection.

Only when related logic settings and relevant enabling binary input of protection are set ―on‖, this
function of alarm or blocking of instantaneous CT circuit failure discrimination will be enabled.
If internal fault occurs, at least one of following four conditions will be present:
(1) Negative sequence voltage at any side is greater than 2V;
(2) Any phase current of a certain side increases after fault detector picks up;
(3) Maximum phase current is greater than 1.2 Ie after initiation;
(4) At least three phase-currents increase after the fault detector picks up.
If none of the above four conditions occur within 40 ms of the differential protection‘s fault
detectors being picked up, the protection treats it as a CT circuit failure. If the logic setting
[Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Gen] is set as ―1‖, the differential protection will be blocked and an alarm
will be issued. If this logic setting is set as ―0‖, the differential protection will trip and an alarm will
be issued simultaneously.
If the alarm is issued, the signal can be removed only when the failure is removed and the
equipment is reset manualy.
3.3.21 VT circuit failure alarm
3.3.21.1 VT circuit of any side failure alarm
Operation criterion of this failure is:
(1) Positive sequence voltage is less than 18V and any phase current is greater than 0.04 In;
(2) Negative sequence voltage U2 is in excess of 8 V.
If any one condition occurs, VT circuit failure alarm will be issued with delay 10 s, and the alarm
will be removed automatically by delay 10 s when the failure is removed.
3.3.21.2 Voltage balance on generator terminals
Two groups of VT are equipped at generator terminal. VT circuit failure can be detected by
comparison of phase voltage and positive sequence voltage of these two groups of VT.
Operation criterions are:
U AB1 - U AB2  5 V ;
U BC1 - U BC2  5 V ;
U CA1 - U CA2  5 V ; (Equation 3.3-23)
U11 - U12  3 V ;
Where:

UAB1, UBC1, UCA1 and U11 are phase-to-phase voltage and positive sequence voltage of VT
group 1;
UAB2, UBC2, UCA2 and U12 are phase-to-phase voltage and positive sequence voltage of VT
group 2.
If any of the conditions mentioned above occurs, the VT circuit failure alarm will be issued with a
delay of 0.2 s and the VT group used will be switched over.
When only a VT fails, it will not influence the functioning of related protection such as
loss-of-excitation, out-of-step, overvoltage, over-excitation, reverse power, frequency, impedance
protection and overcurrent protection.
If only one group of VT is provided at generator‘s terminal, user can set this function to ―disable‖.
3.3.22 Output contacts driven by overcurrent element

When a fault occurs at generator terminal and tripping is needed but, if breaking capacity of circuit
breaker of generator is not high enough, these breakers shall be blocked until other related cuircuit
breakers is tripped before. RCS-985 provides a set of output contacts driven by overcurrent
element, which is used to be connected into the tripping circuit of breaker who flow more current
than its capacity to be a blocking element before the breaker is tripped.
Ia>[I_BO_OC_Gen]
Operates
Ib>[I_BO_OC_Gen] ≥1
&
Ic>[I_BO_OC_Gen]
[En_BO_OC_Gen]
Figure 3.3-44 Blocking logic diagram of overcurrent element for driving output contact
3.3.23 Mechanical protection

Interfaces of mechanical protection such as emergency tripping, failure of condenser vacuum are
equipped for the equipment. External protection equipments send those signals to RCS-985G
which makes the event record and sends an alarm or tripping command to the relevant circuit
breaker with a delay. Enabling binary inputs are provided for those protections. Setting ranges of
time delay of those protection are all 0 s – 6000 s.

Chapter4 Self-supervision, metering and records
4.1 Self-supervision
If hardware failure of the equipment is detected, protection functions of the equipment will be
blocked and an equipment blocking alarm will be issued. Hardware failure includes those on RAM,
EPROM, settings, power supply, DSP and tripping coil.
When the following abnormal statuses are detected, an abnormal warning will be issued: AC
voltage or current circuit failure, persist pickup, mismatch state of pickup between CPU and DSP
and alarm of protection element.
The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware
and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the
relay‘s hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the problem and attempt to
resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of
time that is indicated by the ‗Healthy‘ LED on the faceplate of the relay being off and the watchdog
contact at the rear operating.
If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will make itself permanently out of service.
Again this will be indicated by the ‗ALARM‘ LED and watchdog contact. If a problem is detected by
the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a maintenance record in battery
backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to be notified to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is
performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a continuous self-checking
operation which checks the operation of the relay‘s critical functions during the time it is in service.
4.1.1 Start-up self-testing

The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to complete,
during which time the relay‘s protection is unavailable. This is signaled by the ‗Healthy‘ LED on the
front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay has passed all of the tests and entered
operation. If the testing detects a problem, the relay will remain out of service until it is manually
restored to working order.
The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:
4.1.1.1 System boot
The integrity of the flash memory is verified using a checksum before the program code and the
data stored in it is copied into the SRAM to be used for execution by the processor. When the data
has been copied to the SRAM, the data is compared to that in the flash to ensure the two are the
same and no errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash to SRAM. The entry point of
the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay initialization code.

4.1.1.2 Initialization software
The initialization process includes the operations of initializing the processor registers and
interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine whether the software
is still running), starting the real-time operating system and creating and starting the supervisor
task. In the course of the initialization process the relay checks:
• The integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and disturbance
records.
• The integrity of the flash that is used to store program.
• The correctness of the settings that ensures relay‘s proper response to fault.
• The operation of DSP and CPU.
• The voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the opto-isolated inputs.
• The operation of the LCD controller.
• The watchdog operation.
At the conclusion of the initialization software the supervisor task begins the process of starting the
platform software.
4.1.1.3 Platform software initialization & monitoring
In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in non-volatile
memory with a checksum. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data, the
presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the analog data acquisition
system is checked through sampling of the reference voltage.
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and the protection
started-up.
4.1.2 Continuous self-testing

When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware
and software. The checking is carried out by the system services software and the results reported
to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows:
• The flash containing all program code, setting values and language text is verified by a
checksum
• The code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding data in flash to
check for data corruption
• The SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified with a checksum
• The level of the field voltage
• The integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the relay contacts is
checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed. The operation of the analog
data acquisition system is continuously checked by the acquisition function every time it is

executed, by means of sampling the reference voltages.
In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relay‘s subsystems, the
platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance record in the battery
backed-up SRAM. If the problem is of no importance (no possibility of leading to mal-operation),
the relay will continue in operation.
However, for problems detected in any important area the relay will initiate a shutdown and re-boot.
This will result in a period of up to 5 seconds when the protection is unavailable, but the complete
restart of the relay including all initializations should clear most problems that could occur. As
described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough diagnostic self-check. If
this detects the same problem that caused the relay to restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the
problem; the relay will then make itself permanently out of service. This is indicated by the
‗Healthy‘ LED on the front of the relay, which will be off, and the watchdog contact that will operate.
• Voltage transformer supervision (VTS). See section 3.3.21 for detail.
• Current transformer supervision (CTS). See section 3.3.20 for detail.
If the alarm is issued, the alarm signal can be reset only when the failure is removed and the
equipment is reset by pressing ―RESET‖ button on panel or re-power it up.
• Overload Alarm
On the condition that the relay does not pick up due to adding of current in excess of the setting of
the overload protection, an alarm message is displayed and ALARM LED is lit after the timer stage
duration has elapsed.
• Binary input status monitoring
Any status of binary input changing will be monitored.
• Tripping output circuit monitoring
Tripping output relay driving transistor is always monitored in a normal program, and a blocking
message will be issued when the equipment finds abnormality of the tripping output circuit.
4.1.3 List of alarm messages

When hardware failure is detected, all protection functions will be blocked and block signal will be
sent. The equipment cannot work in this case. Hardware failure such as failure of RAM, error of
EEPROM, settings invalid, loss of power source of opto-coupler, error of DSP, tripping output
circuit failure, etc, will be issued during which time the relay will be blocked. All the failure alarms
can be found on LCD and in event recording report. The following table gives a list of these alarms
signals and the behavior of the relay responding to these failures.
Note:
There are three alarm LEDs on HMI module: ―ALARM‖ LED, ―CT ALARM‖ LED and ―VT ALARM‖
LED. In following tables ―ALARM‖, ―CT ALARM‖ or ―CT ALARM‖ means the corresponding LED is
turned on.

Abnormality information printed or displayed on LCD and trouble shooting are described in
following table.
Table 4.1-1 Severe failure alarm list
No. Information (on LCD) Notes LED LED Suggestion Relay is

―HEALTHY‖ ―Alarm‖ Blocked?
1. Alm_RAM_CPUBrd Note1 Off On Note I YES
2. Alm_ROM_CPUBrd Note2
3. Alm_EEPROM_CPUBrd Note3
4. Alm_InvalidSetting Note4 Note II
5. Alm_ModifiedSetting Note5 Note III
6. Alm_PwrLoss_Opto Note6 Note IV
7. Alm_TripOutput Note7 Note I
8. Alm_DSP_CPUBrd Note8
9. Alm_DSP_MONBrd Note9
10. Alm_Sample_CPUBrd Note10
11. Alm_Sample_MONBrd Note11
12. Alm_RAM_MONBrd Note12

13. Alm_ROM_MONBrd Note13
14. Alm_EEPROM_MONBrd Note14
15. Alm_MONBrd Note15
16. Alm_PM_DSP2_CPUBrd Note16
17. Alm_PM_DSP1_CPUBrd Note17
Note:
Note1: CPU module RAM damaged.
Note2: CPU module flash memory damaged.
Note3: CPU module EEPROM damaged judged by the mismatch of summation of all the
settings with the CRC code .
Note4: Without modifying protection setting after modification of rated secondary current of CT.
Note5: In the proceeding of setting parameters.
Note6: Loss of power supply of the optical couplers for binary inputs.
Note7: Driving transistor of binary output damaged.
Note8: The DSP chip in CPU board damaged.
Note9: The DSP chip in MON board damaged.
Note10: Failure of sampled data in CPU board.
Note11: Failure of sampled data in MON board.
Note12: MON module RAM damaged.
Note13: MON module flash memory damaged.
Note14: MON module EEPROM damaged.
Note15: MON module damaged.
Note16: The DSP2 chip on CPU board damaged.

Note17: The DSP1 chip on CPU board damaged.

NoteI: Inform manufacturer for maintenance.
NoteII: Modify and check protection setting again.
NoteIII: Do nothing except waiting for completion of the process.
NoteIV: Check if the power circuit of OPT module is connected correctly with DC module.
Table 4.1-2 Common failure alarm list

1. Alm_Inconsist_MechRly Note1 On On Note I No
2. Alm_PwrLoss_MechRly Note2
3. Alm_InconsistFD Note3 Note II
4. Alm_PersistFD_CPUBrd Note4 Note III
5. Alm_PersistFD_MONBrd Note5
6. Alm_BI_CPUBrd Note6 Note IV
7. Alm_InnerComm Note7 Note V
8. Alm_Pos_GCB Note8 Note VI
Note:
Note1: Alarm of the mechanical protection due to inconsistance of input signal and repeated
output signal.
Note2: The power supply of mechanical protection is lost.
Note3: Mismatch of pickup of same type fault detectors in CPU and MON.
Note4: Duration of pickup of any fault detector in CPU board is in excess of 10s.
Note5: Duration of pickup of any fault detector in MON board is in excess of 10s.
Note6: Any one of binary input sampled directly doesn‘t match with that of reorganization of
protection itself.
Note7: Alarm indicating that the communication between MON and CPU interrupts.
Note8: The sampled statuses of auxiliary contact of generator terminal breaker‘s don‘t match
with that of operation condition identified from calculation of voltage and currents.
NoteI: Check and recover the power supply of mechanical protection.

NoteII: Check the difference of sampled value in CPU and MON board.
NoteIII: Check and ensure that settings are not too low and secondary circuit of VT or CT is in
proper working condition.
NoteIV: Check and ensure the auxiliary contact of breaker position is in good working condition.
NoteV: Check the cable used for connecting the CPU and MON board and ensure no interruption
exist.
NoteVI: Check the auxiliary contact of generator terminal breaker and ensure its proper working
condition.
Table 4.1-3 Alarm list of secondary circuit of VT and CT


1. Alm_SwOv_VTS1_Gen Note1 On On Note I No
2. Alm_SwOv_VTS2_Gen Note2
3. Alm_BlkV3rdHDiff_VTS1 Note3
4. Alm_BlkIntTurn_VTS2 Note4
5. Alm_VTS_HVS_Tr Note5
6. Alm_VTS1_Term_Gen Note6
7. Alm_VTS2_Term_Gen Note7
8. Alm_VTS_NP_Gen Note8
9. Alm_DeltVTS1_Term_Gen Note9
10. Alm_DeltVTS2_Term_Gen Note10
11. Alm_VTS_LossExc_RotWdg Note11
12. Alm_CTS_SpareCT_Gen Note12
13. Alm_CTS_Term_Gen Note13
14. Alm_CTS_NP_Gen Note14
15. Alm_CTS_SP1_Gen Note15
16. Alm_CTS_SP2_Gen Note16
17. Alm_Diff_Gen Note17
18. Alm_SPTDiff_Gen Note18
19. Alm_CTS_Diff_Gen Note19
20. Alm_CTS_SPTDiff_Gen Note20
21. Alm_CTS_S1_Exc Note21
22. Alm_CTS_S2_Exc Note22
23. Alm_Diff_ET Note23
24. Alm_Diff_Exciter Note24
25. Alm_CTS_Diff_ET Note25
26. Alm_CTS_Diff_Exciter Note26
Note:
Note1: Alarm indicating VT1 circuit failure and start to switch over voltage circuit.
Note2: Alarm indicating VT2 circuit failure and start to switch over voltage circuit.
Note3: Alarm indicating VT1 circuit failure and blocking 3rd harmonics voltage differential
protection.
Note4: Alarm indicating VT2 circuit failure and blocking interturn protection.
Note5: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT at HV side of main transformer.
Note6: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT1 at generator terminal.
Note7: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT2 at generator terminal.
Note8: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT at the neutral point of generator.

Note9: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure at open-delta side of VT1 at generator terminal.
Note10: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure at open-delta side of VT2 at generator terminal.
Note11: Alarm indicating rotor voltage circuit failure which used by loss-of-excitation protection.
Note12: Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of spare CT at generator terminal.
Note13: Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT at generator terminal.
Note14: Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT at the neutral point of generator.
Note15: Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT installed in splitting-phase branch1
at the neutral point of generator .
Note16: Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT installed in splitting-phase branch2
at the neutral point of generator.
Note17: Alarm indicating differential current of generator is in excess of normally endurable level.
Note18: Alarm indicating splitting-phase transverse differential current of generator is in excess of
normally endurable level.
Note19: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CTs used for differential protection.
Note20: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CTs used for splitting-phase transverse
differential protection.
Note21: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT at side1 of excitation set used in
differential protection of excitation.
Note22: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT at side2 of excitation set used in
differential protection of excitation.
Note23: Alarm indicating differential current of excitation transformer is in excess of normally
endurable level.
Note24: Alarm indicating differential current of exciter is in excess of normally endurable level.
Note25: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT used in excitation transformer differential
protection.
Note26: Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT used in exciter differential protection.
NoteI: Locate the position of failure by checking sampled data in protection and secondary
circuit to decide the maintenance scheme.
Table 4.1-4 Alarm list of protective elements

1. Alm_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen Note1 On On Note I No
2. Alm_BO_OC_Term_Gen Note2
3. Alm_On_2PEF_RotWdg Note3
4. Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen Note4
5. Alm_Int_OOS_Gen Note5
6. Alm_Accel_OOS_Gen Note6
7. Alm_Decel_OOS_Gen Note7
8. Alm_LossExc_Gen Note8
9. Alm_OvExc_Gen Note9
10. Alm_OvLd_Sta Note10

11. Alm_NegOC_Gen Note11
12. Alm_OvLd_RotWdg Note12
13. Alm_ROV_Sta Note13
14. Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta Note14
15. Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta Note15
16. Alm_Sens_1PEF_RotWdg Note16
17. Alm_1PEF_RotWdg Note17
18. Alm_UF1_Gen Note18
21. Alm_OF1_Gen Note21
22. Alm_OF2_Gen Note22
23. Alm_RevP_Gen Note23
24. Alm_MechRly4 Note24
Note:
Note1: Alarm indicating operation of DPFC interturn protective element.
Note2: Alarm indicating operation of overcurrent element used for driving a set of contact to
block other circuit.
Note3: Alarm indicating 2 points earth fault protection has been put input operation after
operation of 1 point earth fault protection of rotor.
Note4: Alarm indicating out-of-step of system occurs while its oscillation center is outside
protective zone.
Note5: Alarm indicating out-of-step of system occurs and its oscillation center is inside protective
zone.
Note6: Alarm indicating accelerate out-of-step occurs.
Note7: Alarm indicating decelerate out-of-step occurs.
Note8: Alarm indicating operation of loss-of-excitation protective element.
Note9: Alarm indicating operation of over excitation protective element.
Note10: Alarm indicating operation of overload element of stator.
Note11: Alarm indicating operation of negative overcurrent protective element of stator.
Note12: Alarm indicating operation of overload protective element of rotor.
Note13: Alarm indicating operation of fundamental zero-sequence overvoltage earth fault
protective element of stator.
rd
Note14: Alarm indicating operation of 3 harmonics ratio earth fault protective element of stator.
rd
Note15: Alarm indicating operation of 3 harmonics differential earth fault protective element of
stator.

Note16: Alarm indicating operation of sensitive stage of 1 point earth fault protective element of
rotor.
Note17: Alarm indicating operation of normal stage of 1 point earth fault protective element of
rotor.
Note18: Alarm indicating operation of stage 1 of under frequency protective element of generator.
Note21: Alarm indicating operation of stage 1 of over frequency protective element of generator.
Note22: Alarm indicating operation of stage 2 of over frequency protective element of generator.
Note23: Alarm indicating operation of reverse power protective element of generator.
Note24: Alarm indicating operation of mechanical repeater 4. In this project, this alarm means
operation of stage 2 of 1PEF of rotor.
operation of stage 1 of 1PEF of rotor.
failure of condenser vacuum.
operation of manual emergency tripping.
NoteI: Treat according to specific application requirement.
4.2 Metering
The relay produces a variety of both directly and calculated power system quantities. These
measurement values are updated on a per half second basis and can be viewed in the menu
―VALUES‖ of the relay or via relay communication.
This relay is able to measure and display the following quantities as summarized:
4.2.1 Measured voltages and currents

The relay produces both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage and current values. They
are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by the relay protection
functions and present both magnitude and phase angle measurement.
4.2.2 Sequence voltages and currents

Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values; these are
displayed as magnitude and phase angle values.
4.2.3 Rms. voltages and currents

Rms. phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of the samples
squared over a cycle of sampled data.
4.2.4 Differential current and relevant quantities

Differential current and restrained current calculated in differential protection is displayed to user
for monitoring the correctness of operation or testing of the differential protection.

4.2.5 Phase angles

Calculated phase angles are also displayed on LCD to help user to check the correctness of CT or
VT circuit.
4.2.6 Measurement display quantities

Here are ―VALUES‖ available in the relay for viewing of measurement quantities. All the
measurement quantities can be divided into CPU quantities or DSP quantities by their origin where
they are derived. These can also be viewed with RCSPC (see RCSPC User Manual) and are
shown below:
4.2.7 All metering data displayed on LCD
4.2.7.1 Differential current and related values in CPU and MON
GEN DIFF CURR
Id_Diff_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie

Ir_Diff_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
I_Term_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_Term_Gen: 000.00 A
I_NP_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_NP_Gen: 000.00 A
Gen Diff Curr
I2_NP_Gen: 000.00 A
I0_NP_Gen: 000.00 A
I_BakCT_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_BakCT_Gen: 000.00 A
I_PwrProt_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_PwrProt_Gen: 000.00 A

Gen Diff Curr
Figure 4.2-1 Differential current and related values in CPU and MON
Where:
[Ie]: secondary calculated rated current of generator.
[Id_Diff_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of per unit value of generator differential current.
[Ir_Diff_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of per unit value of generator restraint current.
[I_Term_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of current derived from CT at generator‘ terminal.
[I1_Term_Gen]: Positive sequence current of generator terminal.
[I2_Term_Gen]: Negative sequence current of generator terminal.
[I0_Term_Gen]: Calculated zero sequence current of generator terminal.
[I_NP_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of current derived from CT at generator‘ neutral point.
[I1_NP_Gen]: Positive sequence current of generator neutral point.
[I2_NP_Gen]: Negative sequence current of generator neutral point.
[I0_NP_Gen]: Calculated zero sequence current of generator neutral point.
[I_BakCT_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of current derived from backup CT at generator‘ terminal.
[I1_BakCT_Gen]: Positive sequence component of the current derived from backup CT at

[I2_BakCT_Gen]: Negative sequence component of the current derived from backup CT at

[I0_BakCT_Gen]: Calculated zero sequence component of the current derived from backup CT at
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU METERINGGEN DIFF CURR‖ and ―VALUES MON

METERINGGEN DIFF CURR‖.
Note:
The contents inside the first window are the default display seen by user entering this submenu.
User can navigate to the following items (as shown in the other two windows) by scrolling the
arrow keys on the faceplate of the relay. What user meets similar to this case later can be dealt
with in same way.
4.2.7.2 Transverse differential current and related values in CPU and MON
GEN TRVDIFF CURR
Id_TrvDiff_Gen: 000.00 A
Id_3rdH_TrvDiff_Gen: 000.00 A
Id_SPTDiff_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
Ir_SPTDiff_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
Icorr_SP1_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
Icorr_SP2_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
I_SP1_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_SP1_Gen: 000.00 A
GEN TRVDIFF CURR

I2_SP1_Gen: 000.00 A
I0_SP1_Gen: 000.00 A
I_SP2_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_SP2_Gen: 000.00 A
I2_SP2_Gen: 000.00 A
I0_SP2_Gen: 000.00 A
Figure 4.2-2 Transverse differential current and related values in CPU and MON
Where:
[Id_TrvDiff_Gen]: transverse differential current of generator.
[Id_3rdH_TrvDiff_Gen]: 3rd harmonics component of transverse differential current.
[Id_SPTDiff_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of per unit value of phase-splitting transverse differential

current of generator.
[Ir_SPTDiff_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of per unit value of restraint current of phase-splitting

transverse differential protection.
[Icorr_SP1_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of per unit value of branch1‘s corrected current.
[Icorr_SP2_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of per unit value of branch2‘s corrected current.
[I_SP1_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of splitted branch1‘s current.
[I1_SP1_Gen]: Splitted branch1‘s positive sequence current.
[I2_SP1_Gen]: Splitted branch1‘s negative sequence current.
[I0_SP1_Gen]: Splitted branch1‘s zero sequence current.
[I_SP2_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of Splitted branch2‘s current.
[I1_SP2_Gen]: Splitted branch2‘s positive sequence current.
[I2_SP2_Gen]: Splitted branch2‘s negative sequence current.
[I0_SP2_Gen]: Splitted branch2‘s zero sequence current.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU METERING GEN TRVDIFF CURR‖ and VALUES
MON METERING GEN TRVDIFF CURR‖.
4.2.7.3 Voltages and related values in CPU and MON
GEN VOLTAGE
U_VT1_Term_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 V

U1_VT1_Term_Gen: 000.00 V
U_VT2_Term_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 V

GEN VOLTAGE
Upp_VT1_Term_G: 000.00 000.00 000.00 V

Upp_VT2_Term_G: 000.00 000.00 000.00 V
U0_DeltVT1_Term_Gen: 000.00 V
U0_NP_Gen: 000.00 V
U0_3rdH_VT1_Term_G: 000.00 V
U0_3rdH_NP_Gen: 000.00 V
Ud_3rdH_Sta: 000.00 V
U0_Longl_Gen: 000.00 V
GEN VOLTAGE
U0_3rdH_Longl_Gen: 000.00 V
U_Busbar: 000.00 V
Figure 4.2-3 Voltages and related values in CPU and MON
Where:
[U_VT1_Term_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of voltage derived from VT1 at the generator‘s terminal.
[U1_VT1_Term_Gen]: Calculated positive sequence voltage of VT1.
[U2_VT1_Term_Gen]: Calculated negative sequence voltage of VT1.
[U0_VT1_Term_Gen]: Calculated zero sequence voltage of VT1.
[U_VT2_Term_Gen]: Phase A, B and C of voltage derived from VT2 at the generator‘s terminal.
[U1_VT2_Term_Gen]: Calculated positive sequence voltage of VT2.
[U2_VT2_Term_Gen]: Calculated negative sequence voltage of VT2.
[U0_VT2_Term_Gen]: Calculated zero sequence voltage of VT2.
[Upp_VT1_Term_G]: Phase-to-phase voltage of VT1—Uab, Ubc, Uca.

[Upp_VT2_Term_G]: Phase-to-phase voltage of VT2—Uab, Ubc, Uca.
[U0_DeltVT1_Term_Gen]: Zero sequence voltage derived from open-delta side of VT1 at the
generator‘s terminal.
[U0_NP_Gen]: Zero sequence voltage derived from open-delta side of VT at the neutral point of
generator.
[U0_3rdH_VT1_Term_Gen]: Calculated 3rd harmonics of VT1 at the generator‘s terminal.
[U0_3rdH_VT_NP_Gen]: Calculated 3rd harmonics of VT at the neutral point of generator.
[Ud_3rdH_Sta]: 3rd harmonics differential voltage between the terminal and the neutral point of
generator.
[U0_Longl_Gen]: Longitude zero sequence voltage of generator.
[U0_3rdH_Longl_Gen]: 3rd harmonics voltage in longitude zero voltage.
[U_Busbar]: Single phase voltage derived from busbar voltage transformer.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU METERING GEN VOLTAGE‖ and VALUES MON
METERING GEN VOLTAGE‖.
4.2.7.4 Misc metering quantities of generator in CPU and MON
GEN MISC VALUES
P_Gen: + 000.00 %
Q_Gen: + 000.00 %
Accu_InvOvLd_Sta: 000.00 %
Accu_InvNegOC_Gen: 000.00 %
U/F_OvExc_Gen: 00.000
Accu_InvOvExc_Gen: 000.00 %
f_Gen: 000.00 Hz
Accu_UF1_Gen: 000.00 Min

GEN MISC VALUES
Accu_UF2_Gen: 000.00 Min

U1_2ndH_VT1_Term_Gen: 000.00 V
U2_2ndH_VT1_Term_Gen: 000.00 V
Figure 4.2-4 Misc metering quantities of generator
Where:
[P_Gen]: Active power of generator.
[Q_Gen]: Reactive power of generator.
[Accu_InvOvLd_Sta]: Accumulation of thermal due to overload of stator.
[Accu_InvNegOC_Gen]: Accumulation of thermal due to negative sequence current through stator

result from interaction between rotor and stator.
[U/F_OvExc_Gen]: Calculated ratio of per unit values of voltage and frequency.
[Accu_InvOvExc_Gen]: Accumulation of thermal due to overexcitation of generator.
[f_Gen]: real-time calculated frequency of generator.
[Accu_UF1_Gen]: Accumulation of underfrequency condition time of generator to decide operation

of state 1 of underfrequency protection.
[Accu_UF2_Gen]: Accumulation of underfrequency condition time of generator to decide operation

of state 1 of underfrequency protection.
[U1_2ndH_VT1_Term_Gen]: Positive sequence voltage of 2nd harmonics voltage of stator

derived from VT1 at the generator‘s terminal.
[U2_2ndH_VT1_Term_Gen]: Negative sequence voltage of 2nd harmonics voltage of stator

derived from VT1 at the generator‘s terminal.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU METERING GEN MISC VALUES‖ and VALUES
MON METERING GEN MISC VALUES‖.

4.2.7.5 Rotor Winding Metering in CPU and MON
RotWdg METERING
U(+)_RotWdg: 0000.0 V
U(-)_RotWdg: 0000.0 V
U_RotWdg: 0000.0 V
Rg_RotWdg: 000.00 kΩ
Location_EF_RotWdg: 050.00 %
I_RotWdg: -0000 A
I_Exc: 000.00 A
Accu_InvOvLd_RotWdg: 000.00 %
Figure 4.2-5 Rotor Winding Metering quantities of generator
Where:
[U(+)_RotWdg]: voltage of positive pole of rotor to ground.
[U(-)_RotWdg]: voltage of negative pole of rotor to ground.
[U_RotWdg]: voltage of positive pole of rotor to negative pole.
[Rg_RotWdg]: calculated grounded resistance of rotor.
[Location_EF_RotWdg]: the position of earth fault in rotor.
[I_RotWdg: excitation current through rotor winding.
[I_Exc]: alternative excitation current on the rectifier‘s AC side
[Accu_InvOvLd_RotWdg]: accumulation of thermal of rotor winding.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU METERING RotWdg METERING‖ and VALUES
MON METERING ROTWDG METERING‖.

4.2.7.6 Excitation System Metering in CPU and MON
EXC AC METERING
Id_Diff_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie

Ir_Diff_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
Id_2ndH_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
Icorr_S1_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
Icorr_S2_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
I_S1_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_S1_Exc: 000.00 A
I2_S1_Exc: 000.00 A
EXC AC METERING
I0_S1_Exc: 000.00 A
I_S2_Exc: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_S2_Exc: 000.00 A
I2_S2_Exc: 000.00 A
I0_S2_Exc: 00.00 A
Figure 4.2-6 Excitation System metering of generator
Where:
[Id_Diff_Exc]: Phase A, B and C of differential current of excitation transformer or exciter.
[Ir_Diff_Exc]: Phase A, B and C of restraint current of excitation transformer or exciter.
[Id_2ndH_Exc]: Phase A, B and C of 2nd harmonics component in differential current of excitation

transformer or exciter.
[Icorr_S1_Exc]: Phase A, B and C of corrected current on the high voltage side of excitation
transformer or terminal side of exciter (Side 1).
[Icorr_S2_Exc]: Phase A, B and C of corrected current on the low voltage side of excitation
transformer or neutral point side of exciter (Side 2).
[I_S1_Exc]: Phase A, B and C current on side 1 of excitation transformer or exciter.

[I1_S1_Exc]: Positive sequence current of side 1 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[I2_S1_Exc]: negative sequence current of side 1 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[I0_S1_Exc]: zero sequence current of side 1 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[I_S2_Exc]: Phase A, B and C current on side 2 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[I1_S2_Exc]: Positive sequence current of side 2 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[I2_S2_Exc]: negative sequence current of side 2 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[I0_S2_Exc]: zero sequence current of side 2 of excitation transformer or exciter.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU METERING EXC AC METERING‖ and VALUES
MON METERING EXC AC METERING‖.
4.2.7.7 Phase Angle of Generator‘ relevant quantities
GEN PH ANG
o
φ_Term_&_NP_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φ_SP1_&_SP2_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_Term_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_NP_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_PwrProt_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_SP1_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_SP2_GenTV1: 000 000 000
o
φvpp_VT1_Term_Gen: 000 000 000
GEN PH ANG
o
o
φv_VT1_&_VT2_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φ_V3rdH_Gen: 000.0
o
φvi_Term_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φvi_Term_&_Bak_Gen: 000 000 000
Where:

[φ_Term_&_NP_Gen]：phase angle between same-phase currents derived from CT at generator‘s

terminal and at generator‘s neutral point.
[φ_SP1_&_SP2_Gen]: phase angle between same-phase currents derived from CT at

phase-splitting branch 1 and branch2.
[φipp_Term_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current derived from
CT at generator‘s terminal.
[φipp_NP_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current derived from
CT at generator‘s neutral point.
[φipp_PwrProt_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current specially
used for power protection.
[φipp_SP1_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current derived from
CT at the phase-splitting branch 1.
[φipp_SP2_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current derived from
CT at the phase-splitting branch 2.
[φvpp_VT1_Term_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of voltage

derived from VT1 at generator‘s terminal.
[φvpp_VT2_Term_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of voltage

[φv_VT1_&_VT2_Gen]: phase angle between same-phase voltages derived from VT1 and VT2 at
[φ_V3rdH_Gen]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of 3rd harmonics voltage
[φvi_Term_Gen]: phase angle between same-phase voltage and current of generator‘s terminal.
[φvi_Term_&_Bak_Gen]: phase angle between same-phase voltage from VT1 and current derived
from spare CT at generator‘s terminal.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES PHASE ANGLE GEN PH ANG‖.

4.2.7.8 Phase Angle of excitation relevant quantities
EXC PH ANG
o
φi_S1_&_S2_Exc: 000 000 000
o
φipp_S1_Exc: 000 000 000
o
φipp_S2_Exc: 000 000 000
Where:
[φi_S1_&_S2_Exc]: phase angle between same-phase currents derived from CT at generator‘s

terminal and that at generator‘s neutral point
[φipp_S1_Exc]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current derived from
CT at side 1 of excitation transformer or exciter.
[φipp_S2_Exc]: phase angle between phase A and B, B and C, C and A of current derived from
CT at side 2 of excitation transformer or exciter.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES PHASE ANGLE EXC PH ANG‖.
4.3 Signaling
Signals here mean changes of binary inputs. All these signals can be displayed on LCD, locally
printed or sent to automation system of substation via communication channel.

4.3.1 Enabling Binary Inputs of generator
GEN PROT EBI
EBI_Diff_Gen: 0
EBI_SPTDiff_Gen: 0
EBI_PPF_Gen: 0
EBI_IntTurn_Gen: 0
EBI_ROV&ROC_Sta: : 0
EBI_V3rdH_Sta: 0
EBI_1PEF_RotWdg: 0
EBI_2PEF_RotWdg: 0
GEN PROT EBI

EBI_FreqProt_Gen: 0
EBI_OvLd_Sta: 0
EBI_NegOC_Sta: 0
EBI_LossExc_Gen: 0
EBI_OOS_Gen: 0
EBI_VoltProt_Gen: 0
EBI_OvExc_Gen: 0
EBI_PwrProt_Gen: 0
Prot EBI Status
EBI_AccEnerg_Gen: 0
EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen: 0
EBI_StShut_Gen: 0
EBI_BFP_GCB: 0
Figure 4.3-1 Enabling Binary Inputs of generator protection
Where:

[EBI_Diff_Gen]：Enabling binary input of differential protection of generator.
[EBI_SPTDiff_Gen]: Enabling binary input of coast protection of generator.
[EBI_PPF_Gen]： Enabling binary input of phase-to-phase backup protection of generator.
[EBI_IntTurn_Gen]：Enabling binary input of interturn protection of generator.
[EBI_ROV_Sta]: Enabling binary input of zero sequence overvoltage protection of stator.
[EBI_V3rdH_Sta]: Enabling binary input of 3rd harmonics voltage protection of generator.
[EBI_1PEF_RotWdg]: Enabling binary input of 1 point earth fault protection of rotor.
[EBI_2PEF_RotWdg]: Enabling binary input of 2 points earth fault protection of rotor.
[EBI_OvLd_Sta]: Enabling binary input of overload protection of stator.
[EBI_NegOC_Gen]: Enabling binary input of negative overcurrent protection of stator.
[EBI_LossExc_Gen]: Enabling binary input of loss-of-excitation protection of generator.
[EBI_OOS_Gen]: Enabling binary input of out-of-step protection of generator.
[EBI_VoltProt_Gen]: Enabling binary input of overvoltage and undervoltage protection of

generator.
[EBI_OvExc_Gen]: Enabling binary input of overexcitation protection of generator.
[EBI_PwrProt_Gen]: Enabling binary input of power protection of generator.
[EBI_FreqProt_Gen]: Enabling binary input of overfrequency and underfrequency protection of

generator.
[EBI_AccEnerg_Gen]: Enabling binary input of accidental energization protection of generator.
[EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen]: Enabling binary input of sequence tripping reverse power protection of

generator.
[EBI_StShut_Gen]: Enabling binary input of startup and shutdown protection of generator.
[EBI_BFP_GCB]: Enabling binary input of breaker failure protection of generator.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU BI STATE  GEN PROT EBI‖ and ―VALUES MON BI
STATE  GEN PROT EBI‖.

4.3.2 Enabling Binary Inputs of excitation protection
EXC PROT EBI
EBI_Diff_Exc: 0
EBI_Bak_Exc: 0
EBI_OvLd_Exc: 0
Figure 4.3-2 Enabling Binary Input list of excitation protection
Where:
[EBI_Diff_Exc]: Enabling binary input of differential protection of excitation transformer of exciter.
[EBI_Bak_Exc]: Enabling binary input of backup protection of excitation transformer of exciter.
[EBI_OvLd_Exc]: Enabling binary input of overload protection of excitation transformer of exciter..
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU BI STATE  EXC PROT EBI‖ and ―VALUES MON BI
STATE  EXC PROT EBI‖.
4.3.3 Binary Inputs of mechanical protection
Mech Prot BI
EBI_Trp_MechRly1: 0
EBI_Trp_MechRly2: 0
EBI_Trp_MechRly3: 0
EBI_Trp_MechRly4: 0
BI_MechRly1: 0
BI_MechRly2: 0
BI_MechRly3: 0
BI_MechRly4: 0
Figure 4.3-3 Binary Inputs of mechanical protection

Where:
[EBI_Trp_MechRly 1]: Enabling binary input of mechanical protection to allow mechanical

repeater 1 (manual emergency tripping) to initial tripping.

repeater 2 (failure of condenser vacuum) to initial tripping.

repeater 3 (stage 1 of 1PEF of rotor) to initial tripping.

repeater 4 (stage 2 of 1PEF of rotor) to initial tripping.
[BI_MechRly 1]: Binary input indicating operation of mechanical repeater 1(manual emergency
tripping).
[BI_MechRly 2]: Binary input indicating operation of mechanical repeater 2(failure of condenser
vacuum).
[BI_MechRly 3]: Binary input indicating operation of mechanical repeater 3(stage 1 of 1PEF of
rotor).
[BI_MechRly 4]: Binary input indicating operation of mechanical repeater 4(stage 2 of 1PEF of
rotor).
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU BI STATE  EXC PROT EBI‖ and ―VALUES MON BI
STATE  EXC PROT EBI‖.
4.3.4 Auxiliary Contacts
AUX BI
BI_52b_GCB: 0
BI_ExtProtTrp: 0
BI_Valve_Turbine: 0
BI_UrgBrake: 0
BI_SyncCondenser: 0
BI_Pwr_Superv: 0
Figure 4.3-4 Auxiliary Contacts for used in protection logic
Where:
[BI_52b_GCB]：Binary input of auxiliary contact of open position of circuit breaker at generator‘s

terminal.
[BI_ExcProtTrp]: Binary input indicating the external trip contact of other protection is closed.
[BI_Valve_Turbine]: Binary input indicating the valve of steam turbine is in close position.
[BI_UrgBrake]: Binary input indicating the operation of urgent brake of generator..
[BI_SyncCondenser]: Binary input indicating the synchronous condenser is put into operation.
[BI_Pwr_Superv]: Binary input indicating the power supply for all binary input circuit is working in
good condition.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU BI STATE  AUX BI‖ and ―VALUES MON BI STATE
 AUX BI‖.
4.3.5 Internally generated binary inputs by MON
INTER GENERATED BI
FD_Diff_Gen: 0
FD_EF_Sta: 0
FD_EF_RotWdg: 0
FD_OvLd_Sta: 0
FD_PPF_Gen: 0
FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen: 0
FD_FreqProt_Gen: 0
FD_LossExc&OOS_Gen: 0
INTER GENERATED BI
FD_Pwr&AccEnerg_Gen: 0
FD_StShut_Gen: 0
FD_Prot_Exc: 0
FD_MechRly: 0
Figure 4.3-5 Auxiliary Contacts for used in protection logic
Where:

[FD_Diff_Gen]：Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of differential

protection of generator.
[FD_EF_Sta]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of earth fault
protection of stator.
[FD_EF_RotWdg]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of earth
fault protection of rotor.
[FD_OvLd_Sta]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of overload
protection of stator.
[FD_PPF_Gen]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of backup
protection of generator.
[FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of

overvoltage and overexciatation protection of generator.
[FD_FreqProt_Gen]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of

frequency protection of generator.
[FD_LossExc&OOS_Gen]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector

of loss-of-excitation and out-of-step protection of generator.
[FD_Pwr&AccEnerg_Gen]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector

of power protection and accidental energization protection of generator.
[FD_StShut_Gen]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of startup
and shutdown protection of generator.
[FD_Prot_Exc]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of

protections of excitation transformer or exciter.
[FD_MechRly]: Internally generated binary input indicating operation of fault detector of

mechanical protection of excitation transformer.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU BI STATE  MONF FD‖ and ―VALUES MON BI
STATE  MON FD‖.

4.3.6 Other Binary Inputs
PS SUPERV BI
BI_Pwr_MechRly: 1
BI_Pwr_Opto: 1
BI_RstTarg: 0
BI_Pulse_GPS: 0
BI_Print: 0
Figure 4.3-6 Others binary input
Where:
[BI_Pwr_MechRly]: binary input indicating the power supply of mechanical repeater is in proper
working condition.
[BI_Pwr_Opto]: binary input indicating the power supply of optical isolators is in proper working
condition.
[BI_Print]: binary input represents the print button.
[BI_Pulse_GPS]: binary input of GPS clock synchronous pulse.
[BI_RstTarg]: binary input of signal reset button.
Access path in menu is ―VALUES CPU BI STATE  PS SUPERV BI‖ and ―VALUES MON BI
STATE  PS SUPERV BI‖ .
4.4 Event & fault records

4.4.1 Introduction
The RCS-985G is equipped with integral measurements, event, fault and disturbance recording
facilities suitable for analysis of complex system disturbances. The relay is flexible enough to allow
for the programming of these facilities to specific user application requirements that is discussed
below.
4.4.2 Event & Fault records

The relay records and time tags up to 32 events and stores them in non-volatile (battery backed up)
memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred
within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the

available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of 1ms. The
event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely, via the
communications ports (courier and MODBUS versions only).
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled ―REPORT‖. This column allows
viewing of event and fault records and is shown by setting sequence No. of the event or fault
report by user. Refer to section 8 for details of operation method.
4.4.3 Type of event

An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm condition and
operation reports of protection etc.
4.4.4 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs

If one or more of the opto inputs has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm
ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD,
the applicable cells will become visible as shown below:
Record No. BI CHANG REPORT

Data：xxxx - xx – xx Time：xx : xx : xx : xxx
Binary input name Changing manner
Figure 4.4-1 Format of Event Report
Where ―Record NO.‖ means the sequence No. of the record which is generated by RCS-985G
automatically. ―Date: DD-MM-YY‖ and ―Time: HH:MM:SS:xxxxms‖ commonly comprise the
absolute time tag of the record. ―Binary input Name‖ shows the name of the binary input whose
state changes. ―Changing manner‖ shows how to change of the state of the binary input. For
instance:

No. 011 BI CHANG REPORT

2007 - 01 - 01 15 : 19 : 00 : 003
EBI_Diff_Gen 0 -> 1
Figure 4.4-2 Example of Binary Input Changing Report
All the binary input that may be shown in the menu can be found in section 4.3, here list them
again.
Table 4.4-1 List of binary input of RCS-985G
No. BI name 22. EBI_Trp_MechRly1

1. EBI_Diff_Gen 23. EBI_PPF_Gen
2. EBI_IntTurn_Gen 24. EBI_SPTDiff_Gen
3. EBI_ROV_Sta 25. BI_SyncCondenser
4. EBI_V3rdH_Sta 26. BI_UrgBrake
5. EBI_1PEF_RotWdg 27. BI_ExtProtTrp
6. EBI_2PEF_RotWdg 28. BI_Pwr_Superv
7. EBI_OvLd_Sta 29. EBI_OvLd_RotWdg
8. EBI_NegOC_Gen 30. EBI_Trp_MechRly1
9. EBI_LossExc_Gen 31. BI_MechRly1
10. EBI_OOS_Gen 32. BI_MechRly2
11. EBI_VoltProt_Gen 33. BI_MechRly3
12. EBI_OvExc_Gen 34. BI_MechRly4
13. EBI_PwrProt_Gen 35. EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
14. EBI_FreqProt_Gen 36. EBI_BFP_GCB
15. EBI_AccEnerg_Gen 37. BI_Print
16. EBI_StShut_Gen 38. BI_Pulse_GPS
17. EBI_Diff_Exc 39. BI_RstTarg
18. EBI_Bak_Exc 40. BI_Pwr_Opto
19. EBI_Trp_MechRly3 41. BI_Pwr_MechRly
20. EBI_Trp_MechRly4 42. BI_52b_GCB
21. EBI_Trp_MechRly2 43. BI_Valve_Turbine

44. FD_Diff_Gen 51. FD_LossExc&OOS_Gen

45. FD_EF_Sta 52. FD_Pwr&AccEnerg_Gen
46. FD_EF_RotWdg 53. FD_StShut_Gen
47. FD_OvLd_Sta 54. FD_Prot_Exc
48. FD_PPF_Gen 55. FD_MechRly
49. FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen
50. FD_FreqProt_Gen
4.4.5 Relay alarm signals
Any alarm signal generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events. The access
method and display format is similar to that of binary input changing record as shown below.
Record No. ALARM REPORT

ALARM ELEMENT
Figure 4.4-3 Format of alarm report on LCD
The above figure shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various alarm conditions
and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value is appended to each alarm event in
a similar way as for the input events previously described. It is used by the event extraction
software, such as RCSPC, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on
the LCD.
The following table shows all of the alarm elements that may be displayed in this item.
Table 4.4-2 List of alarm elements
No. Alarm name 7. Alm_VTS2_Term_Gen

1. Alm_SwOv_VTS1_Gen 8. Alm_VTS_NP_Gen
2. Alm_SwOv_VTS2_Gen 9. Alm_DeltVTS1_Term_Gen
3. Alm_BlkV3rdHDiff_VTS1 10. Alm_DeltVTS2_Term_Gen
4. Alm_BlkIntTurn_VTS2 11. Alm_VTS_LossExc_RotWdg
5. Alm_VTS_HVS_Tr 12. Alm_Pos_GCB
6. Alm_VTS1_Term_Gen 13. Alm_PM_DSP1_CPUBrd

14. Alm_CTS_BakCT_Gen 48. Alm_CTS_S2_Exc

15. Alm_CTS_Term_Gen 49. Alm_Diff_ET
16. Alm_CTS_NP_Gen 50. Alm_Diff_Exciter
17. Alm_CTS_SP1_Gen 51. Alm_CTS_Diff_ET
18. Alm_CTS_SP2_Gen 52. Alm_CTS_Diff_Exciter
19. Alm_Diff_Gen 53. Alm_MechRly2
20. Alm_SPTDiff_Gen 54. Alm_MechRly4
21. Alm_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen 55. Alm_MechRly3
22. Alm_CTS_Diff_Gen 56. Alm_MechRly1
23. Alm_CTS_SPTDiff_Gen 57. Alm_Inconsist_MechRly
24. Alm_BO_OC_Term_Gen 58. Alm_PwrLoss_MechRly
25. Alm_On_2PEF_RotWdg 59. Alm_PM_DSP2_CPUBrd
26. Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen 60. Alm_RAM_CPUBrd
27. Alm_Int_OOS_Gen 61. Alm_ROM_CPUBrd
28. Alm_Accel_OOS_Gen 62. Alm_EEPROM_CPUBrd
29. Alm_Decel_OOS_Gen 63. Alm_InvalidSetting
30. Alm_LossExc_Gen 64. Alm_ModifiedSetting
31. Alm_OvExc_Gen 65. Alm_PwrLoss_Opto
32. Alm_OvLd_Sta 66. Alm_TripOutput
33. Alm_NegOC_Gen 67. Alm_InnerComm
34. Alm_OvLd_RotWdg 68. Alm_DSP_CPUBrd
35. Alm_ROV_Sta 69. Alm_PersistFD_CPUBrd
36. Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta 70. Alm_InconsistFD
37. Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta 71. Alm_Sample_CPUBrd
38. Alm_Sens1PEF_RotWdg 72. Alm_BI_CPUBrd
39. Alm_1PEF_RotWdg 73. Alm_RAM_MONBrd
41. Alm_UF1_Gen 74. Alm_ROM_MONBrd
42. Alm_UF2_Gen 75. Alm_EEPROM_MONBrd
43. Alm_UF3_Gen 76. Alm_DSP_MONBrd
44. Alm_OF1_Gen 77. Alm_PersistFD_MONBrd
45. Alm_OF2_Gen 78. Alm_MONBrd
46. Alm_RevP_Gen 79. Alm_Sample_MONBrd
47. Alm_CTS_S1_Exc
4.4.6 Protection element
Any operation of protection elements, (either a pickup or a trip condition) will be logged as an
event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event sequence
NO.. Again, this number is intended not only for use by the event extraction software, such as
RCSPC, but also for the user, and is therefore visible when the event is viewed on the LCD. The
figure below shows the format of operation record of protection element.

Record No. TRIP REPORT

OPERATE ELEMENT xxx ms
Figure 4.4-4 Format of trip report
Where:
―Record NO.‖ means the sequence No. of the record which is generated by RCS-985G
automatically.
―Date: xxxx-xx-xx‖ and ―Time: xx:xx:xx:xxxxms‖ commonly comprise the absolute time tag of the
record.
―Operation Element‖ shows the name of the operating element. If there are more than one
elements operating, they will scroll one by one to display on LCD.
―xxx ms‖ shows the relative time of operation element to fault detector of the relay.
The following table lists all the operation elements that may be displayed on LCD.
Table 4.4-3 List of operation elements
No. Operation element name 13. Op_InsensIntTurn_Gen

1. Op_InstDiff_Gen 14. Op_SensROV_Sta
2. Op_PcntDiff_Gen 15. Op_InsensROV_Sta
3. Op_DPFC_Diff_Gen 16. Op_V3rdHRatio_Sta
4. Op_InstSPTDiff_Gen 17. Op_V3rdHDiff_Sta
5. Op_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 18. Op_1PEF_RotWdg
6. Op_Diff_StShut_Gen 19. Op_2PEF_RotWdg
7. Op_UFOC_StShut_Gen 20. Op_OvLd_Sta
8. Op_StaROV_StShut_Gen 21. Op_InvOvLd_Sta
9. Op_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen 22. Op_NegOC1_Gen
10. Op_SensTrvDiff_Gen 23. Op_NegOC2_Gen
11. Op_InsensTrvDiff_Gen 24. Op_InvNegOC_Gen
12. Op_SensIntTurn_Gen 25. Op_OvLd_RotWdg

26. Op_InvOvLd_RotWdg 52. Op_Flash11_GCB

27. Op_OC1_Gen 53. Op_Flash12_GCB
28. Op_OC2_Gen 54. Op_InstDiff_Exciter
29. Op_OV1_Gen 55. Op_PcntDiff_Exciter
30. Op_OV2_Gen 56. Op_InstDiff_ET
31. Op_UV_Gen 57. Op_PcntDiff_ET
32. Op_OvExc1_Gen 58. Op_OC1_Exc
33. Op_OvExc2_Gen 59. Op_OC2_Exc
34. Op_InvOvExc_Gen 60. Op_MechRly1
35. Op_UF1_Gen 61. Op_MechRly2
38. Op_OF1_Gen 64. TrpOutp1
39. Op_OF2_Gen 65. TrpOutp2
40. Op_Z1_Gen 66. TrpOutp3
41. Op_Z2_Gen 67. TrpOutp4
42. Op_LossExc1_Gen 68. TrpOutp5
45. Op_Ext_OOS_Gen 71. TrpOutp8
46. Op_Int_OOS_Gen 72. TrpOutp9
47. Op_BFP11_Gen 73. TrpOutp10
48. Op_BFP12_Gen 74. TrpOutp11
49. Op_RevP_Gen 75. TrpOutp12
50. Op_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
51. Op_AccEnerg_Gen
4.4.7 Viewing event records via RCSPC support software
What the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different than what
viewed on the LCD. The following figure shows an example of how various events appear when
displayed using RCSPC:

Figure 4.4-5 Trip reports seen by RCSPC
4.5 Disturbance Record

The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage.
The number of records that may be stored by the relay is dependent upon the selected recording
duration. The recorder of CPU board can typically store a minimum of 32 records, among them 8
records with instantaneous waveform. The record is composed of tripping element, faulty phase
and operation time. The waveform content is composed of differential currents, corrected current
of each side of generator or transformer, three-phase current of each side, zero sequence current
of each side (if available), three-phase voltages, zero sequence voltage of each side, negative
sequence voltage and tripping pulse.
The MON board can store up to 4 seconds (24 sampling points per cycle) or 8 seconds (12
sampling points per cycle) continual waveform, which include all channels analog quantities
(sampled data, diferential currents and so on), all binary input changing states, binary output, pick
up flags of fault detectors, alarm signals, operation signals and tripping signals.
Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which
time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be extracted using
suitable software such as RCSPC. This process is fully explained in the section 11.6.
The CPU board can also record the latest 8 cycles of waveform in normal operatin condition,
which is composed of three phase current, corrected current of each side for differential protection,
three phases voltage and zero sequence voltage of each side. This function can help the user to
check the pole‘s correctness of secondary circuit by comparing the phase of related quantities
shown in wave figure. This manual gives the detail instruction of getting normal operation
waveform in section 8.2.6.

4.6 Time Synchronization

In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relays real time clock so that
events from different relays can be placed in chronological order. This can be done using the
IRIG-B input, if fitted, or via the communication interface connected to the substation control
system. In addition to these methods the RCS-985G range offers the facility to synchronize via an
opto-input. Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The
recommended pulse duration is 20ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An example
of the time sync. function is shown.
Time of ―Sync. Pulse‖ Corrected Time

19:47:00 to 19:47:29 19:47:00
19:47:30 to 19:47:59 19:48:00
Note:
The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss

Chapter5 Hardware Description
5.1 Hardware overview

The protection‘s hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of an
assemblage of several modules that are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are
essential while others are optional depending on the user‘s requirements.
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel that has a conductive
covering of aluminum and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance
path to earth that is essential for performance in the presence of external noise.
The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external
noise and minimize the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce
impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal
blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium
duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power
supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector may be used for the optional IRIG-B
signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data
communication.
Inside the protection the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed
from the rear of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay‘s CT inputs are provided with
internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current generator circuits
before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane
keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 5 LEDs mounted on an aluminum face plate.
5.1.1 Front view

RCS-985G is made of a single layer 8U height 19‖ chassis with 15 connectors on its rear. Figure
5.1-1 shows front view.

RCS-985
GENERATOR PROTECTION
HEALTHY
GRP
VT ALARM
CT ALARM
ALARM
ENT
ESC
TRIP
NARI RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LD
Figure 5.1-1 Front view of RCS-985G
Components mounted on its front include a 240×128 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 5 LED
indicators, a signal reset button, a DB9 connector for communication with HELP-90A or PC and a
DB15 connector for analog quantity inputs during commissioning.
The five LED indicators are, from top to bottom:
HEALTHY: Equipment running normally;
VT ALARM : Voltage circuit failure ;
CT ALARM: Current circuit failure;
ALARM: Abnormal;
TRIP: Tripping output;
As to the buttons of the keypad, ―ENT‖ is ―enter‖, ―GRP‖ is ―setting group selector‖ and ―ESC‖ is
―escape‖.

5.1.2 Rear view
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
1 1 1 1
A2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
A30 B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 B
28 30
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 2 2 2
A2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
A30 B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 B
28 30
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
3 3 3 3
A2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28A30 B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 B
28 30
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
4 4 4 4
A2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28A30 B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 B
28 30
51 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27529
B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 B28 30
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
6 6
B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26B
28 30
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
7 7
B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26B
28 30
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
8
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
8 8
B2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26B C
28 30
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
9 9
B C
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Figure 5.1-2 Rear view of RCS-985G
5.1.3 Functional block diagram of RCS-985G
5.1.3.1 Functional block diagram of RCS-985G
opto- binary
AC current DSP1 status
and voltage
LPF A/D DSP2 coupler input
CPLD
output
MMI CPU1 relay
LCD
CPU module
MMI-CPU QDJ
comm ports and
port to printer
E+
MMI
DSP3 opto- binary
LPF A/D coupler status
DSP4 input
DC 220 V
or 110 V
＋5 V
CPLD
DC/DC
±12 V
＋24 V
MMI CPU2
±24 V to
optic-coupler management module
comm ports and

port to printer
Figure 5.1-3 Functional block diagram of RCS-985G

5.1.3.2 Brief description of operation
The equipment RCS-985G uses Motorola 32 bits monolithic microprocessor MC68332 as control
kernel for output logic and management functions, and high-speed digital signal processor DSP
for protection calculation. Sampling rate of the equipment is 24 points per cycle. Real time data are
processed in parallel for all algorithms during whole fault process. So the equipment can ensure
very high inherent reliability and security.
AC currents and voltages of CT and VT are transferred to low voltage signals by isolating
transformers and are inputted to the CPU module and MON module. Data and logic are processed
respectively in these two modules with same type of hardware. The CPU module carries out
functions of protection algorithms, tripping logic, event record and printing. The MON module
comprises of general fault detector and the fault recorder. The fault detector will connect to the
positive pole of power supply of output relays after pickup. Format of the record is compatible with
COMTRADE, and the data recorded can be uploaded via separate serial port for communication
or printing.
Power supply part is located in DC module. It converts DC 250/220/125/110 V into different DC

voltage levels needed by various modules of the equipment. DC module also comprises 24V and
250/220/125/110V opto-couplers for binary inputs.
AC current and voltage are converted to low voltage signals in modules AC1 and AC2. Two ratings
of AC current are option, 1A or 5A. It shall be stated definitely during ordering and checked during
commissioning.
Binary outputs of tripping commands, tripping signal outputs and status binary input parts are
comprised in three modules: RLY, SIG1 and SIG2. 24V and 250/220/125/110V opto-couplers are
used here for binary input.
Briefly, the equipment is composed of ten modules to achieve the work of generator protection.
The modules are AC voltage and current input module1(AC1), AC current input modules(AC2),
management/record module(MON), protection CPU module(CPU), power supply module(DC),
binary input module (OPT2), signal modules(SIG1 and SIG2), tripping contacts output(RLY), and
human machine interface（HMI）.
The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of an assemblage
of several modules.
5.2 Standard connectors and terminals

5.2.1 General description
There are 15 connectors for external connections mounted on rear panel of the equipment as
shown in Figure 5.1-2, of which, 12 connectors are 30 pins while 3 connectors are 18 pins.
Connectors with 30 pins are used for DC power supply, binary input, communication and printer,
tripping, alarm and other signal output and AC voltage input. Numbers of these connectors are 1A,
1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4A, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B and 8B. Figure 5.2-1 a) shows layout of 30 pins of these
connectors.

Connectors with 18 pins are used for current input. Numbers of these connectors are 8C, 9B and
9C. Figure 5.2-1 b) shows layout of pins of these connectors.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
a) connector with 30 pins b) connector with 18 pins
Figure 5.2-1 Layout of pins of two kinds of connectors
Each connector will be introduced in detail in the following sections.
5.2.2 Pins definition of ‗1A‘ connectors

Connector 1A: 30 pins male connector for tripping output
Attention:
For showing the relation of each terminal clearly, the terminal‘s location shown in the Figure may
be different from the real physical location, and we needn‘t figure out the blank terminals.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Figure 5.2-2 Connector 1A of RCS-985G
1A1,1A30 blank
Binary output of tripping:
1A3-1A5 BO_TripOutp1-1 (TJ1-1) Tripping output channel 1-1


5.2.3 Pins definition of ‗1B‘ connectors
Connector 1B: 30 pins male connector for tripping output
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Figure 5.2-3 Connector 1B of RCS-985G

Binary output of tripping:
1B1-1B3 BO_TripOutp2-4 (TJ2-1) Tripping output channel 2-4
1B21 -1B23 BO_TripOutp8-1 (TJ8-1) Tripping output channel 8-1
Connector 2A: 30 pins male connector for signal output
1 7 13 19 25 3 9 15 21 27 5 11 17 23 29
2 8 14 20 26 4 10 16 22 28 6 12 18 24 30

Binary output of local signal:

2A1 common 1 common terminal 1
2A1-2A7 BO_Diff_Gen local signal: generator differential protection tripping
2A1-2A13 BO_EF_Sta local signal: stator earth fault protection tripping
2A1-2A19 BO_OvLd_Sta local signal: stator overload protection tripping
2A1-2A25 BO_LossExc local signal: generator loss-of-excitation protection tripping
2A2 common 2 common terminal 2
2A2-2A8 BO_IntTurn_Gen Local signal: generator interturn protection tripping
2A2-2A14 BO_EF_RotWdg Local signal: rotor earth fault protection tripping
2A2-2A20 BO_NegOC_Gen Local signal: negative sequence overcurrent protection
tripping
2A2-2A26 BO_OSS_Gen Local signal: generator out-of-step protection tripping
Binary output of remote signal:
2A3 common 1 Remote signal: common terminal 1
2A3-2A9 BO_Diff_Gen Remote signal: generator differential protection tripping
2A3-2A15 BO_EF_Sta Remote signal: stator earth fault protection tripping
2A3-2A21 BO_OvLd_Sta Remote signal: stator overload protection tripping
2A3-2A27 BO_LossExc Remote signal: generator loss-of-excitation protection
tripping
2A4 common 2 Remote signal: common terminal 2
2A4-2A10 BO_IntTurn_Gen Remote signal: generator interturn protection tripping
2A4-2A22 BO_NegOC_Gen Remote signal: negative sequence overcurrent protection
tripping
2A4-2A28 BO_OSS_Gen Remote signal: generator out-of-step protection tripping
Binary output of event record:
2A5 common 1 Event signal: common terminal 1
2A5-2A11 BO_Diff_Gen Event signal: generator differential protection tripping
2A5-2A17 BO_EF_Sta Event signal: stator earth fault protection tripping
2A5-2A23 BO_OvLd_Sta Event signal: stator overload protection tripping
2A5-2A29 BO_LossExc Event signal: generator loss-of-excitation protection tripping
2A6 common 2 Event signal: common terminal 2
2A6-2A12 BO_IntTurn_Gen Event signal: generator interturn protection tripping
2A6-2A24 BO_NegOC_Gen Event signal: negative sequence overcurrent protection
tripping
2A6-2A30 BO_OSS_Gen Event signal: generator out-of-step protection tripping

Connector 2B: 30 pins male connector for signal output

2A1 1 7 13 19 25 2A3 3 9 15 21 27 2A5 5 11 17 23 29
2A2 2 8 14 20 26 2A4 4 10 16 22 28 2A6 6 12 18 24 30

2A1-2B1 BO_OV_Gen local signal: generator overvoltage protection tripping
2A1-2B7 BO_PwrProt_Gen local signal: generator reverse power protection
tripping
2A1-2B13 BO_FreqProt_Gen local signal: generator frequency protection tripping
2A1-2B19 BO_AccEnerg_Gen local signal: generator accidental energization
protection tripping
2A1-2B25 BO_Diff_Exc local signal: differential protection of excitation
transformer of exciter tripping
2A2-2B2 BO_OvExc_Gen Local signal: generator overexcitation protection
2A2-2B8 BO_RepP_Gen Local signal: generator sequence trip reverse power
protection tripping
2A2-2B14 BO_PPF_Gen Local signal: generator phase-to-phase backup
protection tripping
2A2-2B20 BO_MechRly Local signal: transformer mechanical protection
tripping
2A2-2B26 BO_Bak_Exc Local signal: excitation backup protection tripping
2A3-2B3 BO_OV_Gen Remote signal: generator overvoltage protection
tripping
2A3-2B9 BO_PwrProt_Gen Remote signal: generator reverse power protection
tripping
2A3-2B15 BO_FreqProt_Gen Remote signal: generator frequency protection tripping
2A3-2B21 BO_AccEnerg_Gen Remote signal: generator accidental energization
protection tripping
2A3-2B27 BO_Diff_Exc Remote signal: differential protection of excitation
2A4-2B4 BO_OvExc_Gen Remote signal: generator overexcitation protection
2A4-2B10 BO_RepP_Gen Remote signal: generator sequence trip reverse power
protection tripping
2A4-2B16 BO_PPF_Gen Remote signal: generator phase-to-phase backup
protection tripping

2A4-2B22 BO_MechRly Remote signal: transformer mechanical protection

tripping
2A4-2B28 BO_Bak_Exc Remote signal: excitation backup protection tripping
Binary output of event record:
2A5-2B5 BO_OV_Gen Event record: generator overvoltage protection tripping
2A5-2B11 BO_PwrProt_Gen Event record: generator reverse power protection
tripping
2A5-2B17 BO_FreqProt_Gen Event record: generator frequency protection tripping
2A5-2B23 BO_AccEnerg_Gen Event record: generator accidental energization
protection tripping
2A5-2B29 BO_Diff_Exc Event record: differential protection of excitation
2A6-2B6 BO_OvExc_Gen Event record: generator overexcitation protection
2A6-2B12 BO_RepP_Gen Event record: generator sequence trip reverse power
protection tripping
2A6-2B18 BO_PPF_Gen Event record: generator phase-to-phase backup
protection tripping
2A6-2B24 BO_MechRly Event record: transformer mechanical protection
tripping
2A6-2B30 BO_Bak_Exc Event record: excitation backup protection tripping
Note:
Signals contacts for stator earth fault protection will be driven when stator zero sequence
overvoltage elements operates in generator startup and shutdown.
Signals contacts for generator differential protection will be driven when differential current
element operates in generator startup and shutdown.

Connector 3A: 30 pins male connector for signal and alarm output.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30


3A1 COMMON Common terminal
3A1-3A3 BO_FAIL Equipment being blocked
3A1-3A5 BO_Alm_Abnor Equipment alarm
3A1-3A7 BO_Alm_CTS CT circuit failure alarm
3A1-3A9 BO_Alm_VTS VT circuit failure alarm
3A1-3A11 BO_Alm_OvLd Overload alarm
3A1-3A13 BO_Alm_NegOC Negative sequence overcurrent alarm
3A1-3A15 BO_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg Excitation overload alarm
3A1-3A17 BO_Alm_EF_Sta Stator earth fault alarm
3A1-3A19 BO_Alm_1PEF_Gen Rotor 1 point earth fault alarm
3A1-3A21 BO_Alm_LossExc_Gen Loss-of-excitation alarm
3A1-3A23 BO_Alm_OOS_Gen Out-of-step alarm
3A1-3A25 BO_Alm_FreqProt_Gen Under frequency alarm
3A1-3A27 BO_Alm_PwrProt_Gen Reverse power alarm
3A1-3A29 BO_Alm_OvExc_Gen Overexcitation alarm
3A2 COMMON Common terminal
3A2-3A4 BO_FAIL Equipment being blocked
3A2-3A6 BO_Alm_Abnor Equipment alarm
3A2-3A8 BO_Alm_CTS CT circuit failure alarm
3A2-3A10 BO_Alm_VTS VT circuit failure alarm
3A2-3A12 BO_Alm_OvLd Overload alarm
3A2-3A14 BO_Alm_NegOC Negative sequence overcurrent alarm
3A2-3A16 BO_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg Excitation overload alarm
3A2-3A18 BO_Alm_EF_Sta Stator earth fault alarm
3A2-3A20 BO_Alm_1PEF_Gen Rotor 1 point earth fault alarm
3A2-3A22 BO_Alm_LossExc_Gen Loss-of-excitation alarm
3A2-3A24 BO_Alm_OOS_Gen Out-of-step alarm
3A2-3A26 BO_Alm_FreqProt_Gen Under frequency alarm
3A2-3A28 BO_Alm_PwrProt_Gen Reverse power alarm
3A2-3A30 BO_Alm_OvExc_Gen Overexcitation alarm

Connector 3B: 30 pins male connector for alarm and other output

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
3B2 blank
Binary output of abnormality contact:
3B1-3B3 BO_OC_InitBFP Normal opened contact indicating
operation of generator terminal
overcurrent element for initial breaker
failure protection
3B5-3B7 BO_OC_InitBFP Normal closed contact indicating
operation of generator terminal
overcurrent element for initial breaker
failure protection
3B9-3B11 Reserved
3B13-B15 Reserved
3B17-3B19 Reserved
3B21-3B23 Reserved
3B25-3B27 Blank
Binary output of event record signal:
3B2 blank
3B4 COMMON Event record: common terminal
3B4-3B6 BO_Alm_CTS CT circuit failure alarm
3B4-3B8 BO_Alm_VTS VT circuit failure alarm
3B4-3B10 BO_Alm_OvLd Overload alarm
3B4-3B12 BO_Alm_NegOC Negative sequence overload alarm
3B4-3B14 BO_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg Excitation overload alarm
3B4-3B16 BO_Alm_EF_Sta Stator earth fault alarm
3B4-3B18 BO_Alm_1PEF_Gen Generator coasting alarm
3B4-3B20 BO_Alm_LossExc_Gen Loss-of-excitation alarm
3B4-3B22 BO_Alm_OOS_Gen Out-of-step alarm
3B4-3B24 BO_Alm_FreqProt_Gen Under frequency alarm
3B4-3B26 BO_FAIL Equipment being blocked

3B4-3B28 BO_Alm_Abnor Equipment alarm

3B4-3B29 BO_Alm_PwrProt_Gen Reverse power alarm
3B4-3B30 BO_Alm_OvExc_Gen Overexcitation alarm

Connector 4A: 30 pins male connector for status input (via 220V/250V or 110V/125V opto-coupler)
＋－
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Binary output of remote signal of mechanical repeaters:

4A1 COMMON common terminal
4A1-4A3 BO_MR3 External mechanical repeater3
Binary output of event record of mechanical repeaters:
Binary output of local signal of mechanical repeaters:
4A11-4A14 BO_Pwr_MR Monitoring of power supply voltage
Binary input (via 220V or 110V opto-coupler) :
4A17 BO_MR3 Binary input of external mechanical repeater3


Binary input of auxiliary contact(via 220V or 110V opto-coupler)
4A21 BI_Pwr_Superv Monitoring auxiliary contact of power supply of
mechanical protection
4A22 BI_52b_GCB auxiliary contact of open position of circuit breaker at
4A23 BI_Reserved4 Reserved binary input 4
4A24 BI_ExtProtTrp Binary input indicating the operation of other protection
4A25 BI_Reserved1 Reserved binary input 1
4A26 BI_Valve_Turbine Auxiliary contact of valve of steam turbine
4A27 + Positive pole of mechanical repeaters‘ power supply.
4A28 Blank
4A29 - Negative pole of mechanical repeaters‘ power supply.
4A30 Blank

Connector 4B: 30 pins male connector for binary input
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
+24
V
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0V
4B30 negative pole of DC 24V for 24 V opto-coupler

4B29 positive pole of DC 24V for 24 V opto-couple
Binary input (via 24 V opto-coupler):
4B1 Blank
4B2 Blank
4B3 EBI_Diff_Gen Enabling binary input of generator differential protection
4B4 EBI_IntTurn_Gen Enabling binary input of generator interturn protection
4B5 EBI_ROV_Sta Enabling binary input of fundamental zero sequence
overvoltage stator earth fault protection
4B6 EBI_V3rdH_Sta Enabling binary input of 3rd harmonics voltage stator earth
fault protection
4B7 EBI_1PEF_RotWdg Enabling binary input of rotor 1 point earth fault protection

4B8 EBI_2PEF_RotWdg Enabling binary input of rotor 2 points earth fault

protection
4B9 EBI_OvLd_Sta Enabling binary input of stator overload protection
4B10 EBI_NegOC_Gen Enabling binary input of generator negative sequence
overcurrent protection
4B11 EBI_LossExc_Gen Enabling binary input of generator loss-of-excitation
protection
4B12 EBI_OOS_Gen Enabling binary input of generator out-of-step protection
4B13 EBI_VoltProt_Gen Enabling binary input of generator overvoltage and
undervoltage protection
4B14 EBI_OvExc_Gen Enabling binary input of generator overexcitation
protection
4B15 EBI_PwrProt_Gen Enabling binary input of generator reverse power
protection
4B16 EBI_FreqProt_Gen Enabling binary input of generator frequency protection
4B17 EBI_AccEnerg_Gen Enabling binary input of generator accidental energization
protection
4B18 EBI_StShut_Gen Enabling binary input of generator startup and shutdown
protection
4B19 EBI_Diff_Exc Enabling binary input of excitation transformer differential
protection
4B20 EBI_Bak_Exc Enabling binary input of excitation backup protection
4B21 EBI_Trp_MechRly3 Enabling binary input of external mechanical repeater 3
for tripping
for tripping
for tripping
for tripping
4B25 EBI_PPF_Gen Enabling binary input of generator overcurrent protection
4B26 EBI_SPTDiff_Gen Enabling binary input of generator splitting transverse
differential protection
4B27 Blank
4B28 Blank

Connector 5B: 30 pins male connector for status input

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
+-
＋24V
DC/DC
0V
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
5B27 negative pole of DC 220V/250V or 110V/125V opto-coupler

5B25 positive pole of DC 220V/250V or 110V/125V opto-couple
5B16 negative pole of DC 24V for 24 V opto-coupler
5B17 positive pole of DC 24V for 24 V opto-couple
Binary input (via 24 V opto-coupler):
5B1 EBI_OvLd_Exc Enabling binary input of excitation overload protection
5B2 EBI_BFP_GCB Enabling binary input of generator breaker failure protection
5B3 EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen Enabling binary input of sequence tripping reverse power
protection
5B4 Reserved binary input
5B13 BI_Print Binary input of print button
5B14 BI_Pulse_GPS Binary input of clock synchronization pulse
5B15 BI_RstTarg Binary input of signal reset button
5B18 Blank
5B19 BI_UrgBrake Binary input indicating the operation of urgent brake of
generator
5B20 BI_SyncCondenser Binary input indicating the synchronize condenser
generator is put into operation
5B21 BI_Reserved3 Reserved binary input 3
5B22 BI_Reserved2 Reserved binary input 2
5B23 BI_Pwr_Opto Binary input used for monitoring the power supply of all the
BIs

5B24 Blank
5B26 Blank
5B28 Blank
5B29 Earth
5B30 Earth
5.2.11 Pins definition of ‗6B‘, ‗7B‘ connectors

Connector 6B, 7B: 30 pins male connector for communication and printing.
Note:
The definitions of connector 6B and connector 7B are same.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
A B A B A B TX RX Earth
485PORT 485PORT 485PORT Printer PORT
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
G
Figure 5.2-11 Connectors 6B, 7B of RCS-985G
6B1/7B1 clock synchronizing pulse input, RS-485 A

6B3/7B3 clock synchronizing pulse input, RS-485 B
6B5/7B5 conmmunication RS-485 port1 A
6B7/7B7 conmmunication RS-485 port1 B
6B9/7B9 conmmunication RS-485 port2 A
6B11/7B11 conmmunication RS-485 port2 B
6B21/7B21 printer RS232 port, Tx
6B23/7B23 printer RS232 port, Rx
6B27/7B27 ground of communication port
6B30/7B30 ground of chassis

Connector 8B: 30 pins for voltage input

1 2 7 8 9 10 13 14 17 18 21 22 25 26 29 30
UA UA’ UA UA’ UC UC’ U bus U’

bus U0TV2 U0TV2'
UB UB’ UC UC’ UB UB’ UNP UNP’
3 4 5 6 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 27 28
8B1 UA phase A voltage of TV 1 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)

8B2 UA ‘ phase A voltage of TV 1 at generator‘s terminal
8B3 UB phase B voltage of TV 1 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
8B4 UB‘ phase B voltage of TV 1 at generator‘s terminal
8B5 UC, phase C voltage of TV 1 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
8B6 UC‘ phase C voltage of TV 1 at generator‘s terminal
8B7 Reserved voltage channel (polarity mark)
8B8 Reserved voltage channel
8B9 UA phase A voltage of TV 2 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
8B10 UA ‘ phase A voltage of TV 2 at generator‘s terminal
8B11 UB phase B voltage of TV 2 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
8B12 UB‘ phase B voltage of TV 2 at generator‘s terminal
8B13 UC, phase C voltage of TV 2 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
8B14 UC‘ phase C voltage of TV 2 at generator‘s terminal
8B17 UB Single phase of busbar (polarity mark)
8B18 U B‘ Single phase of busbar
8B19 U0 Zero-sequence voltage of generator‘s neutral point (polarity mark)
8B20 U0‘ Zero-sequence voltage of generator‘s neutral point
8B21 U0 Zero-sequence voltage of TV2 at generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
8B22 U0‘ Zero-sequence voltage of TV2 at generator‘s terminal


5.2.13 Pins definition of ‗8C‘ connectors

Connector 8C: 18 pins for voltage and current input
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
20K
UR+2 UR-2 IR+ IR-
UR+ UR-
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Figure 5.2-13 Connector 8C of RCS-985G
Terminal Name Function

8C3 UR+2 DC voltage input of rotor
8C5 UR-2
8C7 IR+ DC current input of rotor
8C9 IR-
8C11 Test terminal DC voltage input for rotor earth fault protection
8C13 UR+
8C15 Axis of rotor
8C17 UR-
others Reserved

Connector 8B: 18 pins for current input

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I AN IA I BN IB ICN IC I AN IA I BN IB ICN IC
TO LPF TO LPF
TO LPF
I ' trans I trans I ' shaft I shaft U '0TV1 U0TV1
13 14 15 16 17 18
9B1 IA‘ phase A current of excitation transformer of exciter on side1

9B2 IA phase A current of excitation transformer of exciter on side1 (polarity mark)
9B3 IB‘ phase B current of excitation transformer of exciter on side1
9B4 IB phase B current of excitation transformer of exciter on side1 (polarity mark)
9B5 IC‘ phase C current of excitation transformer of exciter on side1
9B6 IC phase C current of excitation transformer of exciter on side1 (polarity mark)
9B7 IA‘ phase A current of excitation transformer of exciter on side2
9B8 IA phase A current of excitation transformer of exciter on side2 (polarity mark)
9B9 IB‘ phase B current of excitation transformer of exciter on side2
9B10 IB phase B current of excitation transformer of exciter on side2 (polarity mark)
9B11 IC‘ phase C current of excitation transformer of exciter on side2
9B12 IC phase C current of excitation transformer of exciter on side2 (polarity mark)
9B13 Itrs‘ Transverse current
9B14 Itrs Transverse current (polarity mark)
9B15 Shaft current
9B16 Shaft current(polarity mark)
9B17 U0‘ Zero sequence voltage derived from open-delta of TV1
9B18 U0
Note:
Current channel of side 1 can be configured as the current of HV side of excitation transformer or
the neutral current of exciter.
Current channel of side 2 can be configured as the current of LV side of excitation transformer or
the terminal current of exciter.

5.2.15 Pins definition of ‗9C‘ connectors

Connector 9C: 18 pins for current input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I AN IA I BN IB I CN IC I AN IA I BN IB I CN IC
TO LPF TO LPF
TO LPF
I AN IA I BN IB I CN IC
13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 5.2-15 Connector 9C of RCS-985G
9C1 IA‘ phase A current of generator‘s terminal

9C2 IA phase A current of generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
9C3 IB‘ phase B current of generator‘s terminal
9C4 IB phase B current of generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
9C5 IC‘ phase C current of generator‘s terminal
9C6 IC phase C current of generator‘s terminal (polarity mark)
9C7 IA‘ phase A current of phase-splitting branch1 of generator
9C8 IA phase A current of phase-splitting branch1 of generator (polarity mark)
9C9 IB‘ phase B current of phase-splitting branch1 of generator r
9C10 IB phase B current of phase-splitting branch1 of generator (polarity mark)
9C11 IC‘ phase C current of phase-splitting branch1 of generator
9C12 IC phase C current of phase-splitting branch1 of generator (polarity mark)
9C13 IA‘ phase A current of configurable current input channel
9C14 IA phase A current of configurable current input channel (polarity mark)
9C15 IB‘ phase B current of configurable current input channel
9C16 IB phase B current of configurable current input channel (polarity mark)
9C17 IC‘ phase C current of configurable current input channel
9C18 IC phase C current of configurable current input channel (polarity mark)
Note:
9C13—9C18 can be configured as the current of phase-splitting branch2, dedicate current for
reverse power protection and current used for distance protection of voltage-controlled
overcurrent protection.
The protection can either use zero sequence voltage derived from 9B17, 9B18 or calculated zero
sequence voltage of TV1 depending on the setting way of the related logic setting.

5.3 Output
5.3.1 Tripping outputs
The equipment provides 12 groups of tripping relays with 29 pairs of contacts totally as shown in
the following figure. These tripping relays can be configured by tripping output logic setting, and
practical and flexible tripping modes can be provided by each protective function then. The tripping
output logic setting is a specific setting of each certain protective function. Please refer to Chapter
7 for details of setting.
Trip CB of GROUP1--TJ1 Trip CB of GROUP4--TJ4 Trip CB of GROUP9--TJ9

TJ1-1 TJ4-1 TJ9-1
1A03 1A05 1A18 1A20 1B25 1B27
TJ1-2 TJ4-2 Trip CB of GROUP10--TJ10
1A07 1A09 1A22 1A24
TJ10-1
TJ1-3 Trip CB of GROUP5--TJ5 1B29 1B30
1A11 1A13
TJ5-1 Trip CB of GROUP11--TJ11
TJ1-4 1A26 1A28
1A15 1A17 TJ5-2 TJ11-1
1B02 1B04 1B14 1B16
Trip CB of GROUP2--TJ2 TJ11-2
TJ5-3
TJ2-1 1B06 1B08 1B18 1B20
1A19 1A21
TJ5-4 Trip CB of GROUP12--TJ12
TJ2-2 1B10 1B12
1A23 1A25 TJ12-1
Trip CB of GROUP6--TJ6 1B22 1B24
TJ2-3 TJ6-1
1A27 1A29 TJ12-2
1B05 1B07 1B26 1B28
TJ2-4 TJ6-2
1B01 1B03 1B09 1B11
Trip CB OF GROUP3--TJ3 TJ6-3
1B13 1B15
TJ3-1
1A02 1A04 Trip CB of GROUP7--TJ7
TJ3-2 TJ7-1
1A06 1A08 1B17 1B19
TJ3-3
1A10 1A12 Trip CB of GROUP8--TJ8
TJ8-1
TJ3-4 1B21 1B23
1A14 1A16
Figure 5.3-1 List of tripping outputs
The tripping output logic setting is a 4 digits hexadecimal number or a 16 bits binary number.
Every bit corresponds to a circuit breaker. The breaker will be tripped if the corresponding bit is set
as ―1‖ and not tripped if the bit is set as ―0‖.
Table 5.3-1 Tripping logic and contacts of output relays
No Bit No. Tripping group No. Quantity of tripping contacts

1 Bit 0 Tripping function enabled
2 Bit 1 BO_TrpOutp1 (TJ1) 4


5.3.2 Signaling outputs

The equipment provides 18 signals and each signal consists of 1 magnetic latching contact (for
local signals) and 2 wiper-type contacts (for SOE and remote signals). See the figure below.
Local signal Remote signal Event Record
2A01 2A03 2A05
BO_Diff_Gen BO_Diff_Gen BO_Diff_Gen
2A07 2A09 2A11
BO_EF_Sta BO_EF_Sta BO_EF_Sta
2A13 2A15 2A17
BO_OvLd_Sta BO_OvLd_Sta BO_OvLd_Sta
2A19 2A21 2A23
BO_LosExc_Gen BO_LosExc_Gen BO_LosExc_Gen
2A25 2A27 2A29
BO_OV_Gen BO_OV_Gen BO_OV_Gen
2B01 2B03 2B05
BO_RevP_Gen BO_RevP_Gen BO_RevP_Gen
2B07 2B09 2B11
BO_FreqProt_Gen BO_FreqProt_Gen BO_FreqProt_Gen
2B13 2B15 2B17
BO_AccEnerg_Gen BO_AccEnerg_Gen BO_AccEnerg_Gen
2B19 2B21 2B23
BO_UV_Gen BO_UV_Gen BO_UV_Gen
2B25 2B27 2B29
2A02 2A04 2A06
BO_IntTurn_Gen BO_IntTurn_Gen BO_IntTurn_Gen
2A08 2A10 2A12
BO_EF_Rot BO_EF_Rot BO_EF_Rot
2A14 2A16 2A18
BO_NegOC_Gen BO_NegOC_Gen BO_NegOC_Gen
2A20 2A22 2A24
BO_OOS_Gen BO_OOS_Gen BO_OOS_Gen
2A26 2A28 2A30
BO_OvExc_Gen BO_OvExc_Gen BO_OvExc_Gen
2B02 2B04 2B06
BO_SeqTrpRevP_Exc BO_SeqTrpRevP_Exc BO_SeqTrpRevP_Exc
2B08 2B10 2B12
BO_PPF_Gen BO_PPF_Gen BO_PPF_Gen
2B14 2B16 2B18
BO_Trp_MechRly_ BO_Trp_MechRly_ BO_Trp_MechRly_
2B20 2B22 2B24
BO_Bak_Exc BO_Bak_Exc BO_Bak_Exc
2B26 2B28 2B30
Figure 5.3-2 List of signaling outputs

5.3.3 Alarming outputs

Local signal Remote signal Event record
3A01 3A02 3B04
BO_Alm_FAIL BO_Alm_FAIL BO_Alm_FAIL
3A03 3A04 3B26
BO_Alm_Abnor BO_Alm_Abnor BO_Alm_Abnor
3A05 3A06 3B28
BO_Alm_CTS BO_Alm_CTS BO_Alm_CTS
3A07 3A08 3B06
BO_Alm_VTS BO_Alm_VTS BO_Alm_VTS
3A09 3A10 3B08
BO_Alm_OvLd BO_Alm_OvLd BO_Alm_OvLd
3A11 3A12 3B10
BO_Alm_NegaOC_Gen BO_Alm_NegaOC_Gen BO_Alm_NegaOC_Gen
3A13 3A14 3B12
BO_Alm_UV_Gen BO_Alm_UV_Gen BO_Alm_UV_Gen
3A15 3A16 3B14
BO_Alm_EF_Sta BO_Alm_EF_Sta BO_Alm_EF_Sta
3A17 3A18 3B16
BO_Alm_1PEF BO_Alm_1PEF BO_Alm_1PEF
3A19 3A20 3B18
BO_Alm_LossEXC_Gen BO_Alm_LossEXC_Gen BO_Alm_LossEXC_Gen
3A21 3A22 3B20
BO_Alm_OOS_Gen BO_Alm_OOS_Gen BO_Alm_OOS_Gen
3A23 3A24 3B22
BO_Alm_FreqProt_Gen BO_Alm_FreqProt_Gen BO_Alm_FreqProt_Gen
3A25 3A26 3B24
BO_Alm_RevPwr_Gen BO_Alm_RevPwr_Gen BO_Alm_RevPwr_Gen
3A27 3A28 3B29
BO_Alm_OvExc_Gen BO_Alm_OvExc_Gen BO_Alm_OvExc_Gen
3A29 3A30 3B30
Figure 5.3-3 List of alarming outputs
5.3.4 Other outputs
BO_OC_InitBFP
3B01 3B03
BO_OC_InitBFP
3B05 3B07
Figure 5.3-4 List of other outputs


Chapter6 Software Overview
6.1 Software Overview

The software for the relay can be conceptually split into three elements: the system services
software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These three elements are
not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The
distinction between the three parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation
here:
Protection& control
Measurement and event, fault & disturbance
Software records
Disturbance recorder task
Protection
task
Scheme logic
Fourier signal processing Protection algorithms Platform Software
Event, fault, disturbance Remote communication

Protection & maintenance record interface –
Control Settings logging IEC60870-5-103
Supervisor task
Settings Remote communication

database interface - Modbus
Front panel interface – Local & Remote

Sampling function Control of LCD & keypad communication interface
output contacts
and LEDs
Control of interfaces to keypad,

Sample data & LCD, LEDS & rear communication
digital logic ports.
input Self-checking maintenance
records
System services software
Relay hardware
Figure 6.1-1 Software structure of RCS-985G
6.2 System services software

As shown in Figure 6.1-1, the system services software provides the interface between the relay‘s
hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control
software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD
display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor
and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from flash EPROM at power up.

6.3 Platform software

The platform software has three main functions:
To control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms
and event, fault, and maintenance records.
To store and maintain a database of all of the relay‘s settings in non-volatile memory.
To provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relay‘s user
interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using
whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, MODBUS, and IEC
60870-5-103).
6.3.1 Record logging

The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The
records for all of these incidents are logged in a battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a
non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms,
32 event records, 32 fault records and 8 cycles of normal operation waveform. The logs are
maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function
can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a
maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by
the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the
protection software function. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics in this manual.
6.3.2 Settings database

The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including system
parameters, equipments parameters and the protection settings. The parameters and settings are
maintained in non-volatile memory. The platform software‘s management of the settings database
includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the
database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid conflict between different parts of the
software during a setting change.
6.3.3 Database interface

The other function of the platform software is to implement the relay‘s internal interface between
the database and each of the relay‘s user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements
must be accessible from all of the relay‘s user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The
platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
6.3.4 Protection and control software

The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection
elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both
the system services software and the platform software as well as organize its own operations.
The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to
provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a

supervisor task that controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages
between the task and the platform software.
6.3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling
After initialization at start-up, the protection and control task is suspended until there are sufficient
samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a ‗sampling
function‘ which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from
the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection and control software
resumes execution when the unprocessed sample‘s in the buffer reaches a certain number. For
the RCS-985G protection relay, the protection task is executed at the same speed as the sampling
rate, i.e. the calculation of all relays is finished before next sampling process. During the residual
time, operations by other software tasks take place.
6.3.4.2 Signal processing
The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and
frequency tracking of the analog signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous
value over 15ms. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained at least
15ms before it is registered with the protection and control software.
The frequency tracking of the analog input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm
which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured
signal‘s phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate
being used by the AC modules so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of
the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection and
control task.
6.3.4.3 Event and fault recording
A change in any digital input signal, protection element output signal, operation flags of fault
detectors, tripping flags causes an event record to be created. When this happens, the protection
and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be
processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor
task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record message, it instructs the
platform software to create the appropriate log in the battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of
the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisor‘s buffer. This means
that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged in by the platform
software.
6.3.4.4 Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can
record the waveforms for up to 32 analog channels and the values of all digital signals of
RCS-985G. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 8 seconds. The disturbance
recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per sampling period.
The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance
record. The disturbance records can be extracted by RCSPC that can also store the data in

COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data.
6.4 Software downloading

The relay supports software downloading for the purpose of debugging or updating on site.
Hardware requirement
Basic requirement of computer:
CPU: Pentium II 300 or higher level CPU,
OS: Win98, Win98SE, WinMe, WinNT4.0(service pack 4 or higher), Win2000, WinXP;
RAM: at least 128M, 256M is recommended;
Space requirement: at least 200M free space on system hard disk;
Displayer: support 800*600 or higher resolution at the 16bit color model;
RS232 communication port;
Software requirement:
Special software RCSPC.
Downloading method
Note:
Ensure that the board is not blank before downloading software to it, i.e., certain versions of
software already exists on the board.
Warning:
If some unexpected cases occur, please do inform the factory first instead of dealing with it by
yourself.
RCS-985
HEALTHY
GRP
VT ALARM
CT ALARM
ALARM
ENT
ESC
TRIP
2
3
5
2
3
5

Figure 6.4-1 Software downloading communication port
Steps：
1. Connect RS-232 communication port of the computer and that mounted on front panel of
RCS-985G protection equipment by a cable with DB-9 connectors on both ends, see Figure 6.4-1.
2. Run the program RCSPC. If the connection and settings are correct, the screen will display
―RCS-985G connected‖, such as Figure 6.4-2. But if it is not connected, please check whether the
parameter setting of RCSPC corresponds with the relay, such as ―COM port‖ and ―Baud rate‖, see
Figure 6.4-3.
Figure 6.4-2 Succeed connecting of RCSPC

COM port must be the

same with that
connected with the relay
Baud rate must be

9600bps
Figure 6.4-3 Parameter setting of RCSPC
3. Download CPU program. At first, make sure it is at CPU mode as ―CPU>‖, then press the button
and select the correct program file, such as CPU.s19, to download into the CPU module.
Make sure that the file FLASHCPU.s19 is in the same folder as the program file.
4. Download MON program. Change it to MON mode by typing ―MON‖, then ―MON>‖ will appear.
Then repeat step 3 to download MON.s19 to MON module. Make sure the file FLASHMON.s19 is
in the same folder as the program file. See Figure 6.4-4.

Figure 6.4-4 Change to MON mode and download program
5．After downloading CPU and MON programs, reset the equipment and download default settings.
Then the ‗HEALTHY‘ LED on the front panel of the relay will illuminate.
6. Download FACE program. Change it to FACE mode by typing ―FACE‖ or ―PNL‖, then ―PNL>‖
will appear. Press the button and select the 985xx_FACE.hex file to download it into the
panel module. Make sure the file FLASH_FACE.hex is in the same folder as the program file.
7. The user should now check and ensure that the software version, CRC code and the generating
time of software are same as those recorded in the relevant documentations. Enter the menu
―Version‖, then new version of protection will be displayed on the LCD, see Figure 6.4-5.
VERSION
CPUBrd: RCS-985G3QM 1.00
ABCDEFGH
2007-01-01 09:00
MONBrd: RCS-985G3QM 1.00
ABCDEFGH
2007-01-01 09:00
HMI: RCS-985G3QM 1.00 ABCD
2007-01-01 09:00 T_060902
SUBQ_ID: SUBQ_12345678
Figure 6.4-5 Version of protection


Chapter7 Settings
Chapter7 Settings
The relay must be configured to the system and application by means of appropriate settings. The
settings of this relay include system parameters, protection element settings and scheme logic
settings.
7.1 Equipment parameters

7.1.1 Setting list
Table 7.1-1 List of equipment settings
No. Symbol Range Step Default

1 Active_Grp 0～1 1 0
2 Equip_ID 6 characters maximum
3 Comm_Addr 0～255 1 1
4 COM1_Baud 1.2/2.4/4.8 / 9.6 /14.4/ 19.2 / 38.4 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s
5 COM2_Baud 1.2/2.4/4.8 / 9.6 /14.4/ 19.2 / 38.4 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s
6 Printer_Baud 4.8 / 9.6 /19.2 kbit/s 9.6k bit/s
7 Protocol 0000-FFFF 0011
logic setting ―1‖ - enable, ―0‖ - disable
8 En_Auto_Print 0/1 0
9 En_Net_Print 0/1 0
10 En_Remote_Cfg 0/1 0
11 GPS_Pulse 0/1 0
Note:
Symbols of the parameter listed in above table are used for communication, printing and
displaying on LCD.
7.1.2 Setting instruction of the parameters
1 No.1-- [Active_Grp]
Two setting groups can be configured for the equipment, and only one is active at one time.
However, equipment parameters and system parameters are common for all protection setting
groups.
2 No.2-- [Equip_ID]
The setting consists of ASCII codes, which is identification for report printing only. It can be
configured according to the name or number of generator.
3 No.3-- [Comm_Addr]

Chapter7 Settings
The address used for the host computer to identify the equipment, usually provided by substation
system. If the equipment is not connected to automation system, equipment address may be
random.
4 No.4-- [Com1_Baud]
The baud rate of serial port 1 shall be selected from specified range.
5 No.5-- [Com2_Baud]
The baud rate of serial port 2 shall be selected from specified range.
6 No.6--[Printer_Baud]
The baud rate used for printer port shall be selected from specified range.
7 No.7-- [Protocol]
The logic setting consists of 16 binary digits but four hexadecimal digits can be viewed through
device LCD screen. Every digit has a dedicated meaning and some digits have no definition.
Following will be seen on PC through RCSPC software.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B: MODBUS
A: MODBUS
B: LFP
A: LFP
B: 103
A: 103
The definitions of digits are:
Table 7.1-2 Definition of logic setting of communication protocol
Bit Definition
0 communication port A using protocol IEC 60870-5-103
1 communication port A using proprietary protocol LFP
2 communication port A using MODBUS protocol
3 No definition
4 communication port B using protocol IEC 60870-5-103
5 communication port B using proprietary protocol LFP
6 communication port B using MODBUS protocol
7-15 No definitions
For example, if logic setting [Protocol] is set as ―0011‖, it means communication both port A and B
use IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
8 No.8-- [En_Auto_Print]
This setting shall be set as ―1‖ if automatic report printing is expected after the relay operates
when a fault occurs. Otherwise it shall be set as ―0‖. It is suggested that the user may set this
parameter of the equipment as ―1‖ (i.e. automatic printing), if the equipment is always connected

Chapter7 Settings
directly with a printer, or set as ―0‖ (i.e. not automatic printing) if the equipment is connected with a
printer by through switch on panel.
9 No.9-- [En_Net_Print]
Set it as ―1‖ if shared network printer is used for printing. Set it as ―0‖ if dedicated printer is used.
Network printer means several protection equipments share one printer through a printer
management unit and RS-485 port. Dedicated printer means the protection equipment is
connected with a printer through RS232 port directly.
10 No.10--[En_Remote_Cfg]
Set it as ―0‖ if only local configuration is permitted. Set it as ―1‖ if local and remote configurations
are both permitted.
11 No.11-- [GPS_Pulse]
Set it as ―1‖ for minute pulse and ―0‖ for second pulse.
7.1.3 Setting path

Access path in menu is:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> EQUIP SETTINGS -> [setting symbol]
7.2 System Settings

7.2.1 Logic settings of configuring functions
7.2.1.1 Settings list
Table 7.2-1 List of protection configuration setting
No. Symbol Range Default

1 En_Diff_Gen 0/1 0
2 En_SPTDiff_Gen 0/1 0
3 En_IntTurn_Gen 0/1 0
4 En_PPF_Gen 0/1 0
5 En_EF_Sta 0/1 0
6 En_EF_RotWdg 0/1 0
7 En_OvLd_Sta 0/1 0
8 En_NegOC_Gen 0/1 0
9 En_LossExc_Gen 0/1 0
10 En_OOS_Gen 0/1 0
11 En_VoltProt_Gen 0/1 0
12 En_OvExc_Gen 0/1 0
13 En_PwrProt_Gen 0/1 0
14 En_FreqProt_Gen 0/1 0

Chapter7 Settings
15 En_StShut_Gen 0/1 0
16 En_AccEnerg_Gen 0/1 0
17 En_Diff_Exc 0/1 0
18 En_Bak_Exc 0/1 0
19 En_OvLd_RotWdg 0/1 0
20 En_MechRly 0/1 0
21 En_VTComp_Term_Gen 0/1 0
22 En_BFP_GCB 0/1 0
23 En_TestMode(＃) Disable/Enable Disable
Note:
Symbols of the parameter listed in above table are used for communication, printing and
displaying on LCD. Setting marked with “＃” means that it is can not be seen on LCD or by
printing and only can be seen through RCSPC software.
7.2.1.2 Explanation of the parameters for setting
1 No.1-- [En_Diff_Gen]
This logic setting is used for configuration of protection functions. Setting it as ―1‖ means the
generator differential protection is enabled and setting as ―0‖ means the protection is disabled.
2 No.2-- [En_SPTDiff_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable phase-splitting transverse differential protection.
3 N0.3-- [En_IntTurn_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable interturn fault protection.
4 No.4-- [En_PPF_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable phase-to-phase backup protection of generator.
5 No.5-- [En_EF_Sta]
This logic setting is used to enable earth fault protection of stator.
6 No.6-- [En_EF_RotWdg]
This logic setting is used to earth fault protection of rotor.
7 No.7-- [En_OvLd_Sta]
This logic setting is used to enable overload function of stator.
8 No.8-- [En_NegOC_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable negative sequence overcurrent protection of stator.
9 No.9-- [En_LossExc_Gen]

Chapter7 Settings
This logic setting is used to enable loss-of-excitation protection of generator.
10 No.10-- [En_OOS_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable out-of-step protection of generator.
11 No.11-- [En_VoltProt_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable overvoltage and undervoltage protection of generator.
12 No.12-- [En_OvExc_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable overexcitation protection of generator.
13 No.13-- [En_PwrProt_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable overpower and underpower protection of generator.
14 No.14-- [En_FreqProt_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable overfrequency and underfrequency protection of generator.
15 No.15-- [En_StShut_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable all relevant protections in Startup/shutdown conditions of
generator.
16 No.16-- [En_AccEnerg_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable relevant protection in case of accident energization of
generator.
17 No.17-- [En_Diff_Exc]
This logic setting is used to enable differential protection of exciting transformer or exciter.
18 No.18-- [En_Bak_Exc]
This logic setting is used to enable backup protection of exciting transformer or exciter.
19 No.19-- [En_OvLd_RotWdg]
This logic setting is used to enable overload function of rotor winding.
20 No.20-- [En_MechRly]
This logic setting is used to enable mechanical protection.
21 No.21-- [En_VTComp_Term_Gen]
This logic setting is used to enable comparison function of VTs at the generator terminal.
22 No.22-- [En_BFP_GCB]
This logic setting is used to enable breaker failure protection of generator.
23 No.24-- [En_TestMode] (#)

Chapter7 Settings
This logic setting is configured especially for equipment debugging status. It is only seen by
RCSPC, which is used for generating messages of alarm or operation element for remote PC.
―Enable‖: enable sending all tripping contacts signals, protection tripping signals, alarm signals
and monitoring signals through DBU2000 software.
―Disable‖: disable the function mentioned above.
7.2.1.3 Setting path
All logic settings of configuring functions are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> SYSTEM SETTINGS -> PROT CONFIG -> [setting symbol]
7.2.2 Generator system parameters

After one selects current and voltage channel according to the requirement of specific application,
next step is to configure generator system parameters. Please note voltage or current setting of
channel selecting in implicit configuration settings is almost corresponding to the setting of ratio of
VT or CT except few ones which will be mentioned later.
7.2.2.1 Setting list
Table 7.2-2 List of generator system settings

1 fn_Gen 50/60 Hz 50
2 Pn_Gen 0-6000.0 MW 0.1 MW 300
3 PF_Gen 0.00-1.00 0.01 0.85
4 U1n_Gen 0-600.00 kV 0.01 kV 20
5 U1n_VT_Term_Gen 0-600.00 kV 0.01 V 11.55
6 U2n_VT_Term_Gen 57.74-110.00 V 0.01 V 57.74
7 U2n_DeltVT_Term_Gen 33.33-330.00 V 0.01 V 33.33
8 U1n_VT_NP_Gen 0-600.00 kV 0.01 kV 11.55
9 U2n_VT_NP_Gen 0-600.00 V 0.01 V 110
10 I1n_CT_Term_Gen 0-60000 A 1A 12000
11 I2n_CT_Term_Gen 1A/5A 1A 1
12 k_SP1_Gen 0-100.00 % 0.01 % 50
13 k_SP2_Gen 0-100.00 % 0.01 % 50
14 I1n_CT_SP1_Gen 0-60000 A 1A 12000
15 I2n_CT_SP1_Gen 1A/5A 1
16 I1n_CT_SP2_Gen 0-60000 A 1A 12000
17 I2n_CT_SP2_Gen 1A/5A 5
18 I1n_CT_TrvDiff_Gen 0-60000 A 1A 600
19 I2n_CT_TrvDiff_Gen 1A/5A 1
20 I1n_RotWdg 0-60000 A 1A 1000

Chapter7 Settings
21 U2n_Shunt_RotWdg 0-100.00 mV 0.01 mV 75
Note:
Symbol of the parameters listed in above table are used for communication, printing and
displaying on LCD.
7.2.2.2 Setting instruction of the parameters
1 No.1-- [fn_Gen]
This setting indicates the nominal frequency of power system in which the generator protection
equipment is in service.
2 No.2-- [Pn_Gen]
Capacity of active power of the generator shall be configured as its name plate stated.
3 No.3-- [PF_Gen]
Rated power factor of generator.
4 No.4-- [U1n_Gen]
System rated voltage at the terminal of generator. This setting is used for calculating the rated
current of generator. It should be set according to the real operating voltage of the power system.
5 No.5-- [U1n_VT_Term_Gen]
Rated primary voltage of VT at the terminal of generator. This parameter can be configured as
either phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage value. For example, if the terminal VT ratio is
20kV 100V 100V

, this parameter and the following two (NO.6 and NO.7) can be set as
3 3 3
11.55kV, 57.74V and 33.33V or can be set as 20kV, 100V and 57.74V. This is used for substation
automation system. From this setting and the next two ones, VT ratio can be got. Secondary
voltage and current recorded by the equipment will be transferred to primary value by multiplying
VT ratio when fault oscillogram is sent to the host.
6 No.6-- [U2n_VT_Term_Gen]
Rated secondary voltage of VT at the terminal of generator.
7 No.7-- [U2n_DeltVT_Term_Gen]
Rated secondary open-delta voltage at the terminal of generator.
8 No.8-- [U1n_VT_NP_Gen]
Rated primary voltage of VT at the neutral point of generator.
9 No.9-- [U2n_VT_NP_Gen]
Rated secondary voltage of VT at the neutral point of generator.

Chapter7 Settings
10 No.10-- [I1n_CT_Term_Gen]
Rated primary current of CT at the terminal of the generator.
11 No.11-- [I2n_CT_Term_Gen]
Rated secondary current of CT at the terminal of the generator.
12 No.12-- [k_SP1_Gen]
Branching coefficient of the first group of windings to the whole stator. At the generator neutral
point, two channels of CT input are reserved which can meet the requirement of both differential
protection and phase-splitting transverse differential protection. The branching coefficient can be
set according to the proportion of per branch occupying in the whole winding. For the case that
only one branch can be drawn out from the neutral point of generator, the branching coefficient of
the first one group branch must be set as 100% and the other branching coefficient must be set as
0%.
13 No.13-- [k_SP2_Gen]
Branching coefficient of the second group of windings to the whole of stator.
14 No.14-- [I1n_CT_SP1_Gen]
Rated primary current of CT of the first splitting branch of stator.
Rated secondary current of CT of the first splitting branch of stator.
Rated primary current of CT of the second splitting branch of stator.
Rated secondary current of CT of the second splitting branch of stator.
18 No.18-- [I1n_CT_TrvDiff_Gen]
Rated primary current of CT used for transverse differential protection.
19 No.19-- [I2n_CT_TrvDiff_Gen]
Rated secondary current of CT used for transverse differential protection.
20 No.20-- [I1n_RotWdg]
Primary rated current of rotor. This setting and the next one can be set conveniently by inputting
the rated primary and secondary parameters of the shunt.
21 No.21-- [U2n_Shunt_RotWdg]
Secondary rated voltage of rotor shunt.

Chapter7 Settings
All settings of generator system parameters are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> SYSTEM SETTINGS -> GEN SYS SETTINGS -> [setting symbol]
Note:
These parameters are as important as the settings. They have to be configured according to
actual application on site.
7.2.3 System parameters of excitation transformer or exciter
Table 7.2-3 List of excitation transformer of exciter settings

1 fn_Exc 50,100, 150Hz 50
2 Sn_Exc 0-100.00 MVA 0.01 MVA 0.5
3 U1n_S1_Exc 0-600.00 kV 0.01 kV 20
4 U1n_S2_Exc 0-600.00 kV 0.01 kV 6.3
5 I1n_CT_S1_Exc 0-60000 A 1A 20
6 I2n_CT_S1_Exc 1A,5A 1
7 I1n_CT_S2_Exc 0-60000 A 1A 60
8 I2n_CT_S2_Exc 1A,5A 1
Logic setting ―1‖ - enable, ―0‖ – disable
9 Opt_Exc 0, 1 0
10 Yy12_Conn_ET 0, 1 0
11 Dd12_Conn_ET 0, 1 0
12 Dy11_Conn_ET 0, 1 0
13 Yd11_Conn_ET 0, 1 1
14 Dy1_Conn_ET 0, 1 0
7.2.3.2 Setting instruction of the parameters
1 No.1-- [fn_Exc]
This setting indicates the nominal frequency of exciter. If excitation transformer is used, this setting
can be set as 50Hz and the other settings in this table should be set according to relevant
parameters of excitation transformer.
2 No.2-- [Sn_Exc]
Capacity of the exciter or excitation transformer shall be configured as its name plate stated.
3 No.3-- [U1n_S1_Exc]

Chapter7 Settings
The system rated voltage on HV side of the excitation transformer. This setting is used to calculate
the correction coefficient of differential protection of excitation transformer.
If exciter is used, this setting and NO.4 setting are all set as the rated voltage of exciter.
4 No.4-- [U1n_S2_Exc]
System rated voltage on LV side of the excitation transformer. This setting is used to calculate the
correction coefficient of differential protection of excitation transformer.
5 No.5-- [I1n_CT_S1_Exc]
Primary rated current of the CT on HV side of the excitation transformer or CT at the terminal of
the exciter.
Secondary rated current of the CT on HV side of the excitation transformer or CT at the terminal of
the exciter.
Primary rated current of the CT on LV side of the excitation transformer or CT at the neutral point
of the exciter.
Secondary rated current of the CT on LV side of the excitation transformer or CT at the neutral
point of the exciter.
9 No.9-- [Opt_Exc]
Exciter is used in the system. If this setting is set as ―1‖, that means exciter is used in the generator
system instead of excitation transformer. Otherwise means the contrary.
10 No.10-- [Yy12_Conn_ET]
The connection mode of excitation transformer is Yy-12 mode.
Note:
In the symbol of ―Yy-12‖, the first letter ―Y‖ represents the connection mode of windings on HV side,
and the other ―y‖ represents the connection mode of windings on LV side, ―12‖ represents
connection group between HV and LV windings. The following four settings are similar to this one.
11 No.11-- [Dd12_Conn_ET]
The connection mode of excitation transformer is Dd-12 mode.
12 No.12-- [Dy11_Conn_ET]
The connection mode of excitation transformer is Dy-11 mode.
13 No.13-- [Yd11_Conn_ET]

Chapter7 Settings
The connection mode of excitation transformer is Yd-11 mode.
14 No.14-- [Dy1_Conn_ET]
The connection mode of excitation transformer is Dy-1 mode.
Main Menu -> SETTING -> SYSTEM SETTINGS -> EXC SYS Settings -> [setting symbol]
7.2.4 Implicit configuration settings

The settings in the following list are associated with application-specific primary layout of
generator and exciter, tripping logics. These settings can not be seen on LCD of equipment and
only be viewed and configured on PC through RCSPC software in the submenu “CONFIG
SETTINGS‖. These settings are usually configured in factory or configured by field commission
engineer according to the design drawing and project requirement.
Table 7.2-4 List of implicit configuration settings
No. Symbol Range Default

1 Opt_Polar_CT (＃) 0000-FFFF 003F
2 Cfg_BakCT_Gen(＃) A 4:Curr_Chan
3 Cfg_CT_Power_Gen (＃) A 4:Curr_Chan
4 En_MeterCT_Power_Gen (＃) Yes/No No
5 Opt_Gen_V0_by_Calc(＃) Yes/No No
6 Opt_SLD_1 (＃) 0/1 1
7 Opt_SLD_2 (＃) 0/1 0
8 Opt_SLD_3 (＃) 0/1 0
9 Opt_WaveRec_MON(＃) Pickup/Trip Pickup
10 Opt_Debug_MON(＃) DSP2/DSP1 DSP2
11 Opt_Dur_WaveRec_MON(＃) 4S/8S 4S
12 En_Displ_Pickup(＃) Yes/No No
13 En_WaveRec_Alm (＃) Yes/No No
Note:
For definitions of A in column range, please refer to section 7.2.4.2.
Setting marked with ―＃‖ means that it is can not be seen on LCD or by printing, but only can be
seen through RCSPC software.

Chapter7 Settings
7.2.4.2 CT channel selection
A Three-phase current channel selection
There are 6 options in three-phase current channel selection.
0: Curr_Chan 1 (Three-phase current channel 1)
7.2.4.3 Explanation of the parameters and notice for setting
1 No.1-- [Opt_Polar_CT](＃)
This is the logic setting of CT polarity definition, which consists of sixteen binary digits. Every digit
has specified meaning and some digits have no definition.
Generally, CT polarity definition is as Figure 1.1-1 show. However if some CT polarity direction is
reversed by incorrect wiring connection, there is still a chance to correct it by configuring this logic
setting easily. Please set the corresponding digit of the logic setting.
Following will be seen on PC through RCSPC software.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Curr_Chann4(CT_Term_Gen)
Curr_Chann6(SpareCT_Gen)
Curr_Chann3(SpareCT1)
Curr_Chann2(CT2_Exc)
Curr_Chann1(CT1_Exc)
Curr_Chann5(CT_NP)
The definitions of digits are:
Table 7.2-5 Definition of logic setting of CT polarity
Bit Definition
0 CTs polarity of current channel 1 (CT1_Exc) reversed
1 CTs polarity of current channel 2 (CT2_Exc) reversed
2 CTs polarity of current channel 3 (SpareCT1) reversed
3 CTs polarity of current channel 4 (CT_Term_Gen) reversed
4 CTs polarity of current channel 5 (CT_NP) reversed

Chapter7 Settings
5 CTs polarity of current channel 6 (SpareCT_Gen) reversed

6-15 No definition
2 No.2-- [Cfg_BakCT_Term_Gen] (＃)
Logic setting of selecting three-phase current channel for backup protection of generator.
3 No.3-- [Cfg_CT_Power_Gen] (＃)
Logic setting of selecting three-phase current channel for reverse-power protection of generator.
4 No.4-- [En_MeterCT_Power_Gen] (＃)
Logic setting of selecting measuring CT for reverse-power protection of generator. If the external
CT is measuring class, then the setting is remanded to set as ―Yes‖. Otherwise if the external CT is
protection class, then the setting is set as ‖No‖.
5 No.5-- [Opt_Gen_V0_by_Calc](＃)
Logic setting of enabling zero sequence voltage is calculated from the terminal TV of generator.
6 No.6-- [Opt_SLD_1] , No.7-- [Opt_SLD_2], No.8-- [Opt_SLD_3](＃)
These three settings are the logic settings of generator connection.
Settings [Opt_SLD_1] as ―1‖ means the scheme type consists of only the generator.
Settings [Opt_SLD_2] as ―1‖ means the scheme type consists of generator and excitation
transformer.
Settings [Opt_SLD_3] is the backup connection type of generator and exciter.
Note:
Only one of the three settings can be set as ―1‖.
7 No.9--[Opt_WaveRec_MON] (＃)
Logic setting of selecting recording triggering mode of MON module.
―0‖: recording is triggered when any fault detector picks up.
―1‖: recording is triggered when any protection element trips.
8 No.10--[Opt_Debug_MON] (＃)
This logic setting is provided especially for software developing, not for ordinary users.
9 No.11--[Opt_Dur_WaveRec_MON] (＃)
Logic setting of selecting recording time of MON module.
―0‖: recording persisting time is 4s with 24 samples per cycle.
―1‖: recording persisting time is 8s with 12 samples per cycle.

Chapter7 Settings
10 No.12--[En_Displ_Pickup] (＃)
This logic setting is provided especially for software developing, not for ordinary users.
11 No.13--[ En_WaveRec_Alm] (＃)
Logic setting for enabling alarm signal to trigger wave record.
Note:
It is suggested to configure settings No.9-No.13 as default settings.
7.3 Protection Settings

7.3.1 Differential protection settings
7.3.1.1 Settings list
Table 7.3-1 List of generator differential protection settings

1 I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen 0.10–1.50 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 0.1
2 I_InstDiff_Gen 2.00–14.00 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 6
3 Slope1_PcntDiff_Gen 0.00–0.50 0.01 0.05
4 Slope2_PcntDiff_Gen 0.30–0.80 0.01 0.5
5 TrpLog_Diff_Gen 0000–FFFF 1 1FFF
6 En_InstDiff_Gen 0, 1 1
7 En_PcntDiff_Gen 0, 1 1
8 En_DPFC_Diff_Gen 0, 1 1
9 Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Gen 0, 1 1
Note:
Symbol of the parameters listed in above table are used for communication, printing and
displaying on LCD.
7.3.1.2 Explanation of the settings
1 No.1-- [I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen]
This is a pickup setting of percentage current differential protection, which is also the setting of
fault detector of percentage differential protection. It shall be higher than the maximum
unbalanced current when the generator is operating on normal rated load, i.e.
I cdqd  K rel  2 0.03 I f 2 n I cdqd  K rel  I unb .0

or (Equation 7.3-1)

Chapter7 Settings
Where:
I f 2 n is secondary rated current of generator,
I f 1n
I f 2n 
n fLH
Where:
I f 1n is primary rated current of generator and n fLH is ratio of generator CT.
Pn / cos
I f 1n 
3U f 1n
Where:
Pn is rated capacity of generator;
cos  is power factor of generator and
U f 1n is rated voltage of generator terminal.
K rel is reliability factor, 1.5 in general;
I unb.0 is the measured actual unbalance current during rated load of generator, 0.2 I f 2 n -0.3
I f 2 n is recommended for reference.
Where:
I cdqd represents the setting [I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen].
2 No.2-- [I_InstDiff_Gen]
Setting of unrestrained instantaneous differential protection.
Unrestraint instantaneous differential protection is a complementary part of differential protection.

Its current setting shall be higher than the maximum unbalanced current due to breaker‘s
asynchronous closure. For large unit, it can be set as high as 3 or 4 times of the rated current. 4
times of rated current is recommended.
3 No.3-- [Slope1_PcntDiff_Gen]
Setting of the first slope of percentage differential protection, it shall be:

Chapter7 Settings
K bl1  K rel  K cc  K er
(Equation 7.3-2)
Where:
K rel is reliability coefficient which is considered to be 1.0~2.0 in general;
K cc
is the type factor of CT, 0.5 in general;
K er
is error factor of CT ratio, no more than 0.1.
K bl1
represents [Slope1_PcntDiff_Gen] which is set as 0.05~0.1 in general.
4 No.4-- [Slope2_PcntDiff_Gen]
Maximum value of restraint coefficient of the differential characteristic curve.
With type factor of CT not taken into account, the maximum unbalance current is, ,
K unb . max  K ap  K er  K k . max

(Equation 7.3-3)
Where:
K ap
is non periodic component factor, usually no less than 2.0;
K er
is error factor of CT ratio, no more than 0.1;
I k . max
is periodic component of secondary value of external three phase short circuit current and it
can be taken as 4 times of rated current if it is less than 4 times of rated current.
Maximum slope of percentage differential protection is:
I unb. max*  I cdqd*  2k bl1

k bl2 
I k . max*  2 （Equation 7.3-4）
where:
I unb. max* I cdqd * I k . max*

， and are all per unit value of rated current of generator;
kbl2 ([Slope2_PcntDiff_Gen] ) is taken as 0.50 generally.
If the percentage differential protection is configured based on rules mentioned above, then when
the phase-to-phase metallic short circuit fault occurs at the terminal of generator, sensitivity factor

Chapter7 Settings
K sen
will meet requirement ≥ 2 surely.
5 No.5-- [TrpLog_Diff_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of differential protection is used to specify which breaker or breakers
will be tripped by this protection. This word comprises of 16 binary bits as follows and is displayed
as a hexadecimal number of 4 digits from 0000H to FFFFH on LCD of equipment. The tripping
output logic setting is specified as follows:
bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Protection Enabled
TJ12: TrpOutp 12
TJ11: TrpOutp 11
TJ10: TrpOutp 10
TJ9: TrpOutp 9
TJ8: TrpOutp 8
TJ7: TrpOutp 7
TJ6: TrpOutp 6
TJ5: TrpOutp 5
TJ4: TrpOutp 4
TJ3: TrpOutp 3
TJ2: TrpOutp 2
TJ1: TrpOutp 1
No definition
No definition
No definition
Function
Note:
Set bit 0 as ―1‖ means this protection element will trip breaker or breakers when operating. The bit
corresponding to the output channal shall be set as―1‖ and other bits shall be ―0‖. For example, if
differential protection is defined to trip output channel 5, the bit ―0‖ and ―5‖ bit shall be set as ―1‖
and other bits ―0‖. Then a hexadecimal number 0021H is formed as the tripping output logic
setting.
Please note that tripping output logic settings of the equipment have to be set on the basis of
application-specific drawings.
All the tripping logic settings mentioned below is defined as same as this one.
6 No.6-- [En_InstDiff_Gen]
Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection enabled. If this setting is set as ―1‖, it means this
protection is enabled. Otherwise it means the protection is disabled.
7 No.7-- [En_PcntDiff_Gen]
Percentage differential protection enabled.
8 No.8-- [En_DPFC_Diff_Gen]
DPFC percentage differential protection enabled.
9 No.9-- [Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Gen]
If this logic setting is set as ―1‖, it means percentage differential protection will be blocked when CT
circuit failure take place. Otherwise it means the blocking function is disabled.
All settings of differential protection settings are accessible in the following path:

Chapter7 Settings
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN DIFF PROT --> [setting symbol]
7.3.2 Splitting-phase transverse differential protection settings
Table 7.3-2 List of splitting-phase transverse differential protection settings

1. I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 0.10 – 1.50 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 0.1
2. I_InstSPTDiff_Gen 2.00 – 14.00 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 6
3. Slope1_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 0.00 -- 0.50 0.01 0.05
4. Slope2_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 0.30 – 0.80 0.01 0.5
5. TrpLog_SPTDiff_Gen 0000 -- FFFF 1 1FFF
6. En_InstSPTDiff_Gen 0，1 1
7. En_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 0，1 1
8. Opt_CTS_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 0，1 1
1 No.1-- [I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
This is pickup setting of splitting-phase transverse percentage current differential protection, which
is also the setting of fault detector of this protection. It shall be higher than maximum unbalance
current when the generator operates on normal rated load, i.e.
I ' op.0  K rel ( I ' unb.1  I unb.2

'
)
（Equation 7.3-5）
Where:
I ' op.0 : represents the setting [I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen],
K rel : is reliability coefficient. In general, Krel = 1.3 – 1.5,
I ' unb.1 : is unbalance current due to amplitude error between the CTs used in this protection in
' ' '

load condition. In practical application, I unb.1 = 0.06 I 2n . Here, I 2n is the secondary rated
current of CT.
I ' unb.2 : the second type unbalance current. Because each shunt branch of every phase is
distributed in different grooves on the surface of rotor for hydro generator and the air gap field of
each groove is different, therefore this second type of unbalance current appears.

Chapter7 Settings
User can also get the maximum unbalance current value by metering the real transverse
unbalance current in full load condition of the generator. Generally speaking, the value is a little
greater than the one of differential protection of generator.
For reference, it can be set as I

'
op.0  0.5I ' e . Here, I e' is secondary rated current of generator.
2 No.2-- [I_InstSPTDiff_Gen]
Setting of unrestrained splitting-phase transverse differential protection.
3 No.3-- [Slope1_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
Setting of the first slope of percentage differential protection
4 No.4-- [Slope2_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
5 No.5-- [TrpLog_SPTDiff_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of splitting-phase transverse differential protection.
6 No.6-- [En_InstSPTDiff_Gen]
Instantaneous splitting-phase transverse differential protection enabled.
7 No.7-- [En_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
Percentage splitting-phase transverse differential protection enabled.
8 No.8-- [Opt_CTS_PcntSPTDiff_Gen]
If this logic setting is set as ―1‖, it means percentage splitting-phase transverse differential
protection will be blocked when CT circuit failure happens. Otherwise it means the function is
disabled.
Setting path
Settings of generator phase-splitting transverse protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN SPTDIFF PROT->[setting symbol]
7.3.3 Settings of turn-to-turn fault protection of generator
Table 7.3-3 List of turn-to-turn fault protection settings

1 I_SensTrvDiff_Gen 0.10 – 50.00 A 0.01 A 2.0
2 I_InsensTrvDiff_Gen 0.10 – 50.00 A 0.01 A 10
3 t_TrvDiff_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 0.2
4 V_SensROV_Longl_Gen 1 – 10.00 V 0.01 V 1

Chapter7 Settings
5 V_InsensROV_Longl_Gen 1 – 20.00 V 0.01 V 6

6 t_ROV_Longl_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 0.1
7 TrpLog_IntTurn_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
8 En_SensTrvDiff_Gen 0，1 1
9 En_InsensTrvDiff_Gen 0，1 1
10 En_SensROV_Longl_Gen 0，1 0
11 En_InsensROV_Longl_Gen 0，1 0
12 En_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen 0，1 0
7.3.3.2 Explanation of the parameters and notice for setting
1 NO.1—[I_SensTrvDiff_Gen]
Current setting of high sensitive transverse differential protection.
Setting of this protection shall be higher than the maximum unbalanced current during normal
operating condition. Reliability factor can be more than 2. The setting value is usually:
I op  0.05 I f ln / n a
Where:
I OP represents the setting [I_SensTrvDiff_Gen].
I f ln
is primary rated current of generator and
na
is ratio of zero sequence CT of transverse differential protection.
Phase current restraint factor is a fixed coefficient in the program.
2 NO.2—[I_InsensTrvDiff_Gen]
Current setting of high-setting transverse differential protection.
It is equivalent to traditional transverse differential protection. Setting of this protection is as follows

which shall be higher than maximum unbalance current during external short circuit fault.
I op （0.20 ~ 0.30）I f ln / n a
Where:
I OP represents the setting [I_SensTrvDiff_Gen].
I f ln
is primary rated current of generator and
na
is ratio of zero sequence CT of transverse differential protection.

Chapter7 Settings
3 NO.3—[t_TrvDiff_Gen]
Delay of transverse differential protection (act on only after the occurrence of one-point ground of
rotor).
When one point earth fault occurs within rotor of generator and one point earth fault protection
operates, in order to prevent unwanted operation of transverse protection due to instantaneous
two points earth fault within the rotor, operation of this protection shall be delayed for 0.5 s – 1 s.
Note:
When a turn-to-turn fault occurs, the equipment will trip relevant breakers without delay according
to the tripping output logic setting, but a time delay decided by user will be activated after the
occurrence of one-point ground of rotor.
4 NO.4—[V_SensROV_Longl_Gen]
Voltage setting of high sensitive longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage protection .
Setting of this protection shall be higher than maximum unbalance voltage during normal
operation condition, usually:
U op  0.5 - 3 V
At beginning of configuration, 2 – 3 V is preferred. After fault waveform analysis, the setting can be
reduced properly and sensitivity of the protection can be improved than.
Phase current restraint factor is a fixed coefficient in the program.
5 NO.5—[V_InsensROV_Longl_Gen]
Setting of this protection shall be higher than maximum unbalance voltage during external fault,
usually:
U op  8 - 12 V
6 NO.6—[t_ROV_Longl_Gen]
Delay of longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage. Short delay 0.10 s – 0.20 s is recommended for
operation and output of this protection.
7 NO.7—[TrpLog_IntTurn_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of turn-to-turn fault protection of generator.
8 NO.8—[En_SensTrvDiff_Gen]
Enable high sensitive transverse differential protection of generator.
9 NO.9—[En_InsensTrvDiff_Gen]
Enable high-setting transverse differential protection of generator.

Chapter7 Settings
10 NO.10—[En_SensROV_Longl_Gen]
Enable high sensitive longitude zero sequence overvoltage protection of generator.
11 NO.11—[En_InsensROV_Longl_Gen]
Enable high-setting longitude zero sequence overvoltage protection of generator.
12 NO.12—[En_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen]
Enable directional DPFC turn-to-turn fault protection of generator.
Settings of generator interturn protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN INTTURN PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.4 Settings of backup protection of generator
Table 7.3-4 List of backup protection settings

1 V_NegOV_VCE_Gen 1.00 – 20.00 V 0.01 V 4
2 Vpp_UV_VCE_Gen 2.00 –100.00 V 0.01 V 60
3 I_OC1_Gen 0.10 –100.00 A 0.01 A 20
4 t_OC1_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
5 TrpLog_OC1_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 000F
6 I_OC2_Gen 0.10 –100.00 A 0.01 A 17
7 t_OC2_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 2
8 TrpLog_OC2_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 0F01
9 Z1_Fwd_Gen 0.00 –100.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 20
10 Z1_Rev_Gen 0.00 –100.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 20
11 t_Z1_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
12 TrpLog_Z1_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 0FFF
13 Z2_Fwd_Gen 0.00 –100.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 20
14 Z2_Rev_Gen 0.00 –100.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 20
15 t_Z2_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
16 TrpLog_Z2_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 0FFF
17 I_BO_OC_Gen 0.10 –100.00 A 0.01 A 20
18 En_VCE_Ctrl_OC1_Gen 0，1 1
19 En_VCE_Ctrl_OC2_Gen 0，1 1
20 Opt_VTS_Ctrl_OC_Gen 0，1 1
21 Opt_ExcMode_Gen 0，1 1
22 En_BO_OC_Gen 0，1 1

Chapter7 Settings
1 No.1-- [V_NegOV_VCE_Gen]
Negative sequence voltage setting of composite voltage control element. Setting and displayed
value of negative sequence voltage are U2.
Setting of negative sequence voltage relay shall be higher than unbalance voltage during normal
operation, generally
U op.2  (0.06 - -0.08 ) U n

Where: U n is secondary rated voltage.
Sensitivity factor shall be checked by phase-to-phase short circuit fault on HV side bus of main
transformer:
U 2. min
K sen 
U op2
Where:
U 2. min is minimum negative sequence voltage at location of the equipment during phase-to-phase
short circuit fault on HV side bus of main transformer. K sen ≥ 1.5 is required.
2 NO.2—[Vpp_UV_VCE_Gen]
Setting of phase-to-phase undervoltage of composite voltage control element.
Its operating voltage U op can be set as following:
For turbine generator, U op  0.6 U gn and for hydro-generator, U op  0.7 U gn
U gn
Where is rated phase-to-phase voltage of generator.
Sensitivity factor shall be checked by three-phase short circuit fault on HV side bus of main
transformer:
U op
K sen 
X t  I k(3. max
)
I k( 3. max
)
Where is maximum secondary fault current during three-phase short circuit on HV side bus

Chapter7 Settings
Xt X t  Zt K sen
of main transformer; is reactance of main transformer, . ≥ 1.2 is required.
3 NO.3—[I_OC1_Gen]
Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.
Setting of overcurrent relay shall be higher than rated current of generator.
K rel
I op  I gn
Kr
Where:
K rel
is reliability factor, 1.3 – 1.5;
K r is release factor, 0.85 – 0.95;
I gn
is secondary rated current of generator.
Sensitivity factor of overcurrent relay shall be checked by following:
I k( 2. min
)
K sen 
I op
I k( 2. min
)
Where is minimum fault current through location of the relay during phase-to-phase
K sen
metallic short circuit on HV side of main transformer. ≥ 1.2 is required.
4 NO.4—[t_OC1_Gen]
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 1. Delay of this protection shall be higher than that of
operation of backup protection of step-up transformer. This protection is used for islanding and
generator shut off.
5 NO.5—[TrpLog_OC1_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.
6 NO.6—[I_OC2_Gen]
Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2. Setting of overcurrent relay shall be higher than rated
current of transformer.
7 NO.7—[t_OC2_Gen]
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage2.

Chapter7 Settings
8 NO.8—[TrpLog_OC2_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage2.
9 NO.9—[Z1_Fwd_Gen]
Positive direction impedance setting of distance protection stage1. Here positive direction means
the direction is pointing to the transformer instead of generator itself.
If the value of this setting is greater than the next one, then the characteristic of distance protection
is set as excursive impedance circle; if it is equal to the next one, the characteristic is a whole
impedance circle; if the next one is set as ―0‖, the characteristic becomes directional impedance.
Generally, low impedance protection is considered as the backup protection of generator in case
that voltage-controlled overcurrent protection can‘t satisfy the sensitivity requirement of the
generator.
10 NO.10—[Z1_Rev_Gen]
Negative direction impedance setting of distance protection stage1. In general, this setting is set
as 5-10% of the positive direction impedance setting.
11 NO.11—[t_Z1_Gen]
Delay of distance protection stage1.
12 NO.12—[TrpLog_Z1_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of distance protection stage 1.
13 NO.13—[Z2_Fwd_Gen]
Positive direction impedance setting of distance protection stage2.
14 NO.14—[Z2_Rev_Gen]
Negative direction impedance setting of distance protection stage2
15 NO.15—[t_Z2_Gen]
Delay of distance protection stage2
16 NO.16—[TrpLog_Z2_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of distance protection stage1. Please refer to the tripping output logic
setting of differential protection of main transformer for details.
17 NO.17—[I_BO_OC_Gen]
Current setting of overcurrent element for controlling function of a set of contact.
18 NO.18—[En_VCE_Ctrl_OC1_Gen]
Enable controlling function to stage 1 of overcurrent protection by Composite Voltage Element.
19 NO.19—[En_VCE_Ctrl_OC2_Gen]

Chapter7 Settings
Enable controlling function to stage 2 of overcurrent protection by Composite Voltage Element.
20 NO.20—[Opt_VTS_Ctrl_OC_Gen]
Protection performance during VT circuit failure.
―1‖: when VT circuit failure at one side is detected, composite voltage element will be disabled if
corresponding logic setting is set as ―1‖.
―0‖: when VT circuit failure at one side is detected, the voltage-controlled overcurrent element will
become a pure overcurrent relay without composite voltage element controlling.
21 NO.21—[Opt_ExcMode_Gen]
That the setting is set as ―1‖ indicates the excitation mode of generator is self shunt excitation
mode. In that case, the protection will remember the current value at the initiation of fault, and
operates based on it, no matter whether the current will decrease due to the descending excitation
voltage result from terminal voltage‘s getting down when external fault occurs. Once this setting is
set as ―1‖, the backup overcurrent protection of generator is always controlled by composite
voltage element.
22 NO.22—[En_BO_OC_Gen]
Enable blocking function of overcurrent element by outputting a set of contact.
Note:
In the above Table，current used in backup protection of generator comes from the backup current
input channel.
Settings of generator phase-to-phase backup protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN INTTURN PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.5 Settings of earth fault protection of stator windings
Table 7.3-5 List of earth fault protection settings of stator

1 V_SensROV_Sta 0.10 – 50.00 V 0.01 V 2.0
2 V_InsensROV_Sta 0.10 – 50.00 V 0.01 V 10
3 t_ROV_Sta 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 2
4 k_V3rdHRatio_PreSync_Sta 0.50 – 10.00 0.01 1
5 k_V3rdHRatio_PostSync_Sta 0.50 – 10.00 0.01 1
6 k_V3rdHDiff_Sta 0.10 – 2.00 0.01 1
7 t_V3rdH_Sta 0.00 – 10.00S 0.01 S 3

Chapter7 Settings
8 TrpLog_EF_Sta 0000 – FFFF 1 1FFF

9 En_Alm_ROV_Sta 0，1 1
10 En_Trp_ROV_Sta 0，1 1
11 En_Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta 0，1 1
12 En_Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta 0，1 1
13 En_Trp_V3rdHRatio_Sta 0，1 1
14 En_Trp_InsensRov_Sta 0，1 1
1 No.1-- [V_SensROV_Sta]
Setting of fundamental zero sequence overvoltage protection.
U op U unb. max
Setting of this protection shall be higher than maximum unbalance voltage of single
phase VT at neutral point during normal operation.
U op  K relU unb. max

K rel U unb. max

Where is reliability factor, 1.2 – 1.3 generally; is the maximum measured
fundamental unbalanced zero sequence voltage derived from single VT at the neutral point of
generator.
To assure its security, user should check the transferred zero sequence voltage through coupling
capacitance between HV side and LV side of transformer when external earth fault occurs on the
HV side of the transformer. Meanwhile, settings, including time delay and operation setting, should
be considered to cooperate with that of earth fault protection of the system.
Note:
The zero sequence voltage used in this protection comes from VT at the neutral point of generator.
2 NO.2—[V_InsensROV_Sta]
Setting of high-setting fundamental zero sequence overvoltage protection.
Only zero sequence voltage at neutral point is taken for the high setting zone of fundamental zero
sequence voltage protection. Its setting is usually 20 V – 25 V.
Zero sequence voltage transferred by coupling capacitance per phase between HV and LV side
windings of step-up transformer shall be checked when external fault occurs at HV side of the
transformer. Coordinating both on setting and delay between this protection and system earth fault
protection could be achieved then.
3 NO.3—[t_ROV_Sta]
Delay of fundamental zero sequence overvoltage protection.

Chapter7 Settings
4 NO.4—[k_V3rdHRatio_PreSync_Sta]
Ratio setting of 3rd harmonics before incorporation of generator in power network.
 
Let third harmonic voltage at the end and neutral point of generator be U t and U n , ratio setting of
third harmonic voltage percentage earth fault protection shall be
 
Ut Un  
3  nTVN
and   K rel during pre-configuration,
nTV 0
Where:
K rel
is reliability factor, 1.3 – 1.5 in general;
nTV 0
is ratio of open-delta zero sequence voltage at the terminal of generator;
n TVN
is ratio of zero sequence VT on neutral point.
U 3T / U 3N
During incorporation of generator to power system, the ratio changes considerably
owing to variation of equivalent capacitive reactance at generator terminal. So two different
settings are designed for protection before and after connection of generator with system, and
these two settings can be switched over with alternation of contacts‘ position of the terminal
breaker.
The setting shall be (1.3 – 1.5)× 1 before incorporation and (1.3 – 1.5)× 2 after that.
Where  1 and  2 are the maximum real-measured third harmonic voltage ratio before and
after incorporation respectively.
5 NO.5—[k_V3rdHRatio_PostSync_Sta]
Ratio setting of 3rd harmonics after incorporation in power network.
6 NO.6—[k_V3rdH_Diff_Sta]
Restraint coefficient of percentage third harmonic voltage earth fault protection.
   
U t  k p U n  k zd U n

Chapter7 Settings
Where:

kp
is vectorial automatic tracing regulation factor;
k zd
is restraint factor [3rdHarm Diff. Ratio], 0.3 is recommended.
U t is 3rd harmonics derived from the terminal of generator.
U n is 3rd harmonics derived from the neutral point of generator.
7 NO.7—[t_V3rdH_Sta]
Delay of percentage third harmonic voltage earth fault protection. It shall be longer than that of
backup protection against external fault .
8 NO.8—[TrpLog_EF_Sta]
Tripping output logic setting of stator earth fault protection.
9 NO.9—[En_Alm_ROV_Sta]
Enable alarm function of zero sequence overvoltage.
10 NO.10—[En_Trp_ROV_Sta]
Enable zero sequence overvoltage protection.
11 NO.11—[En_Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta]
Enable alarm function of third harmonic voltage ratio element .
12 NO.12—[En_Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta]
Enable alarm function of third harmonics differential voltage.
13 NO.13—[En_Trp_V3rdHRatio_Sta]
Enable tripping function of third harmonic voltage ratio element.
14 NO.14—[En_Trp_InsensRov_Sta]
Enable tripping function of high-setting zero sequence overvoltage protection
Settings of stator earth fault protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> STA EF PROT --> [setting symbol].

Chapter7 Settings
7.3.6 Settings of earth fault protection of rotor
Table 7.3-6 List of earth fault protection settings of rotor

1 R_Sens1PEF_RotWdg 0.10 –100.00 kΩ 0.01 kΩ 20
2 R_1PEF_RotWdg 0.10 –100.00 kΩ 0.01 kΩ 20
3 t_1PEF_RotWdg 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
4 V2ndH_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg 0.10 – 10.00 V 0.01 V 2
5 t_2PEF_RotWdg 0.00 - 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
6 TrpLog_EF_RotWdg 0000 – FFFF 1 0FFF
7 En_Alm_Sens_1PEF_RotWdg 0，1 1
8 En_Alm_1PEF_RotWdg 0，1 1
9 En_Trp_1PEF_RotWdg 0，1 1
10 En_2PEF_RotWdg 0，1 1
11 En_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg 0，1 1
7.3.6.2 Explanation of setting
1 NO.1—[R_Sens1PEF_RotWdg]
Impedance setting of sensitive stage of one-point earth fault protection of rotor.
General specification of generator specifies that insulation resistance of its excitation winding shall
be higher than 1 MΩ for air cooled and hydrogen-cooled turbine generator during cooling state,
and 2 kΩ for water cooled excitation winding. General specification of hydro-generator specifies
that insulation resistance of its excitation winding shall be higher than 0.5 kΩ in any case.
Sensitive stage of this protection is used for alarm. Its setting could be 20 kΩ – 80 kΩ generally.
2 NO.2—[R_1PEF_RotWdg]
Impedance setting of one-point earth fault protection of rotor.
Setting of one point earth fault protection can be 20 kΩ for air cooled and hydrogen-cooled turbine
generator and 2.5 kΩ for water cooled excitation winding. This protection can be used for alarm or
generator shutting with delay.
Actual measured insulation resistance is used for this protection.
3 NO.3—[t_1PEF_RotWdg]
Delay of one-point earth fault protection of rotor.
4 NO.4--[V2ndH_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg]
Second harmonics voltage setting of two-point earth fault protection of rotor.

Chapter7 Settings
5 NO.5—[t_2PEF_RotWdg]
Delay of two-point earth fault protection of rotor.
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_EF_RotWdg]
Tripping output logic setting of earth fault protection of rotor.
7 NO.7—[En_Alm_Sens_1PEF_RotWdg]
Enable alarm function of sensitive stage of one-point earth fault protection of rotor.
8 NO.8—[En_Alm_1PEF_RotWdg]
Enable alarm function of one-point earth fault protection of rotor.
9 NO.9—[En_Trp_1PEF_RotWdg]
Enable tripping function of one-point earth fault protection of rotor.
10 NO.10—[En_2PEF_RotWdg]
Enable two-point earth fault protection of rotor.
11 NO.11—[En_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg]
Enable second harmonics used in two-point earth fault protection of rotor.
Settings of rotor earth fault protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> ROTWDG EF PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.7 Settings of thermal overload protection of stator
Table 7.3-7 List of thermal overload protection settings of stator

1 I_OvLd_Sta 0.10 – 50.00 A 0.01 A 10
2 t_OvLd_Sta 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
3 TrpLog_OvLd_Sta 0000 – FFFF 1 000F
4 I_Alm_OvLd_Sta 0.10 – 50.00 A 0.01 A 7
5 t_Alm_OvLd_Sta 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 2
6 I_InvOvLd_Sta 0.10 – 100.00 A 0.01 A 6
7 tmin_InvOvLd_Sta 0.10 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
8 A_Therm_Sta 1.00 –100.00 0.01 40
9 K_Disspt_Sta 0.00 – 10.00 0.01 1
10 TrpLog_InvOvLd_Sta 0000 – FFFF 1 0FFF

Chapter7 Settings
1 NO.1—[I_OvLd_Sta]
Setting of definite time overcurrent protection.
Setting of this protection is determined by the requirement of reliable release during permissive
continuous load current of generator.
I gn
I OP  K rel
Kr （Equation 7.3-18）
Where:
K rel
is reliability factor, 1.05 generally;
I gn
Delay of this protection shall be longer than maximum delay of backup protection. Alarm will be
issued or load will be reduced when it operates.
2 NO.2—[t_OvLd_Sta]
Delay of definite time overcurrent protection.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_OvLd_Sta]
Tripping output logic setting of definite time overcurrent protection.
4 NO.4-- [I_Alm_OvLd_Sta]
Setting of definite time overcurrent alarm.
5 NO.5—[t_Alm_OvLd_Sta]
Delay of alarm issued by definite time overcurrent element.
6 NO.6—[I_InvOvLd_Sta]
Pickup current of inverse time overcurrent protection.
Characteristic of this protection is indefinite time relationship between multiple of load current and
corresponding permissive duration which is determined by permissive overload capability of stator
provided by the factory.
K tc
t
I *2  K sr2 （Equation 7.3-19）

Chapter7 Settings
Where:
K tc
is heat capacity factor of stator winding;
I * is per unit value of load current referred to rated current of stator;
K sr
is heat dissipation factor, 1.0 – 1.05 generally.
Minimum delay for upper limit of this protection shall coordinate with the unrestraint protection.
Current setting of lower limit of this protection will coordinate with definite time overload protection
mentioned above, namely
I gn
I OP. min  K c 0 K rel
KC 0
Where: is coordination factor, 1.05 in general.
7 NO.7—[tmin_InvOvLd_Sta]
Delay of upper limit of inverse time overcurrent protection.
8 NO.8—[A_Therm_Sta]
Thermal capacity parameter of stator winding.
9 NO.9—[K_Disspt_Sta]
Heat dissipation factor for inverse time overcurrent.
10 NO.10—[TrpLog_InvOvLd_Sta]
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time overcurrent protection.
Settings of stator overload protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> STA OVLD PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.8 Settings of negative sequence overload protection
Table 7.3-8 List of negative sequence overload protection

1 I_NegOC1_Gen 0.10 – 20.00 A 0.01 A 10
2 t_NegOC1_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1

Chapter7 Settings
3 TrpLog_NegOC1_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 000F

4 I_NegOC2_Gen 0.10 – 20.00 A 0.01 A 10
5 t_NegOC2_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
6 TrpLog_NegOC2_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 000F
7 I_Alm_NegOC_Gen 0.05 – 20.00 A 0.01 A 1.0
8 t_Alm_NegOC_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 2
9 I_InvNegOC_Gen 0.05 – 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.5
10 I_Neg_Perm_Gen 0.05 – 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.4
11 tmin_InvNegOC_Gen 0.10 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
12 A_Therm_RotBody 0.00 – 100.00 0.01 40
13 TrpLog_InvNegOC_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
1 NO.1—[I_NegOC1_Gen]
Setting of stage 1 of definite time negative sequence overcurrent protection.
Setting of this protection is determined by the threshold under which this protection can release
reliably, that threshold value is continuously permissive negative sequence current I 2 . So,
I 2  I gn
I OP  K rel
Where:
I OP is the setting [I_OvLd_Sta].
K rel
is reliability factor, 1.05;
I 2 is per unit value of continuously permissive negative sequence current,
I gn
2 NO.2—[t_NegOC1_Gen]
Delay of stage 1 of definite time negative sequence overcurrent protection.
Delay of this protection shall be longer than maximum delay of backup protection. Alarm will be
issued when it operates.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_NegOC1_Gen]

Chapter7 Settings
Tripping output logic setting of stage 1 of definite time negative sequence overcurrent protection.
4 NO.4—[I_NegOC2_Gen]
Setting of stage 2 of definite time negative sequence overcurrent protection. The setting method
is as same as that of stage 1.
5 NO.5—[t_NegOC2_Gen]
Delay of stage 2 of definite time negative sequence overcurrent protection.
Delay of this protection shall be longer than maximum delay of backup protection. This stage can
be used to trip breakers.
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_NegOC2_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of stage 2 of definite time negative sequence overcurrent protection.
7 NO.7—[I_Alm_NegOC_Gen]
Setting of alarm issued by negative sequence overcurrent element.
8 NO.8—[t_Alm_NegOC_Gen]
Delay of alarm issued by negative sequence overcurrent element.
9 NO.9—[I_InvNegOC_Gen]
Pickup current of inverse time negative sequence overcurrent protection.
Characteristic of this protection is determined by permissive negative sequence overload

capability of rotor surface provided by the manufacturer.
A
t
I 22*  I 22 （Equation 7.3-22）
Where:
A is permissive negative sequence current factor of rotor surface;
I 2* is per unit value of negative sequence current of generator;
I 2 is per unit value of permissive continues negative sequence current.
Minimum delay for upper limit of this protection shall coordinate with unrestraint protection.
10 NO.10—[I_Neg_Perm_Gen]
Permitted continuous currents of inverse time negative sequence overcurrent protection for lasting
operation.
Current setting of lower limit of this protection shall be the operating current corresponding to
delay 1000 s, namely

Chapter7 Settings
A
I OP. min   I 22
1000 （Equation 7.3-23）
This protection is used for Islanding or program tripping.
11 NO.11—[tmin_InvNegOC_Gen]
Delay of upper limit of inverse negative sequence overcurrent protection. Minimum delay for upper
limit of this protection shall coordinate with unrestraint protection.
12 NO.12—[A_Therm_RotBody]
Heat dissipation factor for inverse time negative sequence overcurrent.
13 NO.13—[TrpLog_InvNegOC_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time overcurrent protection.
Settings of stator negative sequence overcurrent protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN NEGOC PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.9 Settings of Loss-of-Excitation protection

1 X1_LossExc_Gen 0.00 -200.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 5
2 X2_LossExc_Gen 0.00 -200.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 20
3 Q_RevQ_LossExc_Gen 0.00 – 50.00 % 0.01 % 10
4 V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen 0.1 – 500.00 V 0.01 V 30
5 V_RotNoLoad_LossExc_Gen 0.1 – 500.00 V 0.01 V 50
6 k_RotUV_LossExc_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 (pu) 0.01 (pu) 2
7 V_UV_LossExc_Gen 0.10 – 100.00 V 0.01 V 85
8 P_OvPwr_LossExc_Gen 0.10 – 100.00 % 0.01 % 50.0
9 t_LossExc1_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 0.5
10 t_LossExc2_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1.0
11 t_LossExc3_Gen 0.00 – 3000.00 S 0.01 S 3.0
12 TrpLog_LossExc1_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
15 En_Z_LossExc1_Gen 0，1 1
16 En_RotUV_LossExc1_Gen 0，1 1
17 En_P_LossExc1_Gen 0，1 1
18 En_UV_LossExc2_Gen 0，1 1

Chapter7 Settings
23 En_Alm_LossExc1_Gen 0，1 1
24 Opt_Z_LossExc_Gen 0，1 1
25 En_RevQ_LossExc_Gen 0，1 1
26 Opt_UV_LossExc_Gen 0，1 0
1 NO.1—[X1_LossExc_Gen]
Impedance setting1 of loss-of-excitation protection. In the following figure,
jx
Xc
R
Xa
Xb
Figure 7.3-1 Impedance circle of loss of excitation protection
Xa
For asynchronous impedance cycle, this setting represents for , and the next setting (NO.2) is
Xb
. Here
X d' U gn  na
2
Xa   
2 S gn  nv
X d'
2
U gn  na
X b  ( X d  )
2 S gn  nv
Where:
'
X d and X d are unsaturated per unit value of transient reactance and synchronous reactance of
generator,
U gn S gn
and are rated voltage and rated apparent power of generator;

Chapter7 Settings
na nv
and are CT ratio and VT ratio.
XC
For steady state stability limit circle, this setting represents for , and the next setting (NO.2) is
Xb
, here
2
U gn  na
Xc  Xs 
S gn  nv
X' U gn  na 2
X b  ( X d  d ) 
2 S gn  nv
Where:
Xs
is equivalent reactance on system side (including step-up transformer) connected with the
generator (per unit value, reference capacity is apparent power of the generator).
Asynchronous impedance circle and steady state stability limit circle can be selected by logic
setting [Impedance Circle Option] (No. 24).
For practical projects, impedance between asynchronous impedance circle and steady state
stability limit circle can be selected for optimal combination of reliability and speed.
2 NO.2—[X2_LossExc_Gen]
Impedance setting2 of loss-of-excitation protection
3 NO.3—[Q_RevQ_LossExc_Gen]
Reverse power setting of reactive power
Reverse reactive power criterion:
Q jx
Q zd  K rel 
Pgn
Where:
K rel
is reliability factor, 1 - 1.3;
Q jx
is permissive incoming reactive power to the generator;
Pgn
is rated active power of the generator.

Chapter7 Settings
Reverse reactive power criterion can be selected by logic setting [Enable ReactPowRev Criterion]
(NO. 25).
4 NO.4—[V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen]
Low voltage setting of rotor. There are two low voltages setting of rotor, they are
a) Excitation undervoltage criterion
U fd .op  K rel  U fd 0
Where:
U fd .op
is this setting.
K rel
U fd 0
is rated excitation voltage of the generator without load, i.e. NO.5 setting.
b) Variable excitation voltage criterion
U fd 0
For a generator connecting with power system, there is a necessary excitation voltage for
keeping steady state stability.
Variable excitation voltage criterion is
P  Pt
U fd.op  K xs  U fd 0 
Sn （Equation 7.3-30）
K xs  K rel  ( X d  X S ) （Equation 7.3-31）
Where:
K xs
is rotor voltage criterion coefficient, i.e. NO. 6 setting.
K rel
Xd Xs
and are per unit value of synchronous reactance of generator and equivalent reactance of
system connecting with the generator (referred to rated capacity of the generator);
P is current active power of the generator;

Pt is the salient pole power of generator, i.e. NO. 7 setting.

Chapter7 Settings
U fd 0
is rated excitation voltage of generator without load;
5 NO.5—[V_RotNoLoad_LossExc_Gen]
Rated excitation voltage of the generator without load.
6 NO.6—[k_RotUV_LossExc_Gen]
Restrained coefficient of low voltage criterion of rotor.
7 NO.7—[V_UV_LossExc_Gen]
Low voltage setting for busbar undervoltage criterion.
This criterion is used mainly to prevent voltage collapse due to loss of excitation of generator for a
system without enough spare reactive power. Voltage on bus of system side is adopted for this
criterion.
Under voltage criterion for three phase simultaneously:
U op.3 ph  K rel  U h. min

Where:
K rel
U h. min
is minimum normal operation voltage of HV side of the system.
This criterion can also be configured as 0.85 – 0.90 times of terminal voltage of generator.
8 NO.8—[P_OvPwr_LossExc_Gen]
Power setting for reducing power output. This criterion is configured as 40% - 50% of rated
capacity of the generator.
9 NO.9—[t_LossExc1_Gen]
Delay of loss-of-excitation protection stage 1
12 NO.12—[TrpLog_LossExc1_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of loss-of-excitation protection stage1

Chapter7 Settings
15 NO.15—[En_Z_LossExc1_Gen]
Enable impedance criterion in loss-of-excitation protection stage1
16 NO.16—[En_RotUV_LossExc1_Gen]
Enable the criterion of rotor voltage in loss-of-excitation protection stage1
17 NO.17—[En_P_LossExc1_Gen]
Enable power-reducing criterion in loss-of-excitation protection stage1
18 NO.18—[En_UV_LossExc2_Gen]
Enable the low voltage criterion of busbar or generator terminal in loss-of-excitation protection
stage2
Enable impedance criterion in loss-of-excitation protection stage2
Enable impedance criterion in loss-of-excitation protection stage3.
23 NO.23—[En_Alm_LossExc1_Gen]
Enable alarm function of loss-of-excitation protection stage1
24 NO.24—[Opt_Z_LossExc_Gen]
Impedance circle option.
―0‖, choose steady state stability circle.
―1‖, choose asynchronous impedance cycle.
25 NO.25—[En_RevQ_LossExc_Gen]
Enable reverse power criterion
26 NO.26—[Opt_UV_LossExc_Gen]
Enable low voltage criterion.

Chapter7 Settings
―0‖, choose bus voltage.
―1‖, choose generator terminal voltage.
Note:
Following criterion are recommended for various stages of this protection:
Criterion Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3

Stator side impedance √ √ √
Under voltage criterion of system √
Rotor voltage √ √ √
Reducing power output √
Delay ( s ) 0.0 – 10.0 0.0 – 10.0 Long delay
Settings of generator loss-of-excitation protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN LOSSEXC PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.10 Settings of out-of-step protection
Table 7.3-9 List of out-of-step protection

1 Za_OOS_Gen 0.00 –200.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 10
2 Zb_OOS_Gen 0.00 –200.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 5
3 Zc_OOS_Gen 0.00 –200.00 Ω 0.01 Ω 5
4 φ_Reach_OOS_Gen 0 – 90.00 ° 0.1 ° 85
5 φ_Inner_OOS_Gen 0 –150.00 ° 0.1 ° 120
6 n_Slip_Ext_OOS_Gen 0-10000 1 5
7 n_Slip_Int_OOS_Gen 0-10000 1 2
8 Ibrk_GCB 0.10 – 100.00 A 0.01 A 10
9 TrpLog_OOS_Gen 0000 - FFFF 0.01 1FFF
10 En_Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen 0，1 1
11 En_Trp_Ext_OOS_Gen 0，1 1
12 En_Alm_Int_OOS_Gen 0，1 1
13 En_Trp_Int_OOS_Gen 0，1 1
Explanation of the settings
Out-of-step protection operates only when out-of-step occurs in the power system. Then, based
on the situation at that time, the dispatching center will adopt islanding, generator shutting,

Chapter7 Settings
restraint or any other necessary measures. Only if the center of oscillation is situated within the
generator or near the generator, or the oscillation lasts too long, and the phase difference of
electro-motive force between the two sides of the breaker is less than 90°, this protection will then
trip.
Characteristic of this protection comprises three parts: lens part ②, boundary part ① and
reactance line part ③. See the following figure.
jx
Za
U
D
Zc 3
OL
IL
1  IR
 OR
0
R
1
Zb
2
L R
Figure 7.3-2 Impedance of out-of-step protection
1 NO.1—[Za_OOS_Gen]
Impedance setting A of out-of-step protection.
Refer to Figure 7.3-2, this setting can be set by means of the following formula.
2
U gn  na
Za  ( X S  X C ) 
S gn  nv （Equation 7.3-33）
Where:
X C is per unit value of equivalent reactance of transformer connecting to the generator;
X S is equivalent reactance of power system network;
U gn S gn
and are rated voltage and rated apparent power of generator;
na nv
and are CT ratio and VT ratio.
2 NO.2—[Zb_OOS_Gen]
Impedance setting B of out-of-step protection.
Refer to figure 7.3.2, this setting can be set by means of the following formula.

Chapter7 Settings
2
U gn  na
Zb   X  '
S gn  nv
d
Where:
X d' is transient reactance of generator;
3 NO.3—[Zc_OOS_Gen]
Impedance setting C of out-of-step protection. Reactance line is the dividing line of oscillation
center. Refer to Figure 7.3-2, this setting can be set by means of the following formula. In practice,
0.9 times of transformer impedance is recommended.
2
U gn  na
Z c  0.9  X c 
S gn  nv
4 NO.4—[φ_Reach_OOS_Gen]
Reach angle of system impedance.
 = 80°- 85°according to the real angle of system.
5 NO.5—[φ_Inner_OOS_Gen]
Internal angle of lens characteristic  . The following formula is for reference,
2Z r
  180   2 arctan
Z a  Zb
1
Zr  RL. min
1.3 （Equation 7.3-36）
RL. min
Where is minimum load impedance of generator.
6 NO.6—[n_Slip_Ext_OOS_Gen]
Pole sliding number setting for external fault of generator. When the oscillation center is situated
outside the protected section, then the times of pole sliding shall be set as 2 – 15 for alarm and
more than 15 for tripping.
7 NO.7—[n_Slip_Int_OOS_Gen]
Pole sliding number setting for internal fault of generator. When the oscillation center is situated
within the protected section, the time of pole sliding shall be set as 1-2 in general.
8 NO.8—[Ibrk_GCB]

Chapter7 Settings
Tolerating current of breaker in tripping. This is an auxiliary criterion and is determined by

interruption capacity of the circuit breaker.
9 NO.9—[TrpLog_OOS_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of out-of-step protection.
10 NO.10—[En_Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen]
Enable alarm in out-of-step case outside the generator.
11 NO.11—[En_Trp_Ext_OOS_Gen]
Enable tripping in out-of-step case outside the generator.
12 NO.12—[En_Alm_Int_OOS_Gen]
Enable alarm in out-of-step case inside the generator.
13 NO.13—[En_Trp_Int_OOS_Gen]
Enable tripping in out-of-step case inside the generator.
Settings of generator out-of-step protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN OOS PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.11 Settings of voltage protection
Table 7.3-10 List of voltage protection settings

1 V_OV1_Gen 0.10 –200.00 V 0.01V 150
2 t_OV1_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01S 0.3
3 TrpLog_OV1_Gen 0000 – FFFF 1 1FFF
4 V_OV2_Gen 0.10 –200.00 V 0.01V 130
5 t_OV2_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01S 0.5
6 TrpLog_OV2_Gen 0000 – FFFF 1 1FFF
7 V_UV_Gen 0.10 –100.00 V 0.01V 80
8 t_UV_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01S 1.5
9 TrpLog_UV_Gen 0000 – FFFF 1 1FFF
1 NO.1—[V_OV1_Gen]
Voltage setting of overvoltage protection stage 1.
Setting of overvoltage protection of stator shall base on permissive overvoltage capability provided

Chapter7 Settings
by the factory or insulation condition of the stator.
For turbo-generator with capacity more than 200 MW,
U op  1.3U gn
Where:
U gn
is the secondary rated phase-to-phase voltage.
This is used for islanding and excitation shutting with delay 0.5 s.
For hydro-generator,
U op  1.5U gn
For hydro-generator with SCR excitation,
U op  1.3U gn
2 NO.2—[t_OV1_Gen]
Delay of overvoltage protection stage1.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_OV1_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of overvoltage protection stage1.
4 NO.4—[V_OV2_Gen]
Voltage setting of overvoltage protection stage 2.
5 NO.5—[t_OV2_Gen]
Delay of overvoltage protection stage2.
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_OV2_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of overvoltage protection stage2.
7 NO.7—[V_UV_Gen]
Voltage setting of under voltage protection
8 NO.8—[t_UV_Gen]
Delay of under voltage protection
9 NO.9—[TrpLog_UV_Gen]

Chapter7 Settings
Tripping output logic setting of under voltage protection.
Settings of generator voltage protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN VOLT PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.12 Settings of overexcitation protection of generator
Table 7.3-11 List of over excitation protection settings of generator

1 k_OvExc1_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.4
2 t_OvExc1_Gen 0– 25.0 S 0.1 S 1
3 TrpLog_OvExc1_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 000F
4 k_OvExc2_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.2
5 t_OvExc2_Gen 0.1 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 20
6 TrpLog_OvExc2_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 0F01
7 k_Alm_OvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.1
8 t_Alm_OvExc_Gen 0 – 25.00 S 0.1 S 10
9 k0_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.5
10 t0_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 1
11 k1_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.45
12 t1_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 2
13 k2_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.4
14 t2_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 5
15 k3_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.3
16 t3_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 15
17 k4_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.25
18 t4_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 30
19 k5_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.2
20 t5_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 100
21 k6_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.15
22 t6_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 300
23 k7_InvOvExc_Gen 1.00 – 2.00 0.01 1.1
24 t7_InvOvExc_Gen 1.0 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 1000
25 TrpLog_InvOvExc_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
1 NO.1—[k_OvExc1_Gen]
Setting of stage 1 of definite time over excitation protection.

Chapter7 Settings
U
B U gn
N    U  / f  1.3 or data provided by the factory
Bn f
f gn
2 NO.2—[t_OvExc1_Gen]
Delay of stage 1 of definite time over excitation protection.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_OvExc1_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of stage 1 of definite time over excitation protection. The function of
this protection is used for islanding, excitation shutting or programming, excitation reducing etc.
4 NO.4—[k_OvExc2_Gen]
Setting of stage 2 of definite time over excitation protection.
5 NO.5—[t_OvExc2_Gen]
Delay of stage 2 of definite time over excitation protection .
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_OvExc2_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of stage 2 of definite time over excitation protection.
7 NO.7—[k_Alm_OvExc_Gen]
Setting of over excitation alarm. Setting of alarm shall be lower than that of over excitation
protection. 1.1 is recommended.
8 NO.8—[t_Alm_OvExc_Gen]
Delay of over excitation alarm.
9 NO.9—[k0_InvOvExc_Gen]
Upper limit of inverse time over excitation protection—n0
10 NO.10—[t0_InvOvExc_Gen]
Delay of upper limit of inverse time over excitation protection.
Inverse time over excitation factor1—n1. Setting range of various inverse times over excitation
coefficient is 1.0 – 2.0. However setting of upper limit (NO.9) of over excitation factor n0 shall be
higher than that of over excitation factor1 n1, which of factor1 n1 shall be higher than that of
factor2 n2, etc. Finally, setting of over excitation factor6 n6 (NO.21) shall be higher than that of the
lower limit.
Delay at the point n1 on inverse time over excitation curve—t1
The range of delay of various inverse time over excitation protection stage is 1s to 3000s, ie.,0--50

Chapter7 Settings
min. Delay of upper limit (NO.10) of over excitation factor shall be shorter than that of over
excitation factor1 that the factor1 shall be shorter than that of factor2, etc.. Finally, delay of over
excitation factor6 (NO.22) shall be shorter than that of lower limit (NO.24).
Inverse time over excitation factor n2.
Delay at the point n2 on inverse time over excitation curve—t2
Inverse time over excitation Ratio n3.
Delay at the point n3 on inverse time over excitation curve—t3.
25 NO.25—[TrpLog_InvOvExc_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time over excitation protection.

Chapter7 Settings
Settings of generator overexcitation protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN OVEXC PROT --> [setting symbol]
7.3.13 Settings of power protection of generator
Table 7.3-12 List of power protection settings of generator

1 P_RevP_Gen 0.50 – 10.00 % 0.01% 2
2 t_Alm_RevP_Gen 0.10 – 25.00 S 0.1 S 10
3 t_Trp_RevP_Gen 0.10 – 3000.0 S 0.1 S 10
4 TrpLog_RevP_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
5 P_SeqTrpRevP_Gen 0.50 – 10.00 % 0.01 % 2
6 t_SeqTrpRevP_Gen 0.01 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
7 TrpLog_SeqTrpRevP_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
1 NO.1—[P_RevP_Gen]
Power setting of reverse power protection.
Pop  K rel ( P1  P2 )
Where:
K rel
is reliability coefficient, 0.5 – 0.8 generally;
P1 is minimum loss of turbine during reverse power operation, 2% - 4% of rated power generally;
P2 is minimum loss of generator during reverse power operation, P2  (1   ) Pgn generally, 

is efficiency factor of generator, 98.6% - 98.7%;
Pgn
is rated power of generator.
Pop
is set as 1% - 2% of rated active power generally, and 1% is recommended.
2 NO.2—[t_Alm_RevP_Gen]
Delay of reverse power alarm. For reverse power protection without steam valve contact blocking,
delay 15 s for alarm.

Chapter7 Settings
3 NO.3—[t_Trp_RevP_Gen]
Delay of reverse power protection. For reverse power protection without steam valve contact
blocking, according to permissive operation time of reverse power, delay 1 min – 3 min is set for
islanding in general.
For program reverse power protection with steam valve contact blocking, delay 0.5 s – 1.00 s is
set for islanding.
4 NO.4—[TrpLog_RevP_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of reverse power protection.
5 NO.5—[P_SeqTrpRevP_Gen]
Power setting of sequent-tripping reverse power protection.
6 NO.6—[t_SeqTrpRevP_Gen]
Delay of sequent-tripping reverse power protection.
For sequent-tripping reverse power protection with steam valve contact blocking, delay 0.5 s –
1.00 s for islanding.
7 NO.7—[TrpLog_SeqTrpRevP_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of sequent-tripping reverse power protection.
Settings of generator power protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN PWR PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.14 Settings of underfrequency and overfrequency protection
Table 7.3-13 List of frequency protection settings

1 f_UF1_Gen 45.00 – 51.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 48.5
2 t_Accu_UF1_Gen 0.00 –300.00 min 0.01min 10
3 f_UF2_Gen 45.00 – 51.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 48
4 t_UF2_Gen 0.00 –300.00 min 0.01min 10
5 f_UF3_Gen 45.00 – 51.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 47.5
6 t_UF3_Gen 0.00 –100.00 S 0.01 S 10
7 TrpLog_UF_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
8 f_OF1_Gen 50.00 – 60.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 51.5
9 t_OF1_Gen 0.00 –100.00 min 0.01min 10
10 f_OF2_Gen 50.00 – 60.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 55
11 t_OF2_Gen 0.00 –100.00 S 0.01 S 10

Chapter7 Settings
12 TrpLog_OF_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF

13 En_Alm_UF1_Gen 0，1 1
14 En_Trp_UF1_Gen 0，1 1
19 En_Alm_OF1_Gen 0，1 1
20 En_Trp_OF1_Gen 0，1 1
21 En_Alm_OF2_Gen 0，1 1
22 En_Trp_OF2_Gen 0，1 1
1 NO.1—[f_UF1_Gen]
Frequency setting of under frequency protection stage1.
Permissive range of frequency during operation for large turbo-generator with capacity more than
300 MW is 48.5 Hz – 50.5 Hz.
Recommended permissive operation time of abnormal frequency for large generator is as follows.
Table 7.3-14 Operating time under differential frequency
Freq. Permissive operating time Freq. Permissive operating time
Hz accumulated, min once, s Hz accumulated, min once, s
51.5 30 30 48.0 300 300
51.0 180 180 47.5 60 60
48.5-50.5 continuous 47.0 10 10
Three stages of under frequency protection are provided in which the function of accumulated
operating time is equipped for stage 1(NO.2 setting).
Two zones of over frequency protection are provided, in which no function of accumulated
operating time is equipped.
Each zone can be used for alarm or tripping by configuration of logic setting.
2 NO.2—[t_UF1_Gen]
The sum of delay setting of under frequency protection stage1.

Chapter7 Settings
4 NO.4-- [t_UF2_Gen]
Delay of under frequency protection stage2.
6 NO.6—[t_UF3_Gen]
Delay of under frequency protection stage3.
7 NO.7—[TrpLog_UF_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of under frequency protection.
8 NO.8—[f_OF1_Gen]
Frequency setting of over frequency protection stage1.
9 NO.9—[t_OF1_Gen]
Delay of over frequency protection stage1.
10 NO.10—[f_OF2_Gen]
Frequency setting of over frequency protection stage2.
11 NO.11—[t_OF2_Gen]
Delay of over frequency protection stage2.
12 NO.12—[TrpLog_OF_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of over frequency protection.
13 NO.13—[En_Alm_UF1_Gen]
Enable alarm function of under frequency protection stage1.
14 NO.14—[En_Trp_UF1_Gen]
Enable tripping function of under frequency protection stage1.

Chapter7 Settings
19 NO.19—[En_Alm_OF1_Gen]
Enable alarm function of over frequency protection stage1.
20 NO.20—[En_Trp_OF1_Gen]
Enable tripping function of over frequency protection stage1.
21 NO.21—[En_Alm_OF2_Gen]
Enable alarm function of over frequency protection stage2.
22 NO.22—[En_Trp_OF2_Gen]
Enable tripping function of over frequency protection stage2.
Settings of generator frequency protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN FREQ PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.15 Settings of startup and shutdown protection of generator
Table 7.3-15 List of startup and shutdown protection settings of generator

1 f_UF_Ctrl_StShut_Gen 40.0 – 50.0Hz 0.01 Hz 45
2 I_GenDiff_StShut_Gen 0.1 - 14.0 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 1
3 TrpLog_Diff_StShut_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
4 I_UFOC_StShut_Gen 0.10 - 100.00 A 0.01 A 20
5 t_UFOC_StShut_Gen 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 10
6 TrpLog_OC_StShut_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
7 V_StaROV_StShut_Gen 5 – 25.0 V 0.01 V 10
8 t_StaROV_StShut_Gen 0 – 10.0 S 0.01 S 10
9 TrpLog_StaROV_StShut_Gen 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
10 En_GenDiff_StShut_Gen 0，1 1
11 En_UFOC_StShut_Gen 0，1 1
12 En_ROV_StShut_Gen 0，1 1
13 En_UF_Ctrl_StShut_Gen 0，1 1
1 NO.1—[f_UF_Ctrl_StShut_Gen]
Frequency setting for blocking startup and shutdown protection of generator.
Startup and shutdown protection is used for earth fault and phase-to-phase fault of stator during
low speed operation of the generator. Its algorithm is insensitive to variation of frequency.

Chapter7 Settings
This protection is auxiliary protection of generator during low frequency operation. Blocking setting
of this protection is 0.8 – 0.9 times of rated frequency.
2 NO.2—[I_GenDiff_StShut_Gen]
Differential current setting for the differential protection of generator in startup and shutdown
condition. Setting of this protection shall be higher than unbalanced differential current in full load
and rated frequency condition,
I op  K rel I unb
Where:
K rel
is reliability factor, 1.30 – 1.50 generally;
I unb
is the unbalance differential current in full load and rated frequency condition.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_Diff_StShut_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of low frequency differential protection of generator in startup and
shutdown condition.
4 NO.4—[I_UFOC_StShut_Gen]
Current setting of low frequency overcurrent protection.
5 NO.5—[t_UFOC_StShut_Gen]
Current setting of low frequency overcurrent protection in startup and shutdown condition.
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_Diff_StShut_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of low frequency overcurrent protection.
7 NO.7—[V_StaROV_StShut_Gen]
Zero sequence voltage setting of stator earth fault protection in startup and shutdown condition.
For earth fault, zero sequence voltage derived from neutral point is adopted as criterion with
setting 10 V in general and delay not shorter than that of fundamental zero sequence voltage earth
fault protection for stator in normal condition.
8 NO.8—[t_StaROV_StShut_Gen]
Delay of stator earth fault protection in startup and shutdown condition.
9 NO.9—[t_StaROV_StShut_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of stator earth fault protection in startup and shutdown condition.
10 NO.10—[En_GenDiff_StShut_Gen]
Enable differential current protective element of generator.

Chapter7 Settings
11 NO.11—[En_UFOC_StShut_Gen]
Enable underfrequency overcurrent protective element of generator.
12 NO.12—[En_ROV_StShut_Gen]
Enable low frequency zero sequence voltage protective element of stator.
13 NO.13—[En_UF_Ctrl_StShut_Gen]
Enable low frequency element as blocking criterion in startup&shutup protection logic of generator.
Settings of generator startup and shutdown protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN STSHUT PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.16 Settings of accidental energization protection of generator
Table 7.3-16 List of accidental energaization protection settings of generator

1 f_UF_AccEnerg_Gen 40 – 50.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 45
2 I_OC_AccEnerg_Gen 0.10 – 50.00 A 0.01 A 3
3 t_AccEnerg_Gen 0.0 – 1.00 S 0.01 A 0.1
4 TrpLog_AccEnerg_Gen 0000 – FFFF 0.01 A 1FFF
5 I_NegOC_Flash_GCB 0.1 – 20.0 A 0.01 A 3
6 t_Flash11_GCB 0.0 – 10.0 S 0.01 A 3
7 TrpLog_Flash11_GCB 0000 – FFFF 0.01 A 1FFF
8 t_Flash12_GCB 0.1 – 10.0 S 0.01 A 3
9 TrpLog_Flash12_GCB 0000 – FFFF 0.01 A 1FFF
10 En_UF_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen 0，1 1
11 En_CB_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen 0，1 1
1 NO.1—[f_UF_AccEnerg_Gen]
Frequency setting for blocking accident energization protection of generator.
Frequency blocking setting shall be 80% - 90% of the rated frequency, i.e., 40 Hz – 45 Hz.
2 NO.2—[I_OC_AccEnerg_Gen]
Current setting of accident energization overcurrent protection.
Current setting shall be 50% of minimum accidental closing current (generator terminal side)
during process of generator starting up but having not been excited. If accidental closing current of

Chapter7 Settings
circuit breaker on auxiliary transformer side shall be taken into account, current setting shall base
on minimum accidental closing current during this condition. The current used for this setting is
derived from the CT at the terminal of generator.
In general, this setting shall be in excess of 1.3 times of the rated current of generator.
3 NO.3—[t_AccEnerg_Gen]
Delay of accident energization overcurrent protection.
4 NO.4—[TrpLog_AccEnerg_Gen]
Tripping output logic setting of accident energization overcurrent protection.
5 NO.5—[I_NegOC_Flash_GCB]
Negative sequence current setting of breaker flashover protection.
This setting shall be higher than the possible unbalanced current during normal operation. It must
be set according to the secondary current of the CT at the terminal of the generator.
6 NO.6—[t_Flash11_GCB]
Delay 1 of breaker flashover protection.
This setting shall be longer than operation time of circuit breaker.
7 NO.7—[TrpLog_Flash11_GCB]
Tripping output logic setting stage 1 of breaker flashover protection.
If impulse current may be higher than capacity of circuit breaker during asynchronous closing, the
protection shall shut off the excitation firstly. If current passing through circuit breaker is lower than
permissive value, the protection can trip the circuit breaker on outlet.
Permissive tripping current of circuit breaker shall be configured as that provided by factory.
8 NO.8—[t_Flash12_GCB]
Delay 2 of breaker flashover protection.
9 NO.9—[TrpLog_Flash12_GCB]
Tripping output logic setting stage 2 of breaker flashover protection.
10 NO.10—[En_UF_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen]
Enable blocking function in under frequency condition.
11 NO.11—[En_CB_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen]
Enable breaker position auxiliary contact blocking function.
If asynchronous unwanted closing is considered, breaker position contact blocking shall be

selected.

Chapter7 Settings
Settings of generator accidental energization protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> GEN ACCENERG PROT --> [setting
symbol].
7.3.17 Settings of differential protection of excitation transformer or exciter
Table 7.3-17 List of differential protection settings of excitation transformer or exciter

1 I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Exc 0.10 –1.50 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 0.3
2 I_InstDiff_Exc 2.0 – 14.0 (Ie) 0.01 (Ie) 6
3 Slope1_PcntDiff_Exc 0 – 0.50 0.01 0.1
4 Slope2_PcntDiff_Exc 0.50 – 0.80 0.01 0.7
5 k_Harm_PcntDiff_Exc 0.10 – 0.35 0.01 0.15
6 TrpLog_Diff_Exc 0000 – FFFF 1 1FFF
7 En_InstDiff_Exc 0，1 1
8 En_PcntDiff_Exc 0，1 1
9 Opt_Inrush_Ident_Exc 0，1 1
10 Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Exc 0，1 1
1 NO.1—[I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Exc]
Setting of pickup value of percentage differential current of excitation transformer or exciter.
In practice, for excitation transformer, the characteristics of CT on two sides may differ significantly
and the unbalanced differential current may be larger than that of the main transformer. So for
pickup setting, 0.5 Ie is recommended.
2 NO.2—[I_InstDiff_Exc]
Setting of unrestrained instantaneous differential protection.
3 NO.3—[Slope1_PcntDiff_Exc]
Restraint coefficient of the first slope of the differential characteristic curve.
4 NO.4—[Slope2_PcntDiff_Exc]
5 NO.5—[k_Harm_PcntDiff_Exc]
Restraint coefficient of second harmonics.

Chapter7 Settings
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_Diff_Exc]
Tripping output logic setting of differential protection of excitation transformer of exciter.
7 NO.7—[En_InstDiff_Exc]
Enable unrestrained instantaneous differential protection of excitation transformer or exciter.
8 NO.8—[En_PcntDiff_Exc]
Enable percentage differential protection of excitation transformer or exciter.
9 NO.9—[Opt_Inrush_Ident_Exc]
Inrush current blocking mode. Select criterion of Inrush current detection.
―0‖, discrimination by harmonics;
―1‖, waveform distortion criterion is used.
10 NO.10—[Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Exc]
Enable differential protection blocked by CT circuit failure.
Setting ―0‖: Differential protection is not blocked by CT circuit failure.
Setting ―1‖: Differential protection is blocked by CT circuit failure
Settings of excitation differential protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> EXC DIFF PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.18 Settings of backup protection of excitation transformer or exciter
Table 7.3-18 List of backup protection settings of excitation transformer or exciter

1 I_OC1_Exc 0.10 – 100.00 A 0.01 A 20
2 t_OC1_Exc 0.00 – 10.00 S 0.01 S 1
3 TrpLog_OC1_Exc 0000 – FFFF 1 0081
4 I_OC2_Exc 0.10 – 100.00 A 0.01 A 20
5 t_OC2_Exc 0.00 – 25.00 S 0.01 S 1.5
6 TrpLog_OC2_Exc 0000 – FFFF 1 0081
1 NO.1—[I_OC1_Exc]
Setting of definite time overcurrent protection stage1.
2 NO.2—[t_OC1_Exc]

Chapter7 Settings
Delay of definite time overcurrent protection stage1.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_OC1_Exc]
Tripping output logic setting of definite time overcurrent protection.
4 NO.4—[I_OC2_Exc]
Setting of definitive time overcurrent protection stage2.
5 NO.5—[t_OC2_Exc]
Delay of definite time overcurrent protection stage2.
6 NO.6—[TrpLog_OC2_Exc]
Tripping output logic setting of definite time overcurrent protection stage2.
Settings of excitation backup protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> GEN PROT SETTINGS -> EXC BAK PROT --> [setting symbol].
Note:
The current used in the overcurrent protection is derived from the CT at the HV side of excitation
transformer or the CT at the neutral point of exciter.
7.3.19 Settings of overload protection of excitation
Table 7.3-19 List of overload protection settings of exciter

1 I_OvLd_RotWdg 0.10 –100.00 A（kA） 0.01A（kA） 10
2 t_OvLd_RotWdg 0.00 – 25.00 S 0.01S 1
3 TrpLog_OvLd_RotWdg 0000 - FFFF 1 000F
4 I_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg 0.10 –100.00 A（kA） 0.01A（kA） 7
5 t_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg 0.00 – 25.00 S 0.01S 2
6 I_InvOvLd_RotWdg 0.10 – 50.00 A（kA） 0.01A（kA） 6
7 tmin_InvOvLd_RotWdg 0.10 – 10.00 S 0.01S 1
8 A_Therm_RotWdg 1.00 – 100.00 0.01 40
9 Ib_InvOvLd_RotWdg 0.10 – 50.00A（kA） 0.01A（kA） 1
10 TrpLog_InvOvLd_RotWdg 0000 - FFFF 1 1FFF
11 Opt_AC_Input_RotWdg 0，1 1
12 Opt_DC_Input_RotWdg 0，1 0
13 Opt_AC_Input_S1_RotWdg 0，1 0

Chapter7 Settings
14 Opt_AC_Input_S2_RotWdg 0，1 0
1 NO.1—[I_OvLd_RotWdg]
Setting of overload protection of rotor winding. If the measured current is inputted by DC type, the
unit of the setting is ‗kA‘. Otherwise, ‗A‘ is the unit of AC type current.
2 NO.2—[t_OvLd_RotWdg]
Delay setting of overload protection of rotor winding.
3 NO.3—[TrpLog_OvLd_RotWdg]
Tripping output logic setting of overload protection of rotor winding.
4 NO.4—[I_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg]
Current setting of overload alarm.
5 NO.5—[t_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg]
Delay of overload alarm.
6 NO.6—[I_InvOvLd_RotWdg]
Pickup current of inverse time overload protection.
7 NO.7—[tmin_InvOvLd_RotWdg]
Delay of upper limit of inverse time overload protection.
8 NO.8—[A_Therm_RotWdg]
Thermal capacity parameter of excitation winding.
9 NO.9—[Ib_InvOvLd_RotWdg]
Reference current setting of inverse time overload.
10 NO.10—[TrpLog_InvOvLd_RotWdg]
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time overload protection.
11 NO.11—[Opt_AC_Input_RotWdg]
Type selection configuration logic setting of current input. ―1‖ is AC current input for overload
protection of rotor winding.
12 NO.12—[Opt_DC_Input_RotWdg]
Type selection configuration logic setting of current input. ―1‖ is DC current input for overload
protection of rotor winding.
13 NO.13—[Opt_AC_Input_S1_RotWdg]
Type selection configuration logic setting of current input. ―1‖ is the AC current input for overload

Chapter7 Settings
protection of rotor winding is derived from HV side of excitation transformer.
14 NO.14—[Opt_AC_Input_S2_RotWdg]
Type selection configuration logic setting of current input. ―1‖ is the AC current input for overload
protection of rotor winding is derived from LV side of excitation transformer.
Settings of excitation overload protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> EXC OVLD PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.20 Settings of mechanical protection
Table 7.3-20 List of mechanical protection settings

1 t_MechRly1 0.00 – 6000.0 S 0.1S 1
2 TrpLog_MechRly1 0000 – FFFF 1 0011
3 t_MechRly2 0.00 – 6000.0 S 0.1S 1
5 t_MechRly3 0.00 – 6000.0 S 0.1S 1
7 t_MechRly4 0.00 – 6000.0 S 0.1S 1
1 NO.1—[t_MechRly1]
Time delay of output contact of external mechanical contact input1 repeater.
2 NO.2—[TrpLog_MechRly1]
Tripping output logic setting of output contact of mechanical contact input1.

Chapter7 Settings
Settings of mechanical protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> PROT SETTINGS -> MECH RLY PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.3.21 Settings of breaker failure protection of generator
Table 7.3-21 List of breaker failure protection settings of generator

1 I_BFP_GCB 0.10 -- 50.00 A 0.01 A 3
2 I_ROC_BFP_GCB 0.10 -- 20.00 A 0.01 A 3
3 I_NegOC_BFP_GCB 0.10 -- 20.00 A 0.01 A 3
4 t_BFP11_GCB 0.0 - 10.0 S 0.01 S 3
5 TrpLog_BFP11_GCB 0000 – FFFF 1 000F
6 t_BFP12_GCB 0.0 - 10.0 S 0.01 S 3
7 TrpLog_BFP12_GCB 0000 – FFFF 1 001F
8 En_ROC_BFP_GCB 0，1 1
9 En_NegOC_BFP_GCB 0，1 1
10 En_ExtTrpCtrlBFP_GCB 0，1 1
11 En_CB_Ctrl_BFP_GCB 0，1 1
1 NO.1—[I_BFP_GCB]
Overcurrent setting of breaker failure protection.
2 NO.2—[I_ROC_BFP_GCB]
Zero sequence overcurrent setting of breaker failure protection
3 NO.3—[I_NegOC_BFP_GCB]
Negative sequence overcurrent setting of breaker failure protection
4 NO.4—[t_BFP11_GCB]
Time delay 1 of breaker failure protection.
5 NO.5—[TrpLog_BFP11_GCB]

Chapter7 Settings
Tripping output logic setting of breaker failure protection stage 1.
6 NO.6—[t_BFP12_GCB]
Time delay 2 of breaker failure protection.
7 NO.7—[TrpLog_BFP12_GCB]
Tripping output logic setting of breaker failure protection stage 2.
8 NO.8—[En_ROC_BFP_GCB]
Logic setting of enabling zero sequence current to block breaker failure protection.
9 NO.9—[En_NegOC_BFP_GCB]
Logic setting of enabling negative sequence current to block breaker failure protection.
10 NO.10—[En_ExtTrpCtrlBFP_GCB]
Logic setting of enabling external tripping signal to be a blocking condition of breaker failure
protection.
11 NO.11—[En_CB_Ctrl_BFP_GCB]
Logic setting of enabling the open position of breaker to be a blocking condition of breaker failure
protection.
Settings of breaker failure protection are accessible in the following path:
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> GEN PROT SETTINGS -> GEN BFP PROT --> [setting symbol].
7.4 Calculated parameters

The settings listed in the following tables calculated by the RCS-985G itself automatically, they
need not to be set by user. The settings are calculated according to the system parameters that
user input, include primary rated currents, secondary rated currents, secondary rated voltages and
correction coefficients used in all kinds of differential protection relays. Listing of the calculated
settings is only for reference of setting check or commission.
7.4.1 Setting list
Table 7.4-1 List of calculated parameters
Primary rated current

NO. Signal Range Note
1 I1b_CT_Gen 0-60000 A
2 I1b_CT_SP1_Gen 0-60000 A
3 I1b_CT_SP2_Gen 0-60000 A
4 I1b_CT_S1_Exc 0-60000 A

Chapter7 Settings
5 I1b_CT_S2_Exc 0-60000 A
Secondary rated current
1 I2b_CT_Gen 0-600.00 A
2 I2b_CT_SP1_Gen 0-600.00 A
3 I2b_CT_SP2_Gen 0-600.00 A
4 I2b_CT_S1_Exc 0-600.00 A
5 I2b_CT_S2_Exc 0-600.00 A
Secondary rated voltage
1 U2b_Term_Gen 0-600.00 A
2 U2b_DeltVT_Term_Gen 0-600.00 A
3 U2b_NP_Gen 0-600.00 A
4 k_RV_Gen 0-60.00
Diff Corr Coef
1 k_Diff_Gen 0-60.000
2 k_SP1_Diff_Gen 0-60.000
3 k_SP2_Diff_Gen 0-60.000
4 k_S1_Diff_Exc 0-60.000
5 k_S2_Diff_Exc 0-60.000
7.4.2 Explanation of the parameters
1 No.1-- [I1b_CT_Gen]
Primary rated current of generator calculated by RCS-985G according to parameters input.
2 No.2-- [I1b_CT_SP1_Gen]
Primary rated current of the first splitting branch at the neutral point of generator calculated by
RCS-985G according to parameters input.
Primary rated current of the second splitting branch at the neutral point of generator calculated by
4 No.4-- [I1b_CT_S1_Exc]
Primary rated current at HV side of excitation transformer or terminal side of exciter calculated by
Primary rated current at LV side of excitation transformer or neutral point side of exciter calculated
by RCS-985G according to parameters input.
6 No.6-- [I2b_CT_Gen]

Chapter7 Settings
Secondary rated current of generator calculated by RCS-985G according to parameters input.
Secondary rated current of the first splitting branch at the neutral point of generator calculated by
Secondary rated current of the second splitting branch at the neutral point of generator calculated
Secondary rated current at HV side of excitation transformer or terminal side of exciter calculated
10 No.10-- [I2b_CT_S2_Exc]
Secondary rated current at LV side of excitation transformer or neutral point side of exciter
calculated by RCS-985G according to parameters input.
11 No.11-- [U2b_Term_Gen]
Secondary rated current at the terminal of generator calculated by RCS-985G according to

parameters input.
12 No.12-- [U2b_DeltVT_Term_Gen]
Secondary rated zero sequence voltage derived from open-delta side of VT at the terminal of
generator calculated by RCS-985G according to parameters input.
13 No.13-- [U2b_NP_Gen]
Secondary rated zero sequence voltage derived from open-delta side of VT at the neutral point of
generator calculated by RCS-985G according to parameters input.
14 No.14-- [k_RV_Gen]
Balance coefficient of zero sequence voltage of generator. The setting is used to adjust zero
sequence of generator terminal to the same base as the one of neutral point.
15 No.15-- [k_Diff_Gen]
Correction coefficient for generator differential protection.
16 No.16-- [k_SP1_Diff_Gen]
Correction coefficient of current of the first splitting branch at the neutral point side of generator for
generator differential protection.
17 No.17-- [k_SP2_Diff_Gen]
Correction coefficient of current of the second splitting branch at the neutral point side of generator
for generator differential protection.

Chapter7 Settings
18 No.18-- [k_S1_Diff_Exc]
Correction coefficient of current of HV side of excitation transformer or terminal side of exciter for
excitation differential protection.
19 No.19-- [k_S2_Diff_Exc]
Correction coefficient of current of LV side of excitation transformer or neutral point side of exciter
for excitation differential protection.
7.4.3 Setting path

Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> CALC SETTINGS -> PRI RATED CURR -> [setting symbol]
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> CALC SETTINGS -> SEC RATED CURR -> [setting symbol]
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> CALC SETTINGS -> SEC RATED VOLT -> [setting symbol]
Main Menu -> SETTINGS -> CALC SETTINGS -> DIFF CORR COEF -> [setting symbol]

Chapter7 Settings

Chapter8 Human Machine Interface

User can access the relay from the front panel of the device. Local communication with the relay is
possible using a computer (PC) with the RCSPC software via an RS232 port on the front panel.
Furthermore, remote communication is also possible in switched-in substation automatic system
via a RS485 port.
This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), menu tree and LCD display. At the same
time how to input settings using keypad is described in detail. Finally, this chapter introduces the
RCSPC software and wave analysis software.
8.1 User interfaces and menu structure

The settings and functions of the RCS-985G protection relay can be accessed both from the front
panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of
these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay.
8.2 Introduction to the relay

8.2.1 Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 8.2-1. The human-machine interface consists of a
human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows the communication to be as simple as
possible for the user.
RCS-985G
GENERATOR PROTECTION 5
HEALTHY
VT ALM
GRP
CT ALM
ALARM
ENT
3
ESC
1 TRIP
NARI RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LD 6
Figure 8.2-1 Front view of the protection

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 8.2-1:
Table 8.2-1 Description of each part
No. Brief description
1 A 320*240 dots liquid crystal display (LCD)
2 The relay front panel features control pushbutton switches with LEDs that facilitate local
control. Factory default settings associate specific relay functions with these 9
direct-action pushbuttons and LEDs e.g.
3 A 9-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (◄,►,▲and ▼), an plus key (+), a minus key
(-), a escape key ( ESC) and a active group setting key (GRP)
4 A 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to
15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection, which providing internal signal
monitoring and high speed local downloading of software.
5 Name of protection
6 Name of manufacture
8.2.2 LCD
A 320*240 dots liquid crystal display (LCD) with LED backlight. The backlight can be switched on
automatically whenever the keypad is operated or operation or alarm issued. Backlight will be
turned off after a while.
8.2.2.1 Default Display
The front panel menu has a default display under normal state after power-up. If there is no
keypad activity during the 5 minute timeout period, default display will return again and the LCD
backlight will turn off. To provide more information, the default display a typical single-line scheme
generator system and relevant quantities in operation condition, as shown below.

Version 985G3Q 3.11 2007-3-22 10:28:03 GRP: 0

Real clock
DIF: 0.00Ie Diff Curr. Of Gen
DIS: 0.00Ie Diff Curr. Of Exc
Term voltage 0.00V

Term current 0.00A
F: 0.00 Hz Frequency
P: +0.00 %
Power
NP current 0.00A Q: +0.00 %
NP voltage 0.00V Ur: 0.0 V Rotor voltage
Rg: .....k Earth resistance
Figure 8.2-2 Default display of RCS-985G
8.2.2.2 Fault report
Whenever there is an un-eliminated fault record in the relay, the default display will be replaced by
a fault report.
NO. of SOE No. 002 Trip Report

Real Time: 2006 - 06 - 15 14 : 15 : 00 : 003
hh--mm--ss--ms
0025ms Op_Diff_Gen
Relative Time
Protection element
Figure 8.2-3 Fault display of RCS-985G
All the protection elements listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.2-2 List of operation elements
NO. Protection Element Note

1 Op_InstDiff_Gen Operation of instantaneous unrestraint differential protection
of generator
2 Op_PcntDiff_Gen Operation of percentage differential protection of generator
3 Op_DPFC_Diff_Gen Operation of DPFC (Deviation of Power Frequency

Component) differential protection of generator

4 Op_InstSPTDiff_Gen Operation of instantaneous phase-splitting transverse
5 Op_PcntSPTDiff_Gen Operation of percentage phase-splitting transverse
6 Op_GenDiff_StShut_Gen Operation of differential current element of startup and shut
off protection of generator
7 Op_UFOC_StShut_Gen Operation of low frequency overcurrent element of startup
and shut off protection of generator
8 Op_StaROV_StShut_Gen Operation of residual over voltage element of startup and
shut off protection of generator
9 Op_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen Operation of DPFC interturn protection of generator
10 Op_SensTrvDiff_Gen Operation of transverse differential protection of generator
11 Op_InsensTrvDiff_Gen Operation of insensitive stage of transverse differential
protection of generator
12 Op_SensIntTurn_Gen Operation of any of the interturn protection of generator
13 Op_InsensIntTurn_Gen Operation of any of the insensitive stage of interturn
14 Op_SensROV_Sta Operation of sensitive stage zero sequence over voltage
element of earth fault protection of stator
15 Op_InsensROV_Sta Operation of insensitive stage zero sequence over voltage
element of earth fault protection of stator
16 Op_V3rdHRatio_Sta Operation of 3rd harmonics ratio earth fault protection of
stator
17 Op_V3rdHDiff_Sta Operation of 3rd harmonics differential earth fault protection
of stator
18 Op_1PEF_RotWdg Operation of 1 point earth fault protection of rotor
19 Op_2PEF_RotWdg Operation of 2 point earth fault protection of rotor
20 Op_OvLd_Sta Operation of definitive time overload protection of stator
21 Op_InvOvLd_Sta Operation of inverse time overload protection of stator
22 Op_NegOC1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of negative sequence overcurrent
protection of rotor
23 Op_NegOC2_Gen Operation of stage 2 of negative sequence overcurrent
protection of rotor
24 Op_InvNegOC_Gen Operation of inverse time negative sequence overcurrent

protection of rotor
25 Op_OvLd_RotWdg Operation of definitive time overload protection of rotor
winding
26 Op_InvOvLd_RotWdg Operation of inverse time overload protection of rotor
winding
27 Op_OC1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of overcurrent protection of generator
28 Op_OC2_Gen Operation of stage 2 of overcurrent protection of generator
29 Op_OV1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of overvoltage protection of generator
30 Op_OV2_Gen Operation of stage 2 of overvoltage protection of generator
31 Op_UV_Gen Operation of undervoltage protection of generator
32 Op_OvExc1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of overexcitation protection of
generator
33 Op_OvExc2_Gen Operation of stage 2 of overexcitation protection of
generator
34 Op_InvOvExc_Gen Operation of inverse time stage of overexcitation protection
of generator
35 Op_UF1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of underfrequency protection of
generator
generator
generator
38 Op_OF1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of overfrequency protection of
generator
39 Op_OF2_Gen Operation of stage 2 of overfrequency protection of
generator
40 Op_Z1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of distance protection of generator
41 Op_Z2_Gen Operation of stage 2 of distance protection of generator
42 Op_LossExc1_Gen Operation of stage 1 of loss-of-excitation protection of
generator
generator
generator
45 Op_Ext_OOS_Gen Operation of out-of-step protection outside zone of

generator
46 Op_Int_OOS_Gen Operation of out-of-step protection inside zone of generator
47 Op_BFP11_Gen Operation of break failure protection of generator with time
delay 1
48 Op_BFP12_Gen Operation of break failure protection of generator time delay
2
49 Op_RevP_Gen Operation of reverse power protection of generator
50 Op_SeqTrpRevP_Gen Operation of under power protection of generator
51 Op_AccEnerg_Gen Operation of accidental energization protection of generator
52 Op_Flash11_GCB Operation of stage 1 of flashover protection of generator
53 Op_Flash12_GCB Operation of stage 2 of flashover protection of generator
54 Op_InstDiff_Exciter Operation of instantaneous differential protection of exciter
55 Op_PcntDiff_Exciter Operation of percentage differential protection of exciter
56 Op_InstDiff_ET Operation of instantaneous differential protection of
excitation transformer
57 Op_PcntDiff_ET Operation of percentage differential protection of excitation
transformer
58 Op_OC1_ET Operation of stage 1 of overcurrent protection of excitation
transformer
59 Op_OC2_ET Operation of stage 2 of overcurrent protection of excitation
transformer
60 Op_MechRly1 Operation of repeater of external mechanical input 1(Manual
emergency tripping)
61 Op_MechRly2 Operation of repeater of external mechanical input 2(Failure
of condenser vacuum)
62 Op_MechRly3 Operation of repeater of external mechanical input 3(Stage
1 of 1PEF of rotor)
63 Op_MechRly4 Operation of repeater of external mechanical input 4(Stage
2 of 1PEF of rotor)
8.2.2.3 Alarm report
Whenever there is an un-eliminated internal failure record in the relay, the default display will be
replaced by an alarm report.

NO. of SOE No. 002 Alarm Report

Real Time: 2006 - 06 - 15 14 : 15 : 00 : 003
hh--mm--ss--ms
Alm_BlkV3rdHDiff_VTS
Relative Time
Alarm element
Figure 8.2-4 Alarm display of RCS-985G
All the alarm elements listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.2-3 List of alarm elements
N Alarm Element Brief description

O.
1. Alm_RAM_CPUBrd CPU module RAM damaged.
2. Alm_ROM_CPUBrd CPU module flash memory damaged.
3. Alm_EEPROM_CPUBrd CPU module EEPROM damaged judged by the
mismatch of summation of all the settings with the
CRC code .
4. Alm_InvalidSetting Without modifying protection setting after modification
of rated secondary current of CT.
5. Alm_ModifiedSetting In the proceeding of setting parameters.
6. Alm_PwrLoss_Opto Loss of power supply of the optical couplers for binary
inputs.
7. Alm_TripOutput Driving transistor of binary output damaged.
8. Alm_DSP_CPUBrd The DSP chip in CPU board damaged.
9. Alm_DSP_MONBrd The DSP chip in MON board damaged.
10. Alm_Sample_CPUBrd Failure of sampled data in CPU board.
11. Alm_Sample_MONBrd Failure of sampled data in MON board.
12. Alm_RAM_MONBrd MON module RAM damaged.
13. Alm_ROM_MONBrd MON module flash memory damaged.
14. Alm_EEPROM_MONBrd MON module EEPROM damaged.
15. Alm_MONBrd MON module damaged.
16. Alm_PM_DSP2_CPUBrd The DSP2 chip on CPU board damaged.
17. Alm_PM_DSP1_CPUBrd The DSP1 chip on CPU board damaged.
18. Alm_Inconsist_MechRly Alarm of the power supply of mechanical protection,
such as falling down or be in other abnormal

conditions.
19. Alm_PwrLoss_MechRly The power supply of mechanical protection is lost.
20. Alm_InconsistFD Mismatch of pickup of same type fault detectors in
CPU and MON.
21. Alm_PersistFD_CPUBrd Duration of pickup of any fault detector in CPU board
is in excess of 10s.
22. Alm_PersistFD_MONBrd Duration of pickup of any fault detector in MON board
is in excess of 10s.
23. Alm_BI_CPUBrd Any one of binary input sampled directly doesn‘t match
with that of recognition of protection itself.
24. Alm_InnerComm Alarm indicating that the communication between
MON and CPU interrupts.
25. Alm_Pos_GCB The sampled status of auxiliary contact of generator
terminal breaker‘s don‘t match with that of operation
condition identified from calculation of voltage and
currents.
26. Alm_SwOv_VTS1_Gen Alarm indicating VT1 circuit failure and start to switch
over voltage circuit.
27. Alm_SwOv_VTS2_Gen Alarm indicating VT2 circuit failure and start to switch
over voltage circuit.
28. Alm_BlkV3rdHDiff_VTS1 Alarm indicating VT1 circuit failure and blocking 3rd
harmonics voltage differential protection.
29. Alm_BlkIntTurn_VTS2 Alarm indicating VT2 circuit failure and blocking
interturn protection.
30. Alm_VTS_HVS_Tr Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT at HV
side of main transformer.
31. Alm_VTS1_Term_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT1 at
generator terminal.
32. Alm_VTS2_Term_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT2 at
generator terminal.
33. Alm_VTS_NP_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT at the
neutral point of generator.
34. Alm_DeltVTS1_Term_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure at open-delta
side of VT1 at generator terminal.
35. Alm_DeltVTS2_Term_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure at open-delta
side of VT2 at generator terminal.
36. Alm_VTS_LossExc_RotWdg Alarm indicating rotor voltage circuit failure which used
by loss-of-excitation protection.
37. Alm_CTS_BakCT_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of
backup CT at generator terminal.
38. Alm_CTS_Term_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT at
generator terminal.
39. Alm_CTS_NP_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT at
the neutral point of generator.

40. Alm_CTS_SP1_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT

installed in splitting-phase branch1 at the neutral point
of generator .
41. Alm_CTS_SP2_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit abnormality of CT
installed in splitting-phase branch2 at the neutral point
of generator.
42. Alm_Diff_Gen Alarm indicating differential current of generator is in
excess of normally endurable level.
43. Alm_SPTDiff_Gen Alarm indicating splitting-phase transverse differential
current of generator is in excess of normally endurable
level.
44. Alm_CTS_Diff_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CTs used
for differential protection.
45. Alm_CTS_SPTDiff_Gen Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CTs used
for splitting-phase transverse differential protection.
46. Alm_CTS_S1_Exc Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT at
side1 of excitation set used in differential protection of
excitation.
47. Alm_CTS_S2_Exc Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT at
side2 of excitation set used in differential protection of
excitation.
48. Alm_Diff_ET Alarm indicating differential current of excitation
transformer is in excess of normally endurable level.
49. Alm_Diff_Exciter Alarm indicating differential current of exciter is in
excess of normally endurable level.
50. Alm_CTS_Diff_ET Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT used in
excitation transformer differential protection.
51. Alm_CTS_Diff_Exciter Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of CT used in
exciter differential protection.
52. Alm_VTS_Exc Alarm indicating secondary circuit failure of VT
installed for excitation set.
53. Alm_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen Alarm indicating operation of DPFC interturn
protective element.
54. Alm_BO_OC_Term_Gen Alarm indicating operation of overcurrent element
used for driving a set of contact to block other circuit.
55. Alm_On_2PEF_RotWdg Alarm indicating 2 points earth fault protection has
been put input operation after operation of 1 point
earth fault protection of rotor.
56. Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen Alarm indicating out-of-step of system occurs while its
oscillating center is outside protective zone.
57. Alm_Int_OOS_Gen Alarm indicating out-of-step of system occurs and its
oscillating center is inside protective zone.
58. Alm_Accel_OOS_Gen Alarm indicating accelerate out-of-step occurs.
59. Alm_Decel_OOS_Gen Alarm indicating decelerate out-of-step occurs.

60. Alm_LossExc_Gen Alarm indicating operation of loss-of-excitation

protective element.
61. Alm_OvExc_Gen Alarm indicating operation of over excitation protective
element.
62. Alm_OvLd_Sta Alarm indicating operation of overload element of
stator.
63. Alm_NegOC_Gen Alarm indicating operation of negative overcurrent
64. Alm_OvLd_RotWdg Alarm indicating operation of negative overcurrent
65. Alm_ROV_Sta Alarm indicating operation of fundamental
zero-sequence overvoltage earth fault protective
element of stator
66. Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta Alarm indicating operation of 3rd harmonics ratio earth
fault protective element of stator.
67. Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta Alarm indicating operation of 3rd harmonics differential
earth fault protective element of stator.
68. Alm_Sens1PEF_RotWdg Alarm indicating operation of sensitive stage of 1 point
earth fault protective element of rotor.
69. Alm_1PEF_RotWdg Alarm indicating operation of normal stage of 1 point
earth fault protective element of rotor.
70. Alm_UF1_Gen Alarm indicating operation of stage 1 of under
frequency protective element of generator.
73. Alm_OF1_Gen Alarm indicating operation of stage 1 of over frequency
protective element of generator.
74. Alm_OF2_Gen Alarm indicating operation of stage 2 of over frequency
protective element of generator.
75. Alm_RevP_Gen Alarm indicating operation of reverse power protective
element of generator.
76. Alm_MechRly4 Alarm indicating operation of mechanical repeater 4
8.2.2.4 Change of Binary inputs
Whenever there is change of state of any binary input, the default display will be replaced by
change report of binary input as shown as below.

NO. of SOE No. 002 BI Chang Report

Real Time: 2006 - 06 - 15 14 : 15 : 00 : 003
hh--mm--ss--ms
Binary input name EBI_Diff_Gen 1à0
Change maner
Figure 8.2-5 Binary input state changing display of RCS-985G
All the binary inputs listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.2-4 List of binary input change elements
NO. BI_Chg Element Brief description

1 EBI_Diff_Gen Enabling binary input of differential protection of generator
2 EBI_SPTDiff_Gen Enabling binary input of phase-splitting transverse
3 EBI_IntTurn_Gen Enabling binary input of turn-to-turn protection of
generator
4 EBI_ROV_Sta Enabling binary input of residual overvoltage stator earth
fault protection of generator
5 EBI_V3rdH_Sta Enabling binary input of 3rd harmonics stator earth fault
6 EBI_1PEF_RotWdg Enabling binary input of 1 point rotor earth fault protection
of generator
7 EBI_2PEF_RotWdg Enabling binary input of 2 point rotor earth fault protection
of generator
8 EBI_OvLd_Sta Enabling binary input of stator overload protection of
generator
9 EBI_NegOC_Gen Enabling binary input of stator negative sequence
overcurrent protection of generator
10 EBI_LossExc_Gen Enabling binary input of loss-of-excitation protection of
generator
11 EBI_OOS_Gen Enabling binary input of loss-of-step protection of
generator
12 EBI_VoltProt_Gen Enabling binary input of overvoltage protection of
generator
13 EBI_OvExc_Gen Enabling binary input of overexcitation protection of

generator
14 EBI_PwrProt_Gen Enabling binary input of reverse power protection of
generator
15 EBI_FreqProt_Gen Enabling binary input of frequency protection of generator
16 EBI_AccEnerg_Gen Enabling binary input of accidental energization protection
of generator
17 EBI_StShut_Gen Enabling binary input of startup and shutdown protection
of generator
18 EBI_Diff_Exc Enabling binary input of differential protection of excitation
set
19 EBI_Bak_Exc Enabling binary input of backup protection of excitation
set
20 EBI_Trp_MechRly3 Enabling binary input of tripping function of repeater of
mechanical input 3(Stage 1 of 1PEF of rotor)
mechanical input 4(Stage 2 of 1PEF of rotor)
mechanical input 2(Failure of condenser vacuum)
mechanical input 1(Manual emergency tripping)
24 EBI_PPF_Gen Enabling binary input of backup protection of generator
25 BI_SyncCondenser Binary input indicating synchronism condenser is put into
operation
26 BI_ExtProtTrp Binary input indicating the external contact state of other
operation element operates.
27 BI_Pwr_Superv Binary input indicating working condition of all other binary
inputs
28 EBI_OvLd_RotWdg Enabling binary input of overload protection of excitation
29 EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen Enabling binary input of sequence tripping function of
generator
30 EBI_BFP_Gen Enabling binary input of breaker failure protection of
generator.
31 BI_Print Binary input representing the position of printing button
32 BI_Pulse_GPS Binary input representing the state of GPS pulse
33 BI_RstTarg Binary input representing the position of signal reset
button
34 BI_Pwr_Opto Binary input indicating the working state of power supply
of optical isolators
35 BI_MechRly2 Binary input indicating the position of mechanical input
2(Failure of condenser vacuum)
4(Stage 2 of 1PEF of rotor)

3(Stage 1 of 1PEF of rotor)

1(Manual emergency tripping)
39 BI_Pwr_MechRly Binary input indicating the working state of power supply
of mechanical input circuit
40 BI_52b_GCB Binary input indicating the position of breaker at generator
terminal
41 BI_Value_Turbine Binary input indicating the position of valve of turbine
42 FD_Diff_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of differential protection
43 FD_EF_Sta Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of stator earth fault
protection
44 FD_EF_RotWdg Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of rotor earth fault
protection
45 FD_OvLd_Sta Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of stator overload element
46 FD_PPF_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of backup protection of
generator
47 FD_Volt&OvExc_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of overexcitation protection
or voltage protection of generator
48 FD_FreqProt_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of frequency protection of
generator
49 FD_LossExc&OOS_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of loss-of-excitation
50 FD_Pwr&AccEnerg_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of power protection or
accidental energization protection of generator
51 FD_StShut_Gen Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of startup and shutdown
52 FD_Prot_Exc Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of any protection of
excitation
53 FD_MechRly Internally generated virtual binary input in MON indicating
operation of the fault detector of mechanical protection
8.2.3 LED indications
LED indicators include：‖HEALTHY‖,‖ VT ALARM‖,‖ CT ALARM‖ ,‖ ALARM‖,‖ TRIP‖.

HEALTHY
VT ALARM
CT ALARM
ALARM
TRIP
TARGET RESET
Figure 8.2-6 LEDs on faceplate of RCS-985G
―Healthy‖ (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times.
It will be extinguished when some internal error in hardware or software has been detected by the
self-diagnosing facilities, such as setting error, RAM or ROM error, power source failure, output
circuit failure and so on. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the
rear terminals of the relay. The healthy LED cannot come on again automatically even if the failure
is eliminated except through resetting the relay or through power up by manual.
―VT Alarm‖ (Yellow) indicates that the relay has found any failure of VT circuit.
―CT Alarm‖ (Yellow) indicates that the relay has found any failure of CT circuit.
―Alarm‖ (Yellow) indicates that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by one of
the following failures: defective pickup, failure of analog or digital input circuit, optical isolator
power loss and so on. The LED will constantly illuminate, and will extinguish, when the alarms
have been cleared.
The LED ―TRIP‖ (RED) will be lit up once the corresponding relays operate and remain lit even
after the trip commands go off. It can be turned off by pressing ―TAEGET RESET‖ button on
faceplate, or by pressing the RESET button on the protection panel to energized binary input
[BI_RstTarg], or by remote resetting command.

8.2.4 Keypad operation
P
+
GR
ENT
ESC
-
Figure 8.2-7 Keypad buttons
No. Item Function

1 ―▲‖ and ―▼‖ move cursor left-fight among selectable target
2 ―◄‖ and ―►‖ move cursor up-down among selectable target
3 ―+‖ and ―-‖ add or subtract in the digit
4 ENT provide Enter/Execute function
5 GRP setting Group selection
5 ESC exit the present menu or return to the upper menu
Note!
Any setting change operation should start by simply pressing ―+‖, ―◄‖, ―▲‖,and ―-‖ in
sequence, as a password. Without the operation, modifying settings is invalid.
Report delete operation should executed by pressing ―+‖, ―-‖, ―+‖, ―-‖, ―ENT‖ in sequence
after exiting the main menu.
8.2.5 Menu
8.2.5.1 Menu tree
This part presents the main layout of the menu tree for the local human-machine interface (HMI).
The menu tree includes menus for:
 VALUES
 REPORT
 PRINT
 SETTINGS
 CLOCK
 VERSION
 DEBUG

N A R I - R E L A Y S
VALUES CPU METERING GEN DIFF CURR
REPORT CPU BI STATE GEN TRVDIFF CURR
MON METERING GEN

MON VOLTAGE
METERING
PRINT
MON BI STATE GEN MISC VALUES
SETTINGS
PHASE ANGLE RotWdg METERING
CLOCK
INJ METERING
VERSION
EXC AC METERING
DEBUG
Figure 8.2-8 View diagram of menu
The default display can be replaced by the menu when press―▲‖ or ―ESC‖.
The menu of this relay is arranged as a tree-shaped cascade structure. See Figure 8.2-9. The
menu can be browsed using the keypad.
Starting at the default display, to enter into main menu, press ―▲‖.
To select the required item, use the ―▲‖ ―▼‖keys.
To enter the lower level menu, select the required item and press ―ENT‖.
To return to the upper level menu, press ―ESC‖ or select ―0. Exit‖ and push ―ENT‖.
The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in Figure 8.2-8.
Thus, starting at the default display the ―▲‖ key will display the first column heading. To select the
required column heading use the ―▲‖and ―▼‖ keys. To return to the default display, press the clear
key ―ESC‖ from any of the column headings.

MENU
VALUES CPU METERING GEN DIFF CURR
REPORT CPU BI STATE GEN PROT EBI GEN TRVDIFF CURR
PRINT MON METERING EXC PROT EBI GEN VOLTAGE
SETTINGS MON BI STATE MECH RLY EBI GEN MISC VALUES
CLOCK PHASE ANGLE AUX BI RotWdg METERING
VERSION PROT FD INJ METERING
DEBUG PS SUPERV BI EXC AC METERING
SAME TO CPU METERING

SAME TO CPU BI STATE
TRIP REPORT
GEN PH ANG
ALARM REPORT
EXC PH ANG
BI CHG REPORT
GEN DIFF PROT
GEN SPTDIFF PROT
SETTINGS
GEN INTTURN PROT ACTIVE SETTINGS
TRIP RECORD
GEN PPF BAK PROT EQUIP SETTINGS
ALARM REPORT
STA EF PROT TRIGGER SYSTEM SETTINGS
BI CHG REPORT
INJ STA EF PROT BI STATE PROT SETTINGS
PRESENT WAVE
ROTWDG EF PROT PHASE ANGLE CALC SETTINGS
STA OVLD PROT GEN DIFF WAVE TRIP LOGIC
STA NEGOC PROT GEN TRVDIFF WAVE MODIFIED SETTINGS

EQUIP SETTINGS
GEN LOSSEXC PROT GEN VOLT WAVE OTHER GRP SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
GEN OOS PROT GEN MISC WAVE
PROT SETTINGS
GEN VOLT PROT EXC CURR WAVE
SETTINGS COPY
GEN OVEXC PROT STA EF WAVE TRIP REPORT
CALC SETTINGS
GEN PWR PROT GEN DIFF WAVE
GEN FREQ PROT GEN TRVDIFF WAVE
GEN STSHUT PROT COMM STATUS
PROT CONFIG GEN VOLT WAVE
GEN ACCENERG PROT MEMORY IMAGE
GEN SYS SETTINGS GEN MISC WAVE
EXC DIFF PROT EXC SYS SETTINGS EXC CURR WAVE
EXC BAK PROT STA EF WAVE
EXC OVLD PROT PRI RATED CURR
MECH RLY PROT SEC RATED CURR
SEC RATED VOLT
DIFF CORR COEF
Figure 8.2-9 Relay menu map of RCS-985G
8.2.5.2 Password protection
The menu structure contains two levels of access. The level of access is enabled determines what
users can do by entry of password. The levels of access are summarized in the following table:

Table 8.2-5 Password level
Access level Operations enabled

Level 0 Read access to all settings, alarms, event records
No password required and fault records
Level 1 All settings modified
Password required
The password is 4 digits. The factory default passwords is sequent pressing of the keys ―+‖, ―◄‖,
―▲‖, ―-‖ and ―ENT‖.
8.2.6 Operation instruction of Menu

The following contents are to tell users how to make use of each submenu in detail.
8.2.6.1 View CPU and MON metering values
Metering data consists of AC sampled data and phase angle in the submenu VALUES. Take
viewing data relevant to differential protection of CPU metering as an example. Users can view
data of MON in the same way by entering ―MON METERING‖ submenu.
Navigate the menu through the following path and you will see the interface of LCD as shown in
Figure 8.2-10.
Main menu -> VALUES -> CPU METERING-> GEN CURRENT
GEN DIFF CURR
Id_Diff_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie

Ir_Diff_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 Ie
I_Term_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I_NP_Gen: 000.00 000.00 000.00 A
I1_NP_Gen: 000.00 A
Figure 8.2-10 LCD display of metering data
A scroll bar appears on the right means there are more rows needed to be displayed. Please press
key ―▼‖to see the next page and press key ―ESC‖ to exit to the upper level submenu.
8.2.6.2 View state of all binary inputs in CPU and MON
The status of binary input comprises of enabling binary inputs and other binary inputs of auxiliary
contacts.

For instance, navigate the menu through the following path and you will see the interface of LCD
to see binary inputs related to generator‘s protection sampled by the CPU.
Main menu -> CPU BI STATE-> -> GEN PROT EBI -> [symbols]
GEN PROT EBI
EBI_Diff_Gen: 0
EBI_CoastProt_Gen: 0
EBI_PPF_Gen: 0
EBI_IntTurn_Gen: 0
EBI_BFP_Gen: 0
EBI_ROV_Sta: : 0
EBI_V3rd_Sta: 0
EBI_1PEF_RotWdg: 0
Figure 8.2-11 LCD display of status of binary inputs
Press key ―ESC‖ to exit to the submenu.
8.2.6.3 View phase angle
Entering into ―PHASE ANGLE‖ submenu, the calculated angles between sampled voltages or
between sampled voltages and currents by CPU system will be displayed on LCD as shown below,
which can be used to check the correctness of secondary circuit wiring.
The angles displayed is that the former value leading to the later one, which varies from -180～＋
180, as shown as figure below for example.
GEN PH ANG
o
φ_Term_&_NP_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φ_SP1_&_SP2_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_Term_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_NP_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_PwrProt_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_SP1_Gen: 000 000 000
o
φipp_SP2_GenTV1: 000 000 000
o
Figure 8.2-12 Phase angle displayed on LCD

Push ―▼‖ key to show the other information.
Push ―ESC‖ key to return to upper level menu.
8.2.6.4 Operation Instruction of Report menu
REPORTTRIP REPORT
Scroll the cursor to this submenu and press ―ENT‖ key, the LCD will display the latest trip report if
it exists, otherwise ―NO TRIP REPORT‖ will appear. If there are several trip reports stored in
memory, user can look up historical record one by one by pushing ―▲‖ key.
RCS-985G can store up to 24 latest trip reports. When the available space is exhausted, the
oldest report is automatically overwritten by the new one.
Push either ―ENT‖ or ―ESC‖ key to return to upper level menu.
REPORT—ALARM REPORT
Scroll the cursor to this submenu and press ―ENT‖ key, the LCD will display the latest alarm report
if it exists, otherwise a ―NO ALARM REPORT‖ will appear. If there are several alarm reports stored
in memory, user can look up historical record one by one by pushing ―▲‖ key.
RCS-985G can store up to 64 latest alarm reports. When the available space is exhausted, the
oldest report is automatically overwritten by the new one.
Push either ―ENT‖ or ―ESC‖ key to revert to upper level menu.
REPORT BI CHG REPORT
Scroll the cursor to this submenu and press ―ENT‖ key, the LCD will display the last BI CHG report
if it exists, otherwise ―NO BI CHG REPORT‖ will appear. If there are several BI CHG reports
stored in memory, user can look up historical record one by one by pushing ―▲‖ key.
RCS-985G can store up to 64 latest signaling reports at a resolution of 2ms. When the available
space is exhausted, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the new one.
Push either ―ENT‖ or ―ESC‖ key to return to upper level menu.
Delete fault records and event records
If you want to delete the contents of fault records or event records, you can follow the operating
steps. Note you cannot select which kind of records or which one record is to be deleted but only
delete all records.
Operating steps:
Press key ―▲‖ to enter the main menu at first.

N A RI- R EL A Y S
VALUES
REPORT
PRINT
SETTINGS
CLOCK
VERSION
DEBUG
Figure 8.2-13 LCD display of deleting report step 1
Press keys ―+‖, ―-‖, ―+‖, ―-‖, ―ENT‖ in sequence in the main menu to make LCD display Figure
8.2-14.
Confirm to clear all reports?

“ENT” to confirm, “ESC”to cancel.
Press key ―ENT‖ to delete all records or press key ―ESC‖ to exit to main menu. If key ―ENT‖ is
pressed, LCD will display Figure 8.2-15 when equipment is in the process of deleting all records. If
key ―ESC‖ is pressed, Figure 8.2-13 will be displayed. LCD will automatically return to Figure
8.2-13 in 3 seconds without pressing any key.

Clearing reports...
8.2.6.5 Operation Instruction of PRINT menu
PRINTSETTINGS [submenu]
Used for printing of settings. The following figure gives an example of the first submenu [ACTIVE
SETTINGS].

Figure 8.2-16 Example of settings printing
PRINTTRIP REPORT

Used for printing of trip report of protection. User can select the report that he wants to print by
pushing ―▲‖ and ―▼‖ keys to select the SOE number. Here is an example.
Figure 8.2-17 Example of tripping report printing

PRINTALARM REPORT
Used for printing of alarm. User can select the report that he wants to print by pushing ―▲‖ and ―▼‖
keys. Here is an example.
Figure 8.2-18 Example of alarm report printing
PRINT—BI CHG REPORT
Used for printing of signaling report. User can select the report that he wants to print by pushing
―▲‖ and ―▼‖ keys. Here is an example.

Figure 8.2-19 Example of BI CHG report printing
PRINTPRESENT VALUES
Used for printing of present values of relay, including sampled binary inputs, analog quantities and
so on. If you want to see the normal recording waveform, please follow the operating steps.
Operating steps:
First, please go in to the main menu by pressing key ―▲‖.
Press key ―▲‖ or ―▼‖to select ―PRINT‖ item by scrolling the cursor upward or downward and then
press the ―ENT‖ to the lower level submenu.
Then press key ―▲‖ or ―▼‖to select ―PRESENT WAVE‖ by scrolling the cursor upward or
downward. Press key ―ENT‖ to enter the lower level submenu.
Press ―TRIGGER‖ submenu to start recording. The equipment will record 5-cycle waveform after
pressing the key.
Please select the other items in the submenu ―PRESENT WAVE‖ by scrolling cursor to print the
waveform.
Here is an example.

Figure 8.2-20 Example of present values printing
8.2.6.6 Instruction of Settings Manu
SettingsEquip Settings
To change one of the values of the equipment settings, first navigate the ―SETTING‖ menu to
display the relevant cell. Press ―ENT‖ to enter the submenu and then proceed to ―Equip Settings‖
submenu.
Keys ―▲‖ and ―▼‖are used to select which kind of the settings to be modified by scrolling the
cursor upward or downward. Press key ―◄‖ or ―►‖ to move the cursor to the digit to be modified.
Press key ―+‖ and ―–‖ to modify data. Press key ―ESC‖ to return back without modification.
By pressing key ―ENT‖, the LCD will prompt user to input password, user should enter password
as mentioned in section 8.2.5.2 and quit to default display by pressing ―ESC‖ key.
After a time period where the ―HEALTHY‖ LED is extinguished and blocking of relay, the
RCS-985G is ready to perform any new operation against faults set according to the new settings,
the modification is completed. The following figure shows the path to access this submenu.
SettingsProtection settings
To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to ―SETTING‖ then corresponding
submenu to display the relevant cell. Please locate the setting you want to change after entering
the right submenu by operating the keypad as described before. Then go on to operate as

following steps.
Press key ―◄‖ or ―►‖ to move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Pressing key ―+‖ and ―–‖ to
change the digit. Press key ―+‖ once to add 1 to the digit and press key ―–‖ once to subtract 1 from
the digit.
Press key ―ESC‖ to cancel the modification and return to upper level submenu.
Press key ―ENT‖ to confirm the modification and the LCD will prompt you to input confirm code.
Password :
Figure 8.2-21 LCD display of inputting password
Press keys ―+‖,‖ ―◄‖, ―▲‖ and ―–‖ in sequence to complete the modification. If the password input
is wrong, prompt for password will appear again. If there is no operation for 3 seconds, the LCD
will return to last display.
If the password inputted is right, then the equipment will check setting and Figure 8.2-22 will be
displayed temporarily. If there is no error in checking setting, Equipment will modify setting with
Figure 8.2-23 displayed temporarily. Then LCD will return to upper level submenu automatically.
Checking settings...
Figure 8.2-22 LCD display of equipment checking setting

Modifying settings...
Figure 8.2-23 LCD display of equipment modifying setting
If errors in settings are detected, the LCD will display wrong setting warning for 3 s.
Settings error in
I_Pkp_Pcnt_Gen
Figure 8.2-24 LCD display of wrong setting warning
Then LCD will display the setting list for the operator to modify the wrong setting. The cursor will
stay at the first wrong setting needed to be modified.
Note:
If the group number or protection system parameter is changed, all protection settings will be
invalid and have to be configured again.
Attention: Before modifying the protection settings, the active group number in ―Equip Settings‖
should modified first, otherwise what is modified will be applied to the current active group.
SettingsSettings Copy

The relay stores 2 setting groups from No.0 through No.1. Only present setting group is active, the
others are provided for different operating conditions. The equipment settings are shared for the
two setting groups, but the protection settings are independent. Generally the equipment is
delivered with default settings stored in active setting group ―0‖. The contents of other setting
groups may be invalid. Therefore after application-specific settings for group No.0 have been
ready, it is necessary to copy settings of group No.0 to No. 1 setting groups, and make some
modification afterwards when necessary, so as to avoid entering all settings one by one. Please
copy settings through the following steps.
Press key ―▲‖ to enter the main menu at first.

N A RI- R EL A Y S
VALUES
REPORT
PRINT
SETTINGS
CLOCK
VERSION
DEBUG
Figure 8.2-25 LCD display step 1 of copying setting
Move cursor to ―SETTINGS‖ item and press key ―ENT‖ or key―►‖ to enter submenu.
N A RI- REL AY S
VALUES
REPORT
EQUP SETTINGS
PRINT
SYSTEM SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PROT SETTINGS
CLOCK SETTINGS COPY
VERSION CALC SETTINGS
DEBUG
Move cursor to ―SETTINGS COPY‖ item and press ―ENT‖ to display following interface.

Copying Settings
Active Group : 00
Target Group : 00
Warning: Target group will become

active automatically after copying!
Press key ―+‖ and ―–‖ to change digit where the cursor stays. Pressing key ―+‖ once will add 1 to
the digit and pressing key ―–―once will subtract 1 from the digit. (For example: input 01)
Press ―ENT‖ the LCD will prompt to input confirm code. Please see the figure below.
Password :
Figure 8.2-28 Password input interface
Please press keys ―+‖, ―◄‖, ―▲‖ and ―–‖ in sequence, and then the equipment will copy setting and
display following interface.

Copying settings...
Figure 8.2-29 LCD display of equipment copying setting
Then the contents of setting group 0 will be totally copied to setting group 1 and present active
setting group will be switched to Group1.
Note:
Press ―ENT‖ to confirm, then settings group 0 will be completely copied to settings group 1 and
present active group will be switched to group 01.
8.2.6.7 Clock set
Please set the equipment clock as following steps.
Navigate the menu:
Main menu -> CLOCK
After you press key ―ENT‖, the following will be displayed on the LCD.
CLOCK
07-02-05 (YY-MM-DD)
09:08:39 (hh : mm : ss)
Figure 8.2-30 LCD display of device clock

2007 – 02 – 05: shows the date February 5th 2007.
09: 08: 39: shows the time 09:08:39
Press keys ―▲‖, ―▼‖, ―◄‖ and ―►‖ to select the digit to be modified. Press key ―+‖ and ―–‖ to modify
data. Pressing key ―+‖ once will add 1 to the digit and pressing key ―–‖ once will subtract 1 from the
digit.
Press key ―ESC‖ to return to main menu without modification.
Press key ―ENT‖ to confirm the modification and return to the main menu.
8.2.6.8 View software version
The equipment program has following parts. One is CPU module program, one is MON module
program, and another is HMI module program. There are totally independent.
Navigate the menu:
Main menu -> VERSION
After you press key ―ENT‖, the follow will be displayed on the LCD.
VERSION
CPUBrd: RCS-985G310 3.10 2A058F1B

2006 - 12 - 12 10:20
MONBrd: RCS-985G310 3.10 97012006
2006 - 12 - 12 10:20
HMI: RCS-985G310 3.10 7170
2006 - 12 - 11 08:15 T - 060816
SUBQ_ID: 00026816
Figure 8.2-31 LCD display of software information
CPUBrd/MONBrd/HMI: shows CPU/MON/HMI module program information.
RCS-985G310: shows the program name of CPU/MON/HMI
3.10: shows the software version number of CPU/MON/HMI.
2A058F1B: shows the CRC (check code) of CPU module program.
97012006: shows the CRC (check code) of MON module program.
7170: shows the CRC (check code) of HMI module program.
2006-12-12 10:20: shows that CPU software creating time is 10:20 Dec 12th 2006.

2006-12-12 10:20: shows that MON software creating time is 10:20 Dec 12th 2006.
2006-12-11 08:15: shows that HMI software creating time is 08:15 Dec 11th 2006.
T-060816: shows the project number.
SUBQ_ID: 00026816: shows management sequential number of the software
Note:
What Figure 8.2-31 shows is just an example to introduce the meaning of VERSION, the actual
program VERSION is application-specific.
Press key ―ESC‖ to return to upper level submenu.
8.2.6.9 DEBUG menu
COMM STATUS
This submenu is used to monitor communication condition of the equipment with external system.
Display of this submenu is as follows:
485A 485B
Data_Received NO YES
Frame_Valid NO YES
Address_Valid NO YES
Data_Sent NO YES
Figure 8.2-32 Display of communication status
Columns 485A and 485B display communication condition of RS-485 port1 and RS-485 port2
respectively. If communication condition is normal, ―Y‖ will flash in the related position. If there is
flashing ―N‖ in the position, it mean there are problems. Please check communication.
Table 8.2-6 Items of DEBUG MENU
item status problem

Data_Received N Communication circuit is open or no data is sent from external
system.
Frame_Valid N Baud rate or protocol is wrong.

Address_Valid N Communication address is wrong.

Data_Sent N There is problem in the sent message.
―Data_Received‖ means the equipment has received data from external system. If ―N‖ flashes, it
means the circuit is open or no data is sent from the external system.
―Frame_Valid‖ means the equipment has received complete frame from the external system. If
―N‖ flashes, it means the configuration of the baud rate or protocol is wrong.
―Address_Valid‖ means the equipment has received related message from external system. If ―N‖
flashes, it means Configuration of the address is wrong.
―Data_Sent‖ means the equipment has sent data to external system. If ―N‖ flashes, it means there
is a problem with the message.
Communication condition is normal if ―Y‖ of all items flashes.
MEMPRY DEBUG
The LCD displays real time value in memory of CPU, DSP1 and DSP2. These datas are used
mainly for program debugging.


Chapter9 Communications
9.1 Introduction
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of the RCS-985G. The protection
supports a choice of one of three protocols via the rear communication interface, selected via the
model number by setting.
The rear EIA (RS) 485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 relays can be ‗daisy
chained‘ together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the
relay.
The following figure shows typical scheme of communication via RS-485 port of RCS-985G used
in substation automation system.
EIA RS-485
SAS 120Ω
GND 120Ω
RCS-9xx RCS-9xx RCS-9xx

device device device
Figure 9.1-1 Typical scheme in substation automation system
9.2 Rear communication port of EIA(RS)485

9.2.1 Rear communication port EIA(RS)485 interface
The rear EIA(RS)485 communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on
the back of the relay. See relevant sections for details of the connection terminals. The rear port
provides EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently wired
connection to a remote control center.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
A B A B A B TX RX Earth
485PORT 485PORT 485PORT Printer PORT
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
G
Figure 9.2-1 RS485 port interface
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the ‗SETTINGS‘ column. Using
the keypad and LCD, check the communication protocol being used by the rear port according to
the definition of relevant settings described in section 7.
9.2.2 EIA(RS)485 bus

The EIA(RS)485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product‘s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be noted that there is no agreed definition of
which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and the
communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
9.2.3 Bus termination

The EIA(RS)485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires – see Figure 9.1-1. Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.
9.2.4 Bus connections & topologies

The EIA(RS)485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the physical cable
that is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, as are star topologies.
Loop bus topologies are not part of the EIA(RS)485 standard and are forbidden by it.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 1000m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product‘s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.

Note the following warnings apply:
• It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will result
in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.
• As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility for any
damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect application of
this voltage.
9.3 IEC60870-5-103 communication

9.3.1 Overview of IEC60870-5-103
The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA(RS)485 connection over distances up to 1000m. The relay
operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relay‘s communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. Please refer to section
8.2.5 for detail instructions.
Three settings apply to the rear port using IEC60870-5-103 that is described below.
[Protocol] indicates the communication protocol.
[Equip_ID] controls the IEC60870-5-103 address of the relay. Up to 32 relays can be connected to
one IEC60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address
so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC60870-5-103
uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same IEC60870-5-103 address. The IEC60870-5-103 address is then used by the
master station to communicate with the relay.
[Com1_Baud (COM2_Baud)]: controls the baud rate to be used. IEC60870-5-103 communication

is asynchronous. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as
that set on the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
9.3.2 Messages description in IEC60870-5-103 protocol type

Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103
protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of Binary Input and Self-Supervision are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message).
9.3.2.1 Settings
Settings are transferred via Generic Service.
Note:

If the item ―[En_Remote_Cfg]‖ in Equipment Settings is set as 0, to modify settings remotely will
not be allowed. Moreover, Equipment Settings & System Settings are not allowed to be modified
remotely whether the item ―[En_Remote_Cfg]‖ is true (=1) or not.
9.3.2.2 Trip Reports
FUN INF Item Name FUN INF Item Name

227 163 Op_InstDiff_Gen 227 207 Op_OF2_Gen
227 164 Op_PcntDiff_Gen 229 234 Op_Z1_Gen
227 165 Op_DPFC_Diff_Gen 229 235 Op_Z2_Gen
227 166 Op_InstSPTDiff_Gen 227 210 Op_LossExc1_Gen
227 167 Op_PcntSPTDiff_Gen 227 212 Op_LossExc2_Gen
227 228 Op_Diff_StShut_Gen 227 213 Op_LossExc3_Gen
231 144 Op_UFOC_StShut_Gen 227 219 Op_Ext_OOS_Gen
231 35 Op_StaROV_StShut_Gen 227 220 Op_Int_OOS_Gen
227 172 Op_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen 231 186 Op_BFP11_GCB
227 173 Op_SensTrvDiff_Gen 231 200 Op_BFP12_GCB
227 174 Op_InsensTrvDiff_Gen 227 221 Op_RevP_Gen
227 175 Op_SensIntTurn_Gen 227 224 Op_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
227 176 Op_InsensIntTurn_Gen 231 152 Op_AccEnerg_Gen
227 177 Op_SensROV_Sta 233 149 Op_Flash11_GCB
227 178 Op_InsensROV_Sta 233 150 Op_Flash12_GCB
227 179 Op_V3rdHRatio_Sta 227 168 Op_InstDiff_Exciter
227 180 Op_V3rdHDiff_Sta 227 169 Op_PcntDiff_Exciter
227 181 Op_1PEF_RotWdg 227 170 Op_InstDiff_ET
227 182 Op_2PEF_RotWdg 227 171 Op_PcntDiff_ET
227 183 Op_OvLd_Sta 231 119 Op_OC1_Exc
227 184 Op_InvOvLd_Sta 231 120 Op_OC2_Exc
231 148 Op_NegOC1_Gen 231 108 Op_MechRly1
231 149 Op_NegOC2_Gen 231 109 Op_MechRly2
227 186 Op_InvNegOC_Gen 231 153 Op_MechRly3
227 187 Op_OvLd_RotWdg 231 154 Op_MechRly4
227 188 Op_InvOvLd_RotWdg 231 84 TrpOutp1
227 189 Op_OC1_Gen 231 85 TrpOutp2
227 190 Op_OC2_Gen 231 86 TrpOutp3
237 191 Op_OV1_Gen 231 87 TrpOutp4
235 192 Op_OV2_Sta 231 88 TrpOutp5
227 193 Op_UV_Gen 231 89 TrpOutp6
227 197 Op_OvExc1_Gen 231 90 TrpOutp7
227 198 Op_OvExc2_Gen 231 91 TrpOutp8
227 199 Op_InvOvExc_Gen 231 92 TrpOutp9
227 201 Op_UF1_Gen 231 93 TrpOutp10

227 206 Op_OF1_Gen
9.3.2.3 Alarm Reports
Sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message);
FUN INF Item Name FUN INF Item Name

227 64 Alm_SwOv_VTS1_Gen 227 115 Alm_UF1_Gen
227 65 Alm_SwOv_VTS2_Gen 227 116 Alm_UF2_Gen
227 66 Alm_BlkV3rdHDiff_VTS1 227 117 Alm_UF3_Gen
227 67 Alm_BlkIntTurn_VTS2 227 119 Alm_OF1_Gen
227 68 Alm_VTS_HVS_Tr 227 120 Alm_OF2_Gen
227 69 Alm_VTS1_Term_Gen 227 121 Alm_RevP_Gen
227 70 Alm_VTS2_Term_Gen 227 86 Alm_CTS_S1_Exc
227 71 Alm_VTS_NP_Gen 227 87 Alm_CTS_S2_Exc
227 72 Alm_DeltVTS1_Term_G 227 91 Alm_Diff_ET
en
227 73 Alm_DeltVTS2_Term_G 227 92 Alm_Diff_Exciter
en
227 77 Alm_VTS_LossExc_Rot 227 95 Alm_CTS_Diff_ET
Wdg
229 112 Alm_Pos_GCB 227 96 Alm_CTS_Diff_Exciter
227 79 Alm_PM_DSP1_CPUBrd 231 104 Alm_MechRly2
231 137 Alm_CTS_BakCT_Gen 231 143 Alm_MechRly4
227 80 Alm_CTS_Term_Gen 231 142 Alm_MechRly3
227 83 Alm_CTS_NP_Gen 231 105 Alm_MechRly1
227 84 Alm_CTS_SP1_Gen 229 215 Alm_Inconsist_MechRly
227 85 Alm_CTS_SP2_Gen 227 135 Alm_PwrLoss_MechRly
227 89 Alm_Diff_Gen 227 137 Alm_PM_DSP2_CPUBrd
227 90 Alm_SPTDiff_Gen 227 194 Alm_RAM_CPUBrd
229 253 Alm_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen 227 195 Alm_ROM_CPUBrd
227 93 Alm_CTS_Diff_Gen 227 196 Alm_EEPROM_CPUBrd
227 94 Alm_CTS_SPTDiff_Gen 227 223 Alm_InvalidSetting
229 213 Alm_BO_OC_Term_Gen 227 81 Alm_ModifiedSetting
231 145 Alm_On_2PEF_RotWdg 227 202 Alm_PwrLoss_Opto
227 100 Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen 229 142 Alm_TripOutput
227 101 Alm_Int_OOS_Gen 227 211 Alm_InnerComm
227 102 Alm_Accel_OOS_Gen 227 82 Alm_DSP_CPUBrd
227 103 Alm_Decel_OOS_Gen 227 214 Alm_PersistFD_CPUBrd
227 105 Alm_LossExc_Gen 227 215 Alm_InconsistFD
227 106 Alm_OvExc_Gen 227 217 Alm_Sample_CPUBrd
227 107 Alm_OvLd_Sta 229 246 Alm_BI_CPUBrd
227 108 Alm_NegOC_Gen 229 205 Alm_RAM_MONBrd
227 109 Alm_OvLd_RotWdg 229 206 Alm_ROM_MONBrd

227 110 Alm_ROV_Sta 229 207 Alm_EEPROM_MONBrd

227 111 Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta 229 202 Alm_DSP_MONBrd
227 112 Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta 229 203 Alm_PersistFD_MONBrd
227 113 Alm_Sens1PEF_RotWdg 227 216 Alm_MONBrd
227 114 Alm_1PEF_RotWdg 229 204 Alm_Sample_MONBrd
9.3.2.4 Disturbance ACC(Actual Channel)
ACC No. Name ACC No. Name

64 Ida_Diff_Gen 98 U0_3rdH_VT1_Term_Gen
65 Idb_Diff_Gen 99 U0_3rdH_NP_Gen
66 Idc_Diff_Gen 100 Ud_3rdH_Sta
67 Ia_Term_Gen 101 U(+)_RotWdg
68 Ib_Term_Gen 102 U(-)_RotWdg
69 Ic_Term_Gen 103 U_RotWdg
70 Ia_NP_Gen 104 I_RotWdg
71 Ib_NP_Gen 105 Reserved
72 Ic_NP_Gen 106 f_Gen
73 Ida_SPTDiff_Gen 107 U_Busbar
74 Idb_SPTDiff_Gen 108 Reserved
75 Idc_SPTDiff_Gen 109 Reserved
76 Ia_SP1_Gen 110 Reserved
77 Ib_SP1_Gen 111 Reserved
78 Ic_SP1_Gen 112 Ida_Diff_Exc
79 Ia_SP2_Gen 113 Idb_Diff_Exc
80 Ib_SP2_Gen 114 Idc_Diff_Exc
81 Ic_SP2_Gen 115 Ia_Corr_S1_Exc
82 Id_TrvDiff_Gen 116 Ib_Corr_S1_Exc
83 P_Gen 117 Ic_Corr_S1_Exc
84 Q_Gen 118 Ia_Corr_S2_Exc
85 Ia_PwrProt_Gen 119 Ib_Corr_S2_Exc
86 Ib_PwrProt_Gen 120 Ic_Corr_S2_Exc
87 Ic_PwrProt_Gen 121 Ia_S1_Exc
88 Ua_VT1_Term_Gen 122 Ib_S1_Exc
89 Ub_VT1_Term_Gen 123 Ic_S1_Exc
90 Uc_VT1_Term_Gen 124 Ia_S2_Exc
91 Ua_VT2_Term_Gen 125 Ib_S2_Exc
92 Ub_VT2_Term_Gen 126 Ic_S2_Exc
93 Uc_VT2_Term_Gen 127 Rg_RotWdg
94 U/F_OvExc_Gen 128 Ia_BakCT_Gen
95 U0_DeltVT1_Term_Gen 129 Ib_BakCT_Gen
96 U0_NP_Gen 130 Ic_BakCT_Gen
97 U0_Longl_Gen

9.3.2.5 Metering
Sent via Generic Service.
The metering values were format as IEEE STD754 R32.23.
9.3.2.6 BinaryInput
Sent by ASDU1. (time-tagged message).
FUN INF Name 231 100 EBI_Trp_MechRly1

227 16 EBI_Diff_Gen 227 39 EBI_PPF_Gen
227 17 EBI_IntTurn_Gen 227 40 EBI_SPTDiff_Gen
227 18 EBI_ROV_Sta 227 41 BI_UrgBrake
227 19 EBI_V3rdH_Sta 227 42 BI_SyncCondenser
227 21 EBI_1PEF_RotWdg 229 249 BI_Reserved3
227 22 EBI_2PEF_RotWdg 229 239 BI_Reserved2
227 23 EBI_OvLd_Sta 227 44 BI_Pwr_Superv
227 24 EBI_NegOC_Gen 229 240 EBI_OvLd_RotWdg
227 25 EBI_LossExc_Gen 231 189 EBI_BFP_GCB
227 26 EBI_OOS_Gen 231 155 EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
227 27 EBI_VoltProt_Gen 231 102 BI_MechRly2
227 28 EBI_OvExc_Gen 231 134 BI_MechRly4
227 29 EBI_PwrProt_Gen 231 133 BI_MechRly3
227 30 EBI_FreqProt_Gen 231 103 BI_MechRly1
227 31 EBI_AccEnerg_Gen 227 58 BI_Pwr_MechRly
227 32 EBI_StShut_Gen 227 59 BI_52b_GCB
231 98 EBI_Diff_Exc 233 32 BI_Reserved4
231 99 EBI_Bak_Exc 231 195 BI_ExtProtTrp
231 129 EBI_Trp_MechRly3 229 236 BI_Reserved1
231 130 EBI_Trp_MechRly4 227 63 BI_Valve_Turbine
231 101 EBI_Trp_MechRly2
9.3.2.7 Blocking of monitoring direction
FUN = 227; INF = 20
9.3.2.8 Generic service
Group No. Group Name(English) 9 Gen PPF Bak Prot Settings

1 Setting_Group. 10 Sta EF Prot Settings
2 Equipment Settings 11 RotWdg EF Prot Settings
3 Protection Config 12 Sta OvLd Prot Settings
4 Gen Sys Settings 13 Sta NegOC Prot Settings
5 Exc System Settings 14 Gen LossExc Prot Settings
6 Gen Diff Prot Settings 15 Gen OOS Prot Settings
7 Gen SPTDiff Prot Settings 16 Gen Volt Prot Settings
8 Gen IntTurn Prot Settings 17 Gen OvExc Prot Settings

18 Gen Pwr Prot Settings 25 RotWdg OvLd Prot Settings

19 Gen Freq Prot Settings 26 MechRly Prot Settings
20 Gen StShut Prot Settings 65 Gen Metering
21 Gen AccEnerg Prot Settings 66 Exc Metering
22 GCB BFP Settings
23 Exc Diff Prot Settings
24 Exc Bak Prot Settings
9.4 MODBUS protocol

9.4.1 Overview
The RCS-985G relay support several communications protocols to allow the connection to the
equipment such as personal computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic
controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the
RCS-985G. Modbus is available via RS485 serial links or via Ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP
specification).
The following information is provided primarily for users who wish to develop their own master
communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. The characteristics are
listed below:
 Standard: Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide, PI-MBUS-300 Rev.E
 Physical Layer Setup：RS485, 1 start bit,8 data bits, no bit for parity,1 stop bit
 Link Layer Setup：Only RTU Mode Supported
 Frame Length Up limit：256 Bytes
 Baud Rate: Configurable
 Device Address: Configurable
 Parity: no
The following modbus function codes are supported but re-defined by the relay:
02 Read Input Status-Get real-time status (binary)
03 Read Holding Registers- Get Settings
04 Read Input Registers- Get metering values of equipment
9.4.2 Fetch real time status (Binary)
Function Code: 02H
This function reads the ON/OFF status of discrete inputs in the slave. The status in the response
message is packed as one input per bit of the data field. Status is indicated as: 1 = ON; 0 = OFF.
The LSB of the first data byte contains the input addressed in the query. The other inputs follow
toward the high order end of this byte, and from ‗low order to high order‘ in subsequent bytes.

Example 1: If the master wants to fetch Trip Information (0000H~0003H), the query frame would
be as follows(Suppose the slave address was 1):
01 02 00 00 00 04 79 C9
CRC Hi
CRC Lo
Num of Status Lo
Num of Status Hi
Start Register Addr Lo

Start Register Addr Hi
Function Code
Slave Addr
The response fame would be as follows (Suppose the value of 0000H~0003H equal to 1,1,0,1
respectively):
01 02 01 0B E0 4F
CRC Hi
CRC Lo
Status
Length
Function Code
Slave Addr
Example 2: If the master wants to fetch Trip Information (0002H~000DH), the query frame would
be as follows (Suppose the slave address was 1):

01 02 00 02 00 0C D9 CF
CRC Hi
CRC Lo
Num of Status Lo
Num of Status Hi
Start Register Addr Lo

Start Register Addr Hi
Function Code
Slave Addr
The response fame would be as follows (Suppose the value of 0002H~000DH equal to
1,1,0,1,0,0,1,0,1,1,1,0 respectively):
01 02 02 07 4B FB BF
CRC Hi
CRC Lo
Status Lo
Status Hi
Length
Function Code
Slave Addr
9.4.2.1 Trip information：―1‖ means trip,‖0‖ for no trip or draw off.
Address Item Name

0000H Op_InstDiff_Gen
0001H Op_PcntDiff_Gen
0002H Op_DPFC_Diff_Gen
0003H Op_InstSPTDiff_Gen
0004H Op_PcntSPTDiff_Gen
0005H Op_Diff_StShut_Gen
0006H Op_UFOC_StShut_Gen
0007H Op_StaROV_StShut_Gen
0008H Op_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen
0009H Op_SensTrvDiff_Gen
000AH Op_InsensTrvDiff_Gen
000BH Op_SensIntTurn_Gen

000CH Op_InsensIntTurn_Gen
000DH Op_SensROV_Sta
000EH Op_InsensROV_Sta
000FH Op_V3rdHRatio_Sta
0010H Op_V3rdHDiff_Sta
0011H Op_1PEF_RotWdg
0012H Op_2PEF_RotWdg
0013H Op_OvLd_Sta
0014H Op_InvOvLd_Sta
0015H Op_NegOC1_Gen
0016H Op_NegOC2_Gen
0017H Op_InvNegOC_Gen
0018H Op_OvLd_RotWdg
0019H Op_InvOvLd_RotWdg
001AH Op_OC1_Gen
001BH Op_OC2_Gen
001CH Op_OV1_Gen
001DH Op_OV2_Gen
001EH Op_UV_Gen
001FH Op_OvExc1_Gen
0020H Op_OvExc2_Gen
0021H Op_InvOvExc_Gen
0022H Op_UF1_Gen
0023H Op_UF2_Gen
0024H Op_UF3_Gen
0025H Op_OF1_Gen
0026H Op_OF2_Gen
0027H Op_Z1_Gen
0028H Op_Z2_Gen
0029H Op_LossExc1_Gen
002AH Op_LossExc2_Gen
002BH Op_LossExc3_Gen
002CH Op_Ext_OOS_Gen
002DH Op_Int_OOS_Gen
002EH Op_BFP11_GCB
002FH Op_BFP12_GCB
0030H Op_RevP_Gen
0031H Op_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
0032H Op_AccEnerg_Gen
0033H Op_Flash11_GCB
0034H Op_Flash12_GCB
0035H Op_InstDiff_Exciter
0036H Op_PcntDiff_Exciter

0037H Op_InstDiff_ET
0038H Op_PcntDiff_ET
0039H Op_OC1_Exc
003AH Op_OC2_Exc
003BH Op_MechRly1
003CH Op_MechRly2
003DH Op_MechRly3
003EH Op_MechRly4
003FH TrpOutp1
0040H TrpOutp2
0041H TrpOutp3
0042H TrpOutp4
0043H TrpOutp5
0044H TrpOutp6
0045H TrpOutp7
0046H TrpOutp8
0047H TrpOutp9
0048H TrpOutp10
0049H TrpOutp11
004AH TrpOutp12
9.4.2.2 Alarm information：―1‖ means alarm,‖0‖ for no alarm or draw off.
Address Item Name

1000H Alm_SwOv_VTS1_Gen
1001H Alm_SwOv_VTS2_Gen
1002H Alm_BlkV3rdHDiff_VTS1
1003H Alm_BlkIntTurn_VTS2
1004H Alm_VTS_HVS_Tr
1005H Alm_VTS1_Term_Gen
1006H Alm_VTS2_Term_Gen
1007H Alm_VTS_NP_Gen
1008H Alm_DeltVTS1_Term_Gen
1009H Alm_DeltVTS2_Term_Gen
100AH Alm_VTS_LossExc_RotWdg
100BH Alm_Pos_GCB
100CH Alm_PM_DSP1_CPUBrd
100DH Alm_CTS_BakCT_Gen
100EH Alm_CTS_Term_Gen
100FH Alm_CTS_NP_Gen
1010H Alm_CTS_SP1_Gen
1011H Alm_CTS_SP2_Gen
1012H Alm_Diff_Gen
1013H Alm_SPTDiff_Gen

1014H Alm_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen
1015H Alm_CTS_Diff_Gen
1016H Alm_CTS_SPTDiff_Gen
1017H Alm_BO_OC_Term_Gen
1018H Alm_On_2PEF_RotWdg
1019H Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen
101AH Alm_Int_OOS_Gen
101BH Alm_Accel_OOS_Gen
101CH Alm_Decel_OOS_Gen
101DH Alm_LossExc_Gen
101EH Alm_OvExc_Gen
101FH Alm_OvLd_Sta
1020H Alm_NegOC_Gen
1021H Alm_OvLd_RotWdg
1022H Alm_ROV_Sta
1023H Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta
1024H Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta
1025H Alm_Sens1PEF_RotWdg
1026H Alm_1PEF_RotWdg
1027H Alm_UF1_Gen
1028H Alm_UF2_Gen
1029H Alm_UF3_Gen
102AH Alm_OF1_Gen
102BH Alm_OF2_Gen
102CH Alm_RevP_Gen
102DH Alm_CTS_S1_Exc
102EH Alm_CTS_S2_Exc
102FH Alm_Diff_ET
1030H Alm_Diff_Exciter
1031H Alm_CTS_Diff_ET
1032H Alm_CTS_Diff_Exciter
1033H Alm_MechRly2
1034H Alm_MechRly4
1035H Alm_MechRly3
1036H Alm_MechRly1
1037H Alm_Inconsist_MechRly
1038H Alm_PwrLoss_MechRly
1039H Alm_PM_DSP2_CPUBrd
103AH Alm_RAM_CPUBrd
103BH Alm_ROM_CPUBrd
103CH Alm_EEPROM_CPUBrd
103DH Alm_InvalidSetting
103EH Alm_ModifiedSetting

103FH Alm_PwrLoss_Opto
1040H Alm_TripOutput
1041H Alm_InnerComm
1042H Alm_DSP_CPUBrd
1043H Alm_PersistFD_CPUBrd
1044H Alm_InconsistFD
1045H Alm_Sample_CPUBrd
1046H Alm_BI_CPUBrd
1047H Alm_RAM_MONBrd
1048H Alm_ROM_MONBrd
1049H Alm_EEPROM_MONBrd
104AH Alm_DSP_MONBrd
104BH Alm_PersistFD_MONBrd
104CH Alm_MONBrd
104DH Alm_Sample_MONBrd
9.4.2.3 BinaryInput Change Information.
9.4.2.4 ―1‖ means binary change,‖0‖ for no change or draw off.
Address Item Name

2000H EBI_Diff_Gen
2001H EBI_IntTurn_Gen
2002H EBI_ROV_Sta
2003H EBI_V3rdH_Sta
2004H EBI_1PEF_RotWdg
2005H EBI_2PEF_RotWdg
2006H EBI_OvLd_Sta
2007H EBI_NegOC_Gen
2008H EBI_LossExc_Gen
2009H EBI_OOS_Gen
200AH EBI_VoltProt_Gen
200BH EBI_OvExc_Gen
200CH EBI_PwrProt_Gen
200DH EBI_FreqProt_Gen
200EH EBI_AccEnerg_Gen
200FH EBI_StShut_Gen
2010H EBI_Diff_Exc
2011H EBI_Bak_Exc
2012H EBI_Trp_MechRly3
2016H EBI_PPF_Gen

2017H EBI_SPTDiff_Gen
2018H BI_UrgBrake
2019H BI_SyncCondenser
201AH BI_Reserved3
201BH BI_Reserved2
201CH BI_Pwr_Superv
201DH EBI_OvLd_RotWdg
201EH EBI_BFP_GCB
201FH EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen
2020H BI_MechRly2
2021H BI_MechRly4
2022H BI_MechRly3
2023H BI_MechRly1
2024H BI_Pwr_MechRly
2025H BI_52b_GCB
2026H BI_Reserved4
2027H BI_ExtProtTrp
2028H BI_Reserved1
2029H BI_Valve_Turbine
9.4.3 Fetch metering values of equipment
Function Code: 04H
The metering values in the response message are packed as two bytes per register. For each
register, the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits.
9.4.3.1 Gen Metering
Address Analog Name Unit

0000H Ida_Diff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0001H Idb_Diff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0002H Idc_Diff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0003H Ira_Diff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0004H Irb_Diff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0005H Irc_Diff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0006H Ia_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0007H Ib_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0008H Ic_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0009H I1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) A
000AH I2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) A
000BH I0_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) A
000CH Ia_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) A
000DH Ib_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) A
000EH Ic_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) A

000FH I1_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) A

0010H I2_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0011H I0_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0012H Ia_BakCT_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0013H Ib_BakCT_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0014H Ic_BakCT_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0015H I1_BakCT_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0018H Ia_PwrProt_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0019H Ib_PwrProt_Gen (2 decimal places) A
001AH Ic_PwrProt_Gen (2 decimal places) A
001BH I1_PwrProt_Gen (2 decimal places) A
001CH I2_PwrProt_Gen (2 decimal places) A
001DH I0_PwrProt_Gen (2 decimal places) A
001EH Id_TrvDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) A
001FH Id_3rdH_TrvDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0020H Ida_SPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0021H Idb_SPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0022H Idc_SPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0023H Ira_SPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0024H Irb_SPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0025H Irc_SPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0026H Ia_Corr_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0027H Ib_Corr_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0028H Ic_Corr_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
0029H Ia_Corr_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
002AH Ib_Corr_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
002BH Ic_Corr_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
002CH Ia_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
002DH Ib_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
002EH Ic_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
002FH I1_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0030H I2_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0032H Ia_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0033H Ib_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0034H Ic_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) A
0038H Ua_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0039H Ub_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V

003AH Uc_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V

003BH U1_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
003CH U2_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
003DH U0_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
003EH Ua_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
003FH Ub_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0040H Uc_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0041H U1_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0044H Uab_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0045H Ubc_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0046H Uca_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0047H Uab_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0048H Ubc_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0049H Uca_VT2_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
004AH U0_DeltVT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
004BH U0_ NP_Gen (2 decimal places) V
004CH U0_3rdH_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
004DH U0_3rdH_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) V
004EH Ud_3rdH_Sta (2 decimal places) V
004FH U0_Longl_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0050H U0_3rdH_Longl_Gen (2 decimal places) V
0051H U_Busbar (2 decimal places) V
0052H P_Gen (signed/2 decimal places) %
0053H Q_Gen (signed/2 decimal places) %
0054H Accu_InvOvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) %
0055H Accu_InvNegOC_Gen (2 decimal places) %
0056H U/F_OvExc_Gen (3 decimal places)
0057H Accu_InvOvExc_Gen (2 decimal places) %
0058H f_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz
0059H Accu_UF1_Gen (2 decimal places) Min
005AH Accu_UF2_Gen (2 decimal places) Min
005BH U1_2ndH_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
005CH U2_2ndH_VT1_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) V
005DH U(+)_RotWdg (signed/1 decimal place) V
005EH U(-)_RotWdg (signed/1 decimal place) V
005FH U_RotWdg (signed/1 decimal place) V
0060H Rg_RotWdg (2 decimal places) kΩ
0061H Location_EF_RotWdg (2 decimal places) %
0062H I_RotWdg (signed/integer) A
0063H I_Exc (2 decimal places) A
0064H Accu_InvOvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) %

9.4.3.2 Exc Metering
Address Analog Name Unit

1000H Ida_Diff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1001H Idb_Diff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1002H Idc_Diff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1003H Ira_Diff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1004H Irb_Diff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1005H Irc_Diff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1006H Ida_2ndH_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1007H Idb_2ndH_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1008H Idc_2ndH _Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
1009H Ia_Corr_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
100AH Ib_Corr_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
100BH Ic_Corr_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
100CH Ia_Corr_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
100DH Ib_Corr_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
100EH Ic_Corr_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
100FH Ia_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) A
1010H Ib_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) A
1011H Ic_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) A
1012H I1_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) A
1015H Ia_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) A
1016H Ib_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) A
1017H Ic_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) A
101AH I0_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) A
9.4.4 Fetch settings value of equipment
Function Code: 03H
9.4.4.1 Equipment Settings
Address Setting Name Unit

0000H Setting_Group
0001H Equip_ID(ASCII Hi Word)
0002H Equip_ID(ASCII Mi Word)
0003H Equip_ID(ASCII Lo Word)
0004H Comm_Addr(integer)
0005H COM1_Baud(integer) bps
0006H COM2_Baud(integer) bps

0007H Printer_Baud(integer) bps

0008H Protocol Bit0: COM1 870-5-103 Protocal
Bit1: COM1 LFP Protocal
Bit2: COM1 Modbus Protocal
Bit4: COM2 870-5-103 Protocal
Bit5: COM2 LFP Protocal
Bit6: COM2 Modbus Protocal
0009H Logic settings Bit0: En_Auto_Print
Bit1: En_Net_Print
Bit3: En_Remote_Cfg
Bit4: GPS_Pulse
9.4.4.2 System Settings
9.4.4.2.1 Protection Configuration

1000H Protection Config Bit0:En_Diff_Gen
Word 1 Bit1:En_SPTDiff_Gen
Bit2:En_IntTurn_Gen
Bit3:En_PPF_Gen
Bit4:En_EF_Sta
Bit5:Unused_Bit
Bit6:En_EF_RotWdg
Bit7:En_OvLd_Sta
Bit8:En_NegOC_Gen
Bit9:En_LossExc_Gen
Bit10:En_OOS_Gen
Bit11:En_VoltProt_Gen
Bit12:En_OvExc_Gen
Bit13:En_PwrProt_Gen
Bit14:En_FreqProt_Gen
Bit15:En_StShut_Gen
1001H Protection Config Bit0:En_AccEnerg_Gen
Word 2 Bit1:En_BFP_GCB
Bit2:En_Diff_Exc
Bit3:En_Bak_Exc
Bit4:En_OvLd_RotWdg
Bit5:En_MechRly
Bit6:En_VTComp_Term_Gen
9.4.4.2.2 Gen System Settings

1002H fn_Gen (integer) Hz
1003H Pn_Gen (1 decimal place) MW

1004H PF_Gen (2 decimal places)

1005H U1n_Gen (2 decimal places) kV
1006H U1n_VT_Term_Gen (2 decimal places) kV
1007H U2n_VT_Term_Gen (integer) V
1008H U2n_DeltVT_Term_Gen (integer) V
1009H U1n_VT_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) kV
100AH U2n_VT_NP_Gen (2 decimal places) V
100BH I1n_CT_Term_Gen (integer) A
100CH I2n_CT_Term_Gen (integer) A
100DH k_SP1_Gen (2 decimal places) %
100EH k_SP2_Gen (2 decimal places) %
100FH I1n_CT_SP1_Gen (integer) A
1010H I2n_CT_SP1_Gen (integer) A
1013H I1n_CT_TrvDiff_Gen (integer) A
1014H I2n_CT_TrvDiff_Gen (integer) A
1015H I1n_RotWdg (integer) A
1016H U2n_Shunt_RotWdg (2 decimal places) mV
9.4.4.2.3 Exc System Settings
1017H fn_Exc (integer) Hz
1018H Sn_Exc (2 decimal places) MVA
1019H U1n_S1_Exc (2 decimal places) kV
101AH U1n_S2_Exc (2 decimal places) kV
101BH I1n_CT_S1_Exc (integer) A
101CH I2n_CT_S1_Exc (integer) A
101DH I1n_CT_S2_Exc (integer) A
101EH I2n_CT_S2_Exc (integer) A
101FH Logic Bit0:Opt_Exc
settings Bit1:Yy12_Conn_ET
Bit2:Dd12_Conn_ET
Bit3:Dy11_Conn_ET
Bit4:Yd11_Conn_ET
Bit5:Dy1_Conn_ET
9.4.4.3 Prot Settings
9.4.4.3.1 Gen Diff Prot Settings

2000H I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
2001H I_InstDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
2002H Slope1_PcntDiff_Gen (2 decimal places)

2003H Slope2_PcntDiff_Gen (2 decimal places)

2004H TrpLog_Diff_Gen
2005H Logic Bit0:En_InstDiff_Gen
settings Bit1:En_PcntDiff_Gen
Bit2:En_DPFC_Diff_Gen
Bit3:Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Gen
9.4.4.3.2 Gen SPTDiff Prot Settings

2006H I_Pkp_PcntSPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
2007H I_InstSPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
2008H Slope1_PcntSPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places)
2009H Slope2_PcntSPTDiff_Gen (2 decimal places)
200AH TrpLog_SPTDiff_Gen
200BH Logic Bit0:En_InstSPTDiff_Gen
settings Bit1:En_PcntSPTDiff_Gen
Bit2:Opt_CTS_PcntSPTDiff_Gen
9.4.4.3.3 Gen IntTurn Prot Settings

200CH I_SensTrvDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) A
200DH I_InsensTrvDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) A
200EH t_TrvDiff_Gen (2 decimal places) S
200FH V_SensROV_Longl_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2010H V_InsensROV_Longl_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2011H t_ROV_Longl_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2012H TrpLog_IntTurn_Gen
2013H Logic Bit0:En_SensTrvDiff_Gen
settings Bit1:En_InsensTrvDiff_Gen
Bit2:En_SensROV_Longl_Gen
Bit3:En_InsensROV_Longl_Gen
Bit4:En_DPFC_IntTurn_Gen
9.4.4.3.4 Gen PPF Bak Prot Settings

2014H V_NegOV_VCE_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2015H Vpp_UV_VCE_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2016H I_OC1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
2017H t_OC1_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2018H TrpLog_OC1_Gen
2019H I_OC2_Gen (2 decimal places) A
201AH t_OC2_Gen (2 decimal places) S
201BH TrpLog_OC2_Gen

201CH Z1_Fwd_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω

201DH Z1_Rev_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
201EH t_Z1_Gen (2 decimal places) S
201FH TrpLog_Z1_Gen
2020H Z2_Fwd_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
2021H Z2_Rev_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
2022H t_Z2_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2023H TrpLog_Z2_Gen
2024H I_BO_OC_Gen (2 decimal places) A
2025H Logic Bit0:En_VCE_Ctrl_OC1_Gen
settings Bit1:En_VCE_Ctrl_OC2_Gen
Bit2:Opt_VTS_Ctrl_OC_Gen
Bit3:Opt_ExcMode_Gen
Bit4:En_BO_OC_Gen
9.4.4.3.5 Sta EF Prot Settings

2026H V_SensROV_Sta (2 decimal places) V
2027H V_InsensROV_Sta (2 decimal places) V
2028H t_ROV_Sta (2 decimal places) S
2029H k_V3rdHRatio_PreSync_Sta (2 decimal places)
202AH k_V3rdHRatio_PostSync_Sta (2 decimal places)
202BH k_V3rdHDiff_Sta (2 decimal places)
202CH t_V3rdH_Sta (2 decimal places) S
202DH TrpLog_EF_Sta
202EH Logic Bit0:En_Alm_ROV_Sta
settings Bit1:En_Trp_ROV_Sta
Bit2:En_Alm_V3rdHRatio_Sta
Bit3:En_Alm_V3rdHDiff_Sta
Bit4:En_Trp_V3rdHRatio_Sta
Bit5:En_Trp_InsensRov_Sta
9.4.4.3.6 RotWdg EF Prot Settings

202FH R_Sens1PEF_RotWdg (2 decimal places) kΩ
2030H R_1PEF_RotWdg (2 decimal places) kΩ
2031H t_1PEF_RotWdg (2 decimal places) S
2032H V2ndH_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg (2 decimal places) v
2033H t_2PEF_RotWdg (2 decimal places) S
2034H TrpLog_EF_RotWdg
2035H Logic Bit0:En_Alm_Sens1PEF_RotWdg
settings Bit1:En_Alm_1PEF_RotWdg
Bit2:En_Trp_1PEF_RotWdg

Bit3:En_2PEF_RotWdg
Bit4:En_VCE_2PEF_RotWdg
9.4.4.3.7 Sta OvLd Prot Settings

2036H I_OvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) A
2037H t_OvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) S
2038H TrpLog_OvLd_Sta
2039H I_Alm_OvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) A
203AH t_Alm_OvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) S
203BH I_InvOvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) A
203CH tmin_InvOvLd_Sta (2 decimal places) S
203DH A_Therm_Sta (2 decimal places)
203EH K_Disspt_Sta (2 decimal places)
203FH TrpLog_InvOvLd_Sta
9.4.4.3.8 Gen NegOC Prot Settings

2040H I_NegOC1_Gen (2 decimal places) A
2041H t_NegOC1_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2042H TrpLog_NegOC1_Gen
2043H I_NegOC2_Gen (2 decimal places) A
2044H t_NegOC2_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2045H TrpLog_NegOC2_Gen
2046H I_Alm_NegOC_Gen (2 decimal places) A
2047H t_Alm_NegOC_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2048H I_InvNegOC_Gen (2 decimal places) A
2049H I_Neg_Perm_Gen (2 decimal places) A
204AH tmin_InvNegOC_Gen (2 decimal places) S
204BH A_Therm_RotBody (2 decimal places)
204CH TrpLog_InvNegOC_Gen
9.4.4.3.9 Gen LossExc Prot Settings

204DH X1_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
204EH X2_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
204FH Q_RevQ_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) %
2050H V_RotUV_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2051H Un_RotNoLoad_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2052H k_RotUV_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places)
2053H V_UV_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2054H P_OvPwr_LossExc_Gen (2 decimal places) %
2055H t_LossExc1_Gen (2 decimal places) S

2056H t_LossExc2_Gen (2 decimal places) S

2057H t_LossExc3_Gen (1 decimal place) S
2058H TrpLog_LossExc1_Gen
2059H TrpLog_LossExc2_Gen
205AH TrpLog_LossExc3_Gen
205BH Logic Bit0:En_Z_LossExc1_Gen
settings Bit1:En_RotUV_LossExc1_Gen
Bit2:En_P_LossExc1_Gen
Bit3:En_UV_LossExc2_Gen
Bit4:En_Z_LossExc2_Gen
Bit5:En_RotUV_LossExc2_Gen
Bit6:En_Z_LossExc3_Gen
Bit7:En_RotUV_LossExc3_Gen
Bit8:En_Alm_LossExc1_Gen
Bit9:Opt_Z_LossExc_Gen
Bit10:En_RevQ_LossExc_Gen
Bit11:Opt_UV_LossExc_Gen
9.4.4.3.10 Gen OOS Prot Settings

205CH Za_OOS_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
205DH Zb_OOS_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
205EH Zc_OOS_Gen (2 decimal places) Ω
205FH φ_Reach_OOS_Gen (2 decimal places) °
2060H φ_Inner_OOS_Gen (2 decimal places) °
2061H n_Slip_Ext_OOS_Gen (integer)
2062H n_Slip_Int_OOS_Gen (integer)
2063H Ibrk_GCB (2 decimal places) A
2064H TrpLog_OOS_Gen
2065H Logic Bit0:En_Alm_Ext_OOS_Gen
settings Bit1:En_Trp_Ext_OOS_Gen
Bit2:En_Alm_Int_OOS_Gen
Bit3:En_Trp_Int_OOS_Gen
9.4.4.3.11 Gen Volt Prot Settings

2066H V_OV1_Gen (2 decimal places) V
2067H t_OV1_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2068H TrpLog_OV1_Gen
2069H V_OV2_Gen (2 decimal places) V
206AH t_OV2_Gen (2 decimal places) S
206BH TrpLog_OV2_Gen
206CH V_UV_Gen (2 decimal places) V

206DH t_UV_Gen (2 decimal places) S

206EH TrpLog_UV_Gen
9.4.4.3.12 Gen OvExc Prot Settings

206FH k_OvExc1_Gen (2 decimal places)
2070H t_OvExc1_Gen (1 decimal place) S
2071H TrpLog_OvExc1_Gen
2072H k_OvExc2_Gen (2 decimal places)
2073H t_OvExc2_Gen (1 decimal place) S
2074H TrpLog_OvExc2_Gen
2075H k_Alm_OvExc_Gen (2 decimal places)
2076H t_Alm_OvExc_Gen (1 decimal place) S
2077H k0_InvOvExc_Gen (2 decimal places)
2078H t0_InvOvExc_Gen (1 decimal place) S
207AH t1_InvOvExc_Gen (1 decimal place) S
207BH k2_InvOvExc_Gen (2 decimal places)
207CH t2_InvOvExc_Gen (1 decimal place) S
207DH k3_InvOvExc_Gen (2 decimal places)
207EH t3_InvOvExc_Gen (1 decimal place) S
207FH k4_InvOvExc_Gen (2 decimal places)
2087H TrpLog_InvOvExc_Gen
9.4.4.3.13 Gen Pwr Prot Settings

2088H P_RevP_Gen (2 decimal places) %
2089H t_Alm_RevP_Gen (1 decimal place) S
208AH t_Trp_RevP_Gen (1 decimal place) S
208BH TrpLog_RevP_Gen
208CH P_SeqTrpRevP_Gen (2 decimal places) %
208DH t_SeqTrpRevP_Gen (2 decimal places) S
208EH TrpLog_SeqTrp_RevP_Gen
9.4.4.3.14 Gen Freq Prot Settings

208FH f_UF1_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz

2090H t_Accu_UF1_Gen (2 decimal places) M
2091H f_UF2_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz
2092H t_UF2_Gen (2 decimal places) M
2093H f_UF3_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz
2094H t_UF3_Gen (2 decimal places) S
2095H TrpLog_UF_Gen
2096H f_OF1_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz
2097H t_OF1_Gen (2 decimal places) M
2098H f_OF2_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz
2099H t_OF2_Gen (2 decimal places) S
209AH TrpLog_OF_Gen
209BH Logic Bit0:En_Alm_UF1_Gen
settings Bit1:Unused_Bit
Bit2:En_Trp_UF1_Gen
Bit3:Unused_Bit
Bit4:En_Alm_UF2_Gen
Bit5:En_Trp_UF2_Gen
Bit6:En_Alm_UF3_Gen
Bit7:En_Trp_UF3_Gen
Bit8:En_Alm_OF1_Gen
Bit9:En_Trp_OF1_Gen
Bit10:En_Alm_OF2_Gen
Bit11:En_Trp_OF2_Gen
9.4.4.3.15 Gen StShut Prot Settings

209CH f_UF_StShut_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz
209DH I_GenDiff_StShut_Gen (2 decimal places) Ie
209EH TrpLog_Diff_StShut_Gen
209FH I_UFOC_StShut_Gen (2 decimal places) A
20A0H t_UFOC_StShut_Gen (2 decimal places) S
20A1H TrpLog_OC_StShut_Gen
20A2H V_StaROV_StShut_Gen (2 decimal places) V
20A3H t_StaROV_StShut_Gen (2 decimal places) S
20A4H TrpLog_StaROV_StShut_Gen
20A5H Logic Bit0:En_GenDiff_StShut_Gen
settings Bit1:En_UFOC_StShut_Gen
Bit2:En_StaROV_StShut_Gen
9.4.4.3.16 Gen AccEnerg Prot Settings

20A6H f_UF_AccEnerg_Gen (2 decimal places) Hz

20A7H I_OC_AccEnerg_Gen (2 decimal places) A

20A8H t_AccEnerg_Gen (2 decimal places) S
20A9H TrpLog_AccEnerg_Gen
20AAH I_NegOC_Flash_GCB (2 decimal places) A
20ABH t_Flash11_GCB (2 decimal places) S
20ACH TrpLog_Flash11_GCB
20ADH t_Flash12_GCB (2 decimal places) S
20AEH TrpLog_Flash12_GCB
20AFH Logic Bit0:En_UF_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen
settings Bit1:En_CB_Ctrl_AccEnerg_Gen
9.4.4.3.17 GCB BFP Settings

20B0H I_BFP_GCB (2 decimal places) A
20B1H I_ROC_BFP_GCB (2 decimal places) A
20B2H I_NegOC_BFP_GCB (2 decimal places) A
20B3H t_BFP11_GCB (2 decimal places) S
20B4H TrpLog_BFP11_GCB
20B5H t_BFP12_GCB (2 decimal places) S
20B6H TrpLog_BFP12_GCB
20B7H Logic Bit0:En_ROC_BFP_GCB
settings Bit1:En_NegOC_BFP_GCB
Bit2:En_ExtTrpCtrlBFP_GCB
Bit3:En_CB_Ctrl_BFP_GCB
9.4.4.3.18 Exc Diff Prot Settings

20B8H I_Pkp_PcntDiff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
20B9H I_InstDiff_Exc (2 decimal places) Ie
20BAH Slope1_PcntDiff_Exc (2 decimal places)
20BBH Slope2_PcntDiff_Exc (2 decimal places)
20BCH k_Harm_PcntDiff_Exc (2 decimal places)
20BDH TrpLog_Diff_Exc
20BEH Logic Bit0:En_InstDiff_Exc
settings Bit1:En_PcntDiff_Exc
Bit2:Opt_Inrush_Ident_Exc
Bit3:Opt_CTS_Blk_PcntDiff_Exc
9.4.4.3.19 Exc Bak Prot Settings

20BFH I_OC1_Exc (2 decimal places) A
20C0H t_OC1_Exc (2 decimal places) S
20C1H TrpLog_OC1_Exc

20C2H I_OC2_Exc (2 decimal places) A

20C3H t_OC2_Exc (2 decimal places) S
20C4H TrpLog_OC2_Exc
9.4.4.3.20 RotWdg OvLd Prot Settings

20C5H I_OvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) A
20C6H t_OvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) S
20C7H TrpLog_OvLd_RotWdg
20C8H I_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) A
20C9H t_Alm_OvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) S
20CAH I_InvOvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) A
20CBH tmin_InvOvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) S
20CCH A_Therm_RotWdg (2 decimal places)
20CDH Ib_InvOvLd_RotWdg (2 decimal places) A
20CEH TrpLog_InvOvLd_RotWdg
20CFH Logic Bit0:Opt_AC_Input_RotWdg
settings Bit1:Opt_DC_Input_RotWdg
Bit2:Opt_AC_Input_S1_RotWdg
Bit3:Opt_AC_Input_S2_RotWdg
9.4.4.3.21 MechRly Prot Settings

20D0H t_MechRly1 (1 decimal place) S
20D1H TrpLog_MechRly1
9.4.5 Diagnostics (Function Code: 08H)

Modbus function 08 provides a series of tests for checking the communication system between the
master and slave, or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave.
The function uses a two–byte subfunction code field in the query to define the type of test to be
performed. The slave echoes both the function code and subfunction code in a normal response.
The listing below shows the subfunction codes supported by the equipment.
Code Name 04H Force Listen Only Mode

00H Return Query Data 0BH Return Bus Message Count
01H Restart Comm Option 0CH Return Bus Comm. Error Count

0DH Return Bus Exception Error Cnt 0FH Return Slave No Response Cnt
0EH Return Slave Message Count
9.4.6 Exception Responses
Except for broadcast messages, when a master device sends a query to a slave device it expects
a normal response but If the slave receives the query without a communication error, but cannot
handle it (for example, if the request is to read a non–existent coil or register), the slave will return
an exception response informing the master of the nature of the error.
The listing below shows the exception codes supported by the equipment.
Code Description 03H Illegal Data Value

01H Illegal Function 07H Negative Acknowledge
02H Illegal Data Address
9.5 EIA(RS)232 Interface

The front communication port is provided by a DB9 female D-type connector located under the
small hinged cover on the front panel. It provides RS232 serial data communication and is
intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance). This port supports the courier
communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by NR to allow
communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use
with relays settings program RCSPC which is a Windows-based software package.
The pin connections of relay‘s DB9 front port are as follows:
Pin No.2 Tx Transmit data
Pin No.3 Rx Receive data
Pin No.5 common
None of the other pins are connected in the relays. The relays should be connected to the serial
port of a PC, usually called as COM1 or COM2. The serial port pin connections, which is DB9 male,
is described below (if in doubt check you PC manual):
Pin No.2 Rx Transmit data
Pin No.3 Tx Receive data
Pin No.5 common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relays must be connected to the Rx pin on
the PC, and Rx pin on the relay must be connected to Tx pin on the PC as shown in Figure 9.5-1.
Note:
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 9600 bps.

9 pin front communication port
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8
serial communication port

(COM1 or COM2) of local PC
Figure 9.5-1 Rs232 Faceplate Port Connection
9.6 Communication with printer

When communicating locally with a printer using the rear series port, a special connection cable is
necessary which is provided by manufacturer of the equipment.
There are no parameters needed to be set in RCS-985G for communication with the printer.
The printer‘s port used for communication with RCS-985G is a serial port of which the pin
definition is a little different with normal RS232 port as shown as below:
9 pin front communication port
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
serial communication port

( COM1 or COM2) of local PC
Figure 9.6-1 Rs232 Faceplate Port Connection
9.7 Communication with External GPS pulse Source

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

---Event recording
---Fault recording
---Present recording
---Self-supervision
When the relays are connected to the GPS clock, all the relay clocks are synchronized with the
external time standard. There are two way to adjust the relay clock.
---Time synchronization via RS-485 serial port
---Time synchronization via binary input


Chapter10 Installation
10.1 Receipt of Relays

Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been
sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport
contractor and NR should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not
intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective bags and delivery carton.
Section 10.3 of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.
10.2 Handling of Electronic Equipment

A person‘s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage that although not always immediately apparent will reduce the
reliability of the circuit. The relay‘s electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge
when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit
boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor
devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit board, the following
precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the relay has
been designed and manufactured.
Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
Handle analog input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the circuit boards.
Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges. Avoid touching the electronic
components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface that is at the same potential
as you.
If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the case, place them
individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.
In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of a
relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist
straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ to 10MΩ. If a wrist strap is not available
you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential.
Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case
whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS EN

100015: Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry
or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the
British Standard document.
10.3 Storage
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from
dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the
packing they should be retained.
To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage, a battery isolation strip is fitted during
manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be
checked by a red tab protruding from the positive polarity side.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust, which has collected on the carton,
does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may become impregnated
with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25°C to +70°C (-13°F to
+158°F).
10.4 Unpacking
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are
damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Ensure that
any User‘s CDROM or technique documentation is NOT discarded – this should accompany the
relay to its destination substation.
Note:
With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip will be seen protruding
from the positive (―+‖) side of the battery compartment. Do not remove this strip because it
prevents battery drain during transportation and storage and will be removed as part of the
commissioning tests. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and
excessive vibration.
10.5 Relay Mounting

RCS-985G is dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays
are normally supplied accompanied with this manual showing the dimensions for panel cutouts
and whole centers. This information can also be found in the product publication.
10.5.1 Rack Mounting

RCS-985G may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames, as illustrated in Figure 10.5-1 and
Figure 10.5-2. The frames must have been designed to have dimensions in accordance with

IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to use. On a standard 483mm rack system this
enables combinations of widths of case up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by
side.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each
end of the tier.
482
285
465
RCS-985G
HEALTHY
VT ALARM
GRP
CT ALARM
ALARM
ENT
ESC
354.8
279.4
76.2
TRIP
Figure 10.5-1 Rack mounting of relays—front face
465
450
279.4
76.2
355
8- ￠6.8
Figure 10.5-2 Rack mounting of relays—rear face

Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (8U) or multi-tier arrangements by means of
the rack frame.
10.5.2 Panel mounting

The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick
washers.
For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a range of collars
are available. Where several relays are mounted in a single cutout in the panel, it is advised that
they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigid assemblies prior
to mounting in the panel.
Note:
It is not advised that RCS-985G be fastened using pop rivets as this will not allow the relay to be
easily removed from the panel in future if repair is necessary.
If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to IEC 60529 IP51 enclosure
protection, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays and a sealing
ring around the complete assembly.
10.6 RELAY WIRING

This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each
terminal on the RCS-985G.
10.6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections

Heavy duty terminal block: CT and VT circuits.
Medium duty: All other terminal blocks.
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted
terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per relay
terminal.
If required, NR can supply M4 90°crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire
size (see Table 10.6-1).
Table 10.6-1 M4 90°crimp ring terminals
Part Number Wire Size Insulation Color

ZB9124 901 0.25 -1.65mm2 (22 - 16AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 -2.63mm2 (16 - 14AWG) Blue
ZB9124 904 2.53 -6.64mm2 (12 - 10AWG) Un-insulated*
*To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve should be

fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:
Current transformers 2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx 1.5mm2
EIA(RS)485 Port See separate section
Other Circuits 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the
medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not pre-insulated.
Where it is required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size that can be
used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size is required, two wires should be
used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay.
The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except the
EIA(RS)485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high rupture
capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits must
never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used.
10.6.2 EIA(RS)485 port

Connections to the EIA(RS)485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a 2
core screened cable be used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nF total cable
capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
Each core: 16/0.2mm copper conductors，PVC insulated

Nominal conductor area: 0.5mm2 per core
Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
10.6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable)

The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50Ω. It is recommended
that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial cable of
type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
10.6.4 EIA(RS)232 front port of downloading/monitoring

Short term connections to the EIA(RS)232 port, located at the bottom of face cover, can be made
using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or of a total capacitance of
2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male
plug. The pin allocations are detailed in section 5.4 about connectors.
10.6.5 Ethernet port (if applicable)

Fiber Optic Port

The relays can have an optional 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet port. FO connection is recommended for
use in permanent connections in a substation environment. The 10Mbit port uses type ST
connector and the 100Mbit port uses type SC connector, both compatible with 850nm multi-mode
fiber-optic cable.
RJ-45 Metallic Port
The user can connect to either a 10Base-T or a 100Base-TX Ethernet hub; the port will
automatically sense which type of hub is connected. Due to possibility of noise and interference on
this part, it is recommended that this connection type be used for short-term connections and over
short distance, ideally where the relays and hubs are located in the same cubicle.
The connector for the Ethernet port is a shielded RJ-45. The table shows the signals and pins on
the connector.
Table 10.6-2 Signals on the Ethernet connector
Pin Signal Name Signal Definition

1 TXP Transmit (positive)
2 TXN Transmit (negative)
3 RXP Receive (positive)
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 RXN Receive (negative)
7 - Not used
8 - Not used
10.6.6 Test port

Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located on the front access cover, can be
made using a screened 9-core communication cable up to 4m long. The cable should be
terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug and linked as a serial
data connection.
10.6.7 Earth connection

Every relay must be connected to the cubicle earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the rear
faceplate of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is 2.5mm2 and should have a
ring terminal at the relay end.

Chapter11 Commission
11.1 Introduction
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the event of a
failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is
considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one
of the following methods:
- extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software (preferred method)
- via the operator interface
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
WARNING!
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment‘s rating label.
11.2 Precautions
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non - observance of
the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this manual as well as with the applicable safety
regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage
(storage capacitors!).

The limit values stated in the technical data (Chapter 2) must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement
quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and maybe also close
commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device
unless expressly stated.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before the current leads to
the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules and regulations
(switching, earthing, etc.)
11.3 Relay commission tools

Minimum equipment required
--Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer
--Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0-200V and 0-250V
respectively.
--Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter)
--Phase angle meter
--Phase rotation meter
Note:
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment
--An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V (for insulation
resistance test when required);
--A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be tested,
if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
--RCSPC software.
--EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter (if EIA(RS)485 IEC60870 port is being tested).

-- A printer.
- RCS-900 serials dedicated protection tester TEST or HELP-90.
11.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning a RCS-985G relay for the first time, sufficient time should be given to
become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. The Chapter 8 contains a
detailed description of the menu structure of RCS-985G relays.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms
can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records
cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be entered before changes
can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as RCSPC),
the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC
software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference
or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the
software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
11.5 Product checks

These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow restoration later. This can be done by
extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
11.5.1 With the relay de-energized

The RCS-985 serial plant transformer protection is fully numerical and the hardware is
continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include
hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function tests are carried out according to user‘s
correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into use.
 Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there are no hardware
defects. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test

 AC input circuits test
 Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Metering and recording test
 Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On-load test
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.
11.5.1.1 Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. Following items listed is
necessary.
1. Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
2. Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire used in the panel to assure that their cross section meets the
requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
3. Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
4. Equipment plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

1 1 1 1
A A B B
2 2 2 2
A A B B
3 3 3 3
A A B B
4 4 4 4
A A B B
5 5
B B
6 6
B B
7 7
B B
8 8 8 8
B B C C
9 9 9 9
B B C C
Figure 11.5-1 RCS-985G rear plug-in connector locations(viewed from rear)
5. Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
6. Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button:
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
11.5.1.2 Insulation
Insulation resistances tests are only necessary during commission if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily
connected together.
The main groups of the relay terminals are:
-Voltage transformer circuits
-Current transformer circuits
-Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs

-Relay contacts
-EIA(RS)485 communication port
-Case earth
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V. On completion of the insulation
resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the relay.
11.5.1.3 External wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer‘s normal practice.
11.5.1.4 Auxiliary supply
The relay can be operated from either 110/125Vdc or 220/250Vdc auxiliary supply depending on
the relay‘s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range
specified in the following table, before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure
it is within the operating range.
Rated Voltage 110/125VDC 220/250VDC
Variation 88 - 144 VDC 176 - 288 VDC
It should be noted that the relay can withstand an AC ripple of up to 15% of the upper rated voltage
on the DC auxiliary supply.
Energize the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges.
11.5.2 With the relay energized

The following groups of tests verify that the protection hardware and software is functioning
correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the protection.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the protection for
these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
11.5.2.1 User interface
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
◆ LCD display
Only apply the rated DC voltage and check whether the LCD displays normal operation status
report as mentioned earlier. If there is a failure, for example, if the VT circuit fails because of not
applying the voltage, the LCD displays failure report. On pressing the ECS key for 1 second and
the LCD will return to normal operation status report.

◆ LED display
Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "HEALTHY" LED is lit in green. We need to
emphasize that the "HEALTHY" LED is always lit in operation course except when the equipment
finds serious problems listed in chapter 4.
◆ Keypad
Press key ―ESC‖ or ―▲‖and enter the command menu. Do some jobs to ensure that all buttons are
in good condition.
11.5.2.2 Watchdog contacts (Equipment being blocked, BSJ)
Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts (equipment being blocked, BSJ) are in
the states given in Table 11.5-1 below.
Table 11.5-1 Watchdog contact status
Terminals Contacts
Relay de-energized Relay energized
3A1-3A3 Closed Open
3A2-3A4
3B4-3B26
11.5.2.3 Date and time
The method of setting will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the RS-485 port
(from GPS in the substation) on the rear of the protection or via the front panel user interface
manually.
Turn on the DC power supply of the equipment and check the software version and time through
the LCD Manual.
11.5.2.4 Binary input check
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the protection are functioning correctly. The binary
inputs should be energized one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the field supply
voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
There two voltage levels of opto-couple for binary inputs, one is 24V DC and the other is
250/220/125/110V DC. The negative pole of DC 24V and negative pole of DC 250/220/125/110V
have been connected with the corresponding negative pole of opto-couplers through the inner rear
board in equipment. The positive pole terminals of opto-couplers have been connected to the rear
connectors for binary input connecting, and common positive pole has also be connected to the
rear connector.
Please see the panel diagram carefully and find the right connector terminal numbers of common
positive pole of DC 24V and DC 250/220/125/110V.
Note:

The binary inputs may be energized from an external DC auxiliary supply (e.g. the station battery)
in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage otherwise
damage to the protection may result. The status of each binary input can be viewed using either
RCSPC software installed in a portable PC or by checking the front human-machine interface LCD.
When each binary input is energized the display will change to indicate the new status of the
inputs. Please check binary input both on CPU module and MON module and ensure they are
consistent.
Please note only the positive pole of opto-coupler for binary inputs are listed in following tables.
1) Generator protection contacts(24V opto-couplers)
Path: Main Menu -> VALUES-> CPU(MON) BI STATE ->GEN PROT EBI
No. Signal name Equipment Wiring CPU MON

terminal number connector number status status
1 EBI_Diff_Gen 4B29-4B3
2 EBI_SPTDiff_Gen 4B29-4B26
3 EBI_PPF_Gen 4B29-4B25
4 EBI_IntTurn_Gen 4B29-4B4
5 EBI_BFP_Gen 5B17-5B2
6 EBI_ROV_Sta 4B29-4B5
7 EBI_V3rdH_Sta 4B29-4B6
8 EBI_1PEF_RotWdg 4B29-4B7
9 EBI_2PEF_RotWdg 4B29-4B8
10 EBI_OvLd_Sta 4B29-4B9
11 EBI_NegOC_Gen 4B29-4B10
12 EBI_LossExc_Gen 4B29-4B11
13 EBI_OOS_Gen 4B29-4B12
14 EBI_VoltProt_Gen 4B29-4B13
15 EBI_OvExc_Gen 4B29-4B14
16 EBI_PwrProt_Gen 4B29-4B15
17 EBI_FreqProt_Gen 4B29-4B16
18 EBI_AccEnerg_Gen 4B29-4B17
19 EBI_SeqTrpRevP_Gen 5B17-5B3
20 EBI_StShut_Gen 4B29-4B18
2) Exciter protection contacts(24V opto-couplers)
Path: Main Menu -> VALUES-> CPU(MON) BI STATE ->EXC PROT EBI

1 EBI_Diff_Exc 4B29-4B19
2 EBI_Bak_Exc 4B29-4B20

3 EBI_OvLd_Exc 5B17-5B1
3) Mechanical protection contacts(220/110V opto-couplers)
Path: Main Menu -> VALUES-> CPU(MON) BI STATE ->MECH RLY EBI

1 EBI_Trp_MechRly3 4B29-4B21
5 BI_MechRly 3 4A27-4A17
4) Auxiliary binary inputs (220/110V opto-couplers)
Path: Main Menu -> VALUES-> CPU(MON) BI STATE -> AUX BI

1 BI_52b_GCB 4A27-4A22
2 BI_Valve_Turbine 4A27-4A26
3 BI_UrgBrake 5B25-5B19
4 BI_SyncCondenser 5B25-5B20
5 BI_ExtTrpCtrl_BFP_Gen 5B25-5B22
6 BI_Pwr_Superv 5B25-5B23
4) Binary inputs for power supply supervise (24V opto-couplers)
Path: Main Menu -> VALUES-> CPU(MON) BI STATE -> PS SUPERV BI

1 BI_Print 5B17-5B13
2 BI_Pulse_GPS 5B17-5B14
3 BI_RstTarg 5B17-5B15
11.5.2.5 Binary output check
◆ Check alarm signal contacts
When detecting a hardware failure in self-supervise, the relay will block all the output and the
―HEALTY‖ LED will not be lit.
If the entire operation element for alarm operates, the ―ALARM‖ LED will illuminate. At the same

time, the BJJ contact and other alarm contacts will be closed. According to the below table we can
check these contacts.
No Signal name Local signal Remote signal SOE signal Yes or NO

1 BO_FAIL 3A1-3A3 3A2-3A4 3B4-3B26
2 BO_ALM 3A1-3A5 3A2-3A6 3B4-3B28
3 BO_CTS 3A1-3A7 3A2-3A8 3B4-3B6
4 BO_VTS 3A1-3A9 3A2-3A10 3B4-3B8
5 BO_OvLd 3A1-3A11 3A2-3A12 3B4-3B10
6 BO_NegOC 3A1-3A13 3A2-3A14 3B4-3B12
7 BO_OvLd_Exc 3A1-3A15 3A2-3A16 3B4-3B14
8 BO_EF_Sta 3A1-3A17 3A2-3A18 3B4-3B16
9 BO_Alm_1PEF_Gen 3A1-3A19 3A2-3A20 3B4-3B18
10 BO_LossExc_Gen 3A1-3A21 3A2-3A22 3B4-3B20
11 BO_OOS_Gen 3A1-3A23 3A2-3A24 3B4-3B22
12 BO_UF_Gen 3A1-3A25 3A2-3A26 3B4-3B24
13 BO_RevP_Gen 3A1-3A27 3A2-3A28 3B4-3B29
14 BO_OvExc_Gen 3A1-3A29 3A2-3A30 3B4-3B30
◆Check tripping signal contacts
If the operation element for tripping operates, the ―TRIP‖ LED will illuminate. At the same time, the
tripping signal contacts will be closed. According to the below table we can check these contacts.
No Signal name Local signal Remote signal SOE signal Yes or NO

The first group:
1 BO_Diff_Gen 2A1-2A7 2A3-2A9 2A5-2A11
2 BO_EF_Sta 2A1-2A13 2A3-2A15 2A5-2A17
3 BO_OvLd_Sta 2A1-2A19 2A3-2A21 2A5-2A23
4 BO_LossExc_Gen 2A1-2A25 2A3-2A27 2A5-2A29
5 BO_OV_Gen 2A1-2B1 2A3-2B3 2A5-2B5
6 BO_RevPwr_Gen 2A1-2B7 2A3-2B9 2A5-2B11
7 BO_UF _Gen 2A1-2B13 2A3-2B15 2A5-2B17
8 BO_AccEnerg_Gen 2A1-2B19 2A3-2B21 2A5-2B23
9 BO_Diff_Exc 2A1-2B25 2A3-2B27 2A5-2B29
The second group:
10 BO_InterTurn_Gen 2A2-2A8 2A4-2A10 2A6-2A12
11 BO_OF_Gen 2A2-2A14 2A4-2A16 2A6-2A18
12 BO_NegOC_Gen 2A2-2A20 2A4-2A22 2A6-2A24
13 BO_OOS_Gen 2A2-2A26 2A4-2A28 2A6-2A30
14 BO_OvExc_Gen 2A2-2B2 2A4-2B4 2A6-2B6
15 BO_SeqTrpPwr_Gen 2A2-2B8 2A4-2B10 2A6-2B12

16 BO_Bak_Gen 2A2-2B14 2A4-2B16 2A6-2B18

17 BO_Trp_MechRly 2A2-2B20 2A4-2B22 2A6-2B24
18 BO_Bak_Exc 2A2-2B26 2A4-2B28 2A6-2B30
◆Check tripping output contacts
Setting the tripping logic settings refer to table 5-1. The output x will be closed only when the
correspond bit [Output x] is set as ―1‖. According to the below table we can check these contacts.
No Output name Equipment Wiring Yes or No

terminal number connector number
1 TrpOutput 1 1A3-1A5、1A7-1A9
1A11-1A13、1A15-1A17
2 TrpOutput 2 1A19-1A21、1A23-1A25
1A27-1A29、1B1-1B3
3 TrpOutput 3 1A2-1A4、1A6-1A8
1A10-1A12、1A14-1A16
4 TrpOutput 4 1A18-1A20、1A22-1A24
5 TrpOutput 5 1A26-1A28、1B2-1B4
1B6-1B8、1B10-1B12
6 TrpOutput 6 1B5-1B7、1B9-1B11
1B13-1B15
7 TrpOutput 7 1B17-1B19
11 TrpOutput 11 1B14-1B16、1B18-1B20
12 TrpOutput 12 1B22-1B24、1B26-1B28
11.5.2.6 Communications port
This test should only be performed where the protection is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the
remote location, just the protection‘s rear communications port and any protocol converter
necessary.
Courier communications
Ensure that the RS-232 wire link the RS-232 port in front of the RCS-985G and the communication
baud rate in RCSPC must be set as ―9600‖.
Check that communications can be established with this protection using the portable PC.
Remote communication
This test is to check the status of communications between RCS-985G and the engineer‘s

workstation in SAS (Substation automation system) if it is applicable. Before test, the

communication baud rate in RCS-985G must be set as ―1200-38400‖ depending on the Substation
Automation System, and the protection‘s [Comm_Adrr] must be set to a value between 1 and 254.
In the menu of ―DEBUG‖->‖COMM STATUS‖ on the LCD display, ―485A‖or ―485B‖ indicates the
communication status of 485A port or 485B port. If ―Receive Data‖ is ―N‖, it means the equipment
has not received data from the external system. If ―Valid Frame‖ is ‗N‘, it indicates the setting error
of baud rate or protocol while ―Valid Address‖ is ―N‖, it means the communication address is set
wrongly. ‖Send Data‖ is "N‖ means datagram sent from the equipment is wrong. If all those status
are ‗Y‘, it means communication is established successfully.
11.5.2.7 AC Current inputs check
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
All protections will leave the factory with setting for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz or
60Hz.
All relays will be set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If operation at 60Hz is required
then this must be set at menu.
Apply current equal to the current transformer secondary winding rating to each current
transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, see the following table or external connection
diagram for appropriate terminal numbers, checking its magnitude using a multimeter/test set
readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays‘ menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±5%. However an additional allowance must be made
for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Table 11.5-2 Current linearity and precision check out
No. Items Input Displayed on LCD

value Phase A Phase B Phase C Angle Angle
between A between
and B A and C
1 I_S1_Exc In
4In
2 I_S2_Exc In
4In
3 I_Term_Gen In
4In
4 I_NP_Gen In
4In
5 Itransv In *******************
4In *******************
6 I_Rot 20mA *******************
40mA *******************
Note:

To avoid damage the equipment, we can‘t inject a high value current (such as 4In or more) to the
equipment for long time, we suggest that the time in high current condition should not be over 3
second every time.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is ± 5%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
11.5.2.8 AC Voltage inputs check
This test only needs to be performed on models with voltage transformer inputs as it verifies that
the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerance levels.
Apply rated voltage to voltage transformer input, checking its magnitude using a multimeter/test
set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±5%. However an additional allowance must be made
for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Table 11.5-3 Voltage linearity and precision check out
Displayed in LCD
Input Angle Angle
No. Items
value PhA PhB PhC between between
A and B A and C
58V
1 U_VT1_Term_Gen
20V
58V
2 U_VT2_Term_Gen
20V
58V
3 U0_DeltVT1_Term_Gen
20V
100V
4 U0_DeltVT2_Term_Gen
20V
100V
5 U0_NP_Gen
20V
100V
6 U_Busbar
20V
7 U_RotWdg (DC) 220V
8 I_RotWdg (DC) 0.075V
Note:
When checking the rotor current channel, 0.075V is equal to 1000A of rotor current, please refer to
section 7.2 [I1n_RotWdg] and [U2n_Shunt_RotWdg]
The measurement accuracy of the protection is ±5%. However, an additional allowance must be

made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
11.5.3 Setting Testing

The setting checks ensure that the entire application-specific relay, for the particular installation,
has been correctly applied to the relay.
Note:
The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 11.5.3.
Apply application-specific settings
There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay:
Transfer them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the
appropriate software via the relay‘s RS232 port located on the frontplate of the relay. This method
is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less possiblity for
error.
Enter them manually via the relay‘s operator interface.
Demonstrate correct relay operation
Tests mentioned above have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, thus the
purpose of these tests is as follows:
− To determine that the primary protection functions, such as generator differential protection,
overcurrent protection and so on, can trip according to the correct application settings.
− To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to a selection of
fault injections.
11.5.4 Rear communications port EIA (RS) 485

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and
will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intension of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the
remote location, just the relay‘s rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
Connect a portable PC to the relay via a EIA (RS) 485-232 converter. Ensure that the relay
address and the baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as those in relay.
If the relay has the optional fiber optic communications port, then a fibre optic-RS232 converter
shall be applied.
11.5.5 On-load checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are to:

-Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
-Check the polarity of the current transformers at each side is consistent.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform
any the foregoing tests. It should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Voltage connections
Using a multimeter to measure the voltage generator secondary voltages to ensure they are
correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter.
Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the relays measured values, which can
be found in the menu.
Current connections
Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter connected in
series with the corresponding current input. (It is preferable to use a tong-test ammeter instead)
Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle between
the current and voltage either against a phase meter already installed on site and known to be
correct or by determining the direction of power flow by contacting the networks control center
(NCC).
Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the relay‘s measured
values, which can be found in menu.
11.5.6 Final check

The tests are now complete.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any
of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it
should be ensured that all connections (wiring, fuses and links) are replaced in accordance
with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been
reset before leaving the relay.
11.6 Use of assistant test software RCSPC

11.6.1 Function summary of RCSPC communication software
RCSPC configuration and testing program (user version) is developed for the user to configure,
test and maintain RCS-985G generator protection equipment on site.
It comprises of four parts: sampled value display, settings reading and modification, report process
and test. These four parts correspond to 4 files RCS-985G_status, RCS-985G_set,

RCS-985G_rpt and RCS-985G_tst respectively and are described hereinafter. We have to say
that the four configuration file is relevant with a special version of protection program. That is,
when the protection program is upgraded, the above mentioned four configuration files must also
be upgrade at the same time; otherwise it may cause confusion to the equipment at the time of
setting.
Connect RS-232 communication port of the computer and that of RCS-985G protection equipment
by a cable with DB-9 connectors on both ends. Run the program RCSPC. If the connection is
correct, the screen will show ―RCS-985G connected‖, see Figure 11.6-1. Even if the computer is
off line, this picture will be still shown but the words about connection will disappear.
Figure 11.6-1 Display of connection status of RCSPC with RCS-985G
11.6.2 Connection way of protection equipment and personal computer

A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay‘s front panel for communication with a personal
computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the RCSPC
software provided with the equipment. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure
for 9 pin connectors.
Figure 11.6-2 Definition of RS-232 wiring cable
11.6.3 Configuration of PC and the software before use
11.6.3.1 PC configuration
Set the PC com port‘s baud rate which is connected with front series port of RCS-985G as
9600bps.

11.6.3.2 Software configuration
There are 3 bars on top of the screen, from top to bottom: title bar, menu bar and tool bar, see
Figure 11.6-3.
Figure 11.6-3 Title bar, menu bar and tool bar
First, click the first button of tool bar parameter, dialog box of communication parameters is
displayed, see Figure 11.6-4. Only the parameter of [COM port] shall be configured as the port of
computer which is actually connected with the equipment, all other parameters shall be configured
as the same as displayed in Figure 11.6-4.
Figure 11.6-4 Dialog box of communication Parameters
11.6.4 Operation instruction of the software

Here is only a brief description of usage. Please refer to dedicated manual of RCSPC for more
details.
11.6.4.1 Protection parameters setting
Offline protection parameters setting—A convenient function of the software
This function is used for offline parameter setting. First, input setting parameters and save it in PC,

then connect PC with the protection equipment, executive ―DOWNLOAD‖ command, and the
settings saved in PC will be transferred to the protection equipment, so most parts of the setting
operation can be finished in office instead of in substation.
Here is the procedure to input settings offline:
Before connecting PC with RCS-985G, run the software of RCSPC，click on ―setting‖ icon, a popup
dialog box will appear which will ask user whether or not to set parameter offline, click ―yes‖ and
input ―985Gxxx‖ (xxx represents program version, point ignored) to confirm the relay type and
version of the protection program, then parameter setting interface will appear. The settings
displayed first are default settings; user can replace them with application-specific settings. After
modifications, save the settings into a file. When the PC is connected with the protection
equipment, open the settings file and transfer setting to protection.
Online setting by RCSPC
When PC is connecting with RCS-985G, run RCSPC, the PC screen will display ―RCS-985Gxxx
connected‖, click on ―SETTING‖ icon, then parameter setting interface will appear, the settings
uploaded from RCS-985G will be displayed, user can modify them to application-specific settings.
11.6.4.2 Status
Click button, user can observe real time sampled data and binary input status.
11.6.4.3 Report
Click button, entering report view part of the program, choose a report in the table, and click
―report record‖, save report data according to following clue on instruction. The data can be used
in the auxiliary analyze software to show us the fault course of power system and the logic
calculation course of RCS-985G again.
11.6.4.4 SIG RESET
Click button, all magnetic latched output relays and signal relays will be reset.
11.6.4.5 Trip test (if available)
Click button, entering trip test part of the program, click contacts to change the status of
relays displayed, a same operation command to breaker circuit will be issued. This function is
used to test breaker circuit without applying electric quantities to the protection equipment.

Chapter12 Maintenance
12.1 Maintenance period

It is recommended that products supplied by NR receive periodic monitoring after installation. In
view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to
confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.
NR protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 10 years.
RCS series relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of
relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some
periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external
wiring is intact.
12.2 Maintenance checks

Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilizing the
communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay
is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately. Therefore it is recommended that
maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself).
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety and technique Data sections and the ratings on the equipment‘s
rating label.
12.2.1 Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, try to
find the cause of the alarm and eliminate it and clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
12.2.2 Binary Inputs

The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their energization.
12.2.3 Binary output

The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the commissioning
test.
12.2.4 Analog inputs

If the power system is energized, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known
system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are, then
the analog/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly by the relay.
Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into
the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals. Suitable test
methods can be found in relevant manuals. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being

maintained.
12.3 Method of Repair

If the relay would develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the
watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive
use of surface-mount components, faulty PCBs should be replaced, as it is not possible to perform
repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the
in-built diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can be found
in section 12.3.2.
The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal circuitry is
protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times and overcomes the
possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs.
Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site and higher
skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not performed by an
approved service center, the warranty will be invalidated.
Safety and technique Data sections and the ratings on the equipment‘s rating label. This should
ensure that no damage is caused by incorrect handling of the electronic components.
12.3.1 Replacing the complete relay

The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the complete relay
without having to disconnect the scheme wiring.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the relay.
Note:
The RCS serials relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when
the connecting terminal is removed.
Disconnect the relay earth, IRIG-B and fiber optic connections, as appropriate, from the rear of the
relay.
Note:
The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the risk of the screws
being left in the terminal block or lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away
from their internal connectors.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the
larger diameter heads on front of the faceplate of the relay.
Withdraw the relay carefully from the panel, rack, etc. because it will be heavy due to the internal

transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring
that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth, and fiber optic
connections are replaced.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be re-commissioned using the instructions in
Chapter11 of this manual.
12.3.2 Replacing a PCB

Replacing printed circuit boards and other internal components of protective relays must be
undertaken only by Service Centers approved by NR. Failure to obtain the authorization of NR
After Sales Engineers prior to commencing work may invalidate the product warranty.
Before replacing a PCB the auxiliary supply must be removed, and wait 5s for capacitors to
discharge. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current transformer connections
and trip circuit are isolated.
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules
must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots.
Figure 12.3-1 RCS-985G Module Withdrawal/Insertion
NR Support teams are available world-wide, and it is strongly recommended that any repairs be
entrusted to those trained personnel. For this reason, details on product disassembly and
re-assembly are not included here.
12.4 Changing the relay battery

Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply
voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and disturbance records.
This battery will periodically need changing. If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be

maintained during an interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to
remove the battery.
safety and technique data sections and the ratings on the equipment‘s rating label.
12.4.1 Instructions for replacing the battery

Withdraw the CPU board from RCS-985G.
Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small, insulated screwdriver to prize
the battery free.
Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust.
The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder,
taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the
socket as shown as below.
Note:
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making
good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.
Insert the CPU module into RCS-985G.
12.4.2 Battery disposal

The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal
procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
12.5 Cleaning
Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all AC and DC supplies, current transformer and
voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst
cleaning.
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth moistened with clean water. The use of
detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not recommended as they may damage the relay‘s
surface and leave a conductive residue.

Chapter13 Decommissioning and Disposal
13.1 Decommissioning
13.1.1 Switching Off
To switch off the RCS-985G, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
13.1.2 Disconnecting Cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
DANGER: Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC
module of the RCS-985G, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the
power supply is switched off.
DANGER: Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module
with the primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and
VTs is switched off.
13.1.3 Dismantling
The RCS-985G rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
DANGER: When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety
distance to live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
13.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
NOTE: Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.


Chapter14 Ordering Form
14.1 Loose equipment

Essential information should be provided when user orders loose equipment, such as:
Equipment type;
Amount of equipment to be ordered;
AC rated current and rated voltage input;
DC power source supply rated voltage;
To be simplified, user can provide such information by finishing the following table and send it to
manufacture.
Table 14.1-1 Ordering information of RCS-985G
NR RCS-985G
Ordering form
Item RCS-985G * * * * * * *
Protective Functions
Standard Configuration
Communication Port
EIA-232 and 2 x EIA-485 A
EIA-232 and 2 x Optical converter B
EIA-232 and 2 x Ethernet*
Rated parameters of AC input module

57.7V/Phase; 1 Amp Phase; 50 Hz 1
57.7V/Phase ; 5 Amp Phase; 50 Hz 3
57.7V/Phase ; 5 Amp Phase; 60 Hz 4
63.5V Phase; 1 Amp Phase; 60 Hz 6
63.5V Phase ; 5 Amp Phase; 50 Hz 7
63.5V Phase ; 5 Amp Phase; 60 Hz 8

Auxiliary Voltage rating

110/125 Vdc 1
220/250 Vdc 2
Binary input power source supply

External 24Vdc 1
External 48Vdc*
External 110/125Vdc 3
External 220/250Vdc 4
Communication medium
Shielded twisted pair wires T
Optical Fiber O
Communication Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 S
MODBUS M
IEC 61850* E
Terminal Type
Jointing Terminal C
Screw terminal Block S
14.2 Panel installed

If user orders panels too, following information in addition to what is mentioned in table 13.1.1
should be provided. Manufacturer should be informed as early as possible if special requirement is
included. The general information includes but not all:
Amount and type of the panels;
Dimension of the panel (standard dimension is 800mm(W)*600mm(D)*2200mm(H));
Color of panel (Inter Grey, Apple green and light camel grey are recommended colors).

Chapter15 Manual version history
In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 R3.12 2010-03-22 Form the original manual.
All the signals and settings have been checked according to
R1.00 R1.01 R3.13 2012-06-13
the software


Chapter16 ANNEX
Chapter16 ANNEX
16.1 Appendix A: RCSPC for RCS-985 (User Version)

16.1.1 General
RCSPC Configuration and testing program (user version) is developed for the user to configure,
test and maintain RCS-985 series protection equipment on site. It comprises four parts: sampled
value display, settings reading and modification, report process and trip test. For RCS-985B, these
four parts correspond to 4 files 985B3YD_status, 985B3YD _set, 985B3YD_rpt and 985B3YD_tst
respectively and are described hereinafter (X represents the special type the protection program,
for example, RCS-985B3YD, here, x represent B3YD).
Connect RS-232 communication port of the computer and that mounted on left side of front panel
of RCS- 985 protection equipment by a cable with DB-9 connectors on both ends. Run the
program RCSPC. If the connection is correct, the screen will display ―RCS-985B3YD connected‖,
see Figure 16.1-1 . Even if the computer is off line, this picture will be still displayed but the words
about connection will disappear.
Figure 16.1-1 RCS-985 being connected
There are 3 bars on top of the screen, from top to bottom: title bar, menu bar and tool bar, see
Figure 16.1-2.
Figure 16.1-2 Title bar, menu bar and tool bar
First, click the first button of tool bar parameter, dialog box of communication parameters is
displayed, see Figure 16.1-3. Only the parameter of ―COM port‖ shall be configured as the number
of port of computer that is actually connected with the equipment, other parameters shall be
configured as the same as displayed values in figure.
The title bar shows only title of the program and needs no explanation. Menu bar and tool bar are
described as follows:

Chapter16 ANNEX
16.1.2 Menu bar

There are five menus in the menu bar: File, Execute, View, Set and Help. Click button of each
menu, items will be pulled down, see Figure 16.1-4. The gray items are used not for the user
version but others.
1) File
There is only one item in pull-down menu File, i.e., Exit. Click Exit(X), the program will be exited.
2) Execute
There are three items in pull-down menu Execute: Setting(E), Download(D) and Trip_Test(T).
Click Setting(E), entering settings reading and modification part of the program, please refer to
section 16.1.3 for details.
Item Download(D) is not used for this program but others.
Click Trip_Test(T), entering trip test part of the program, please refer to section 16.1.5 for details.
3) View
There are five items in pull-down menu View: Toolbar(T), Status(S), Report(L), Status(Z) and
Message(M).
Item Toolbar specifies whether the tool bar shall be displayed. When the tool bar is displayed, a
symbol ―√‖ is put before ―Toolbar (T)‖. If this item is clicked then, the tool bar will be hidden and
the symbol ―√‖ will disappear.
Figure 16.1-3 Dialog box of communication Parameters
Figure 16.1-4 Submenu of menu bar
Item Status(S) specifies whether status bar in the bottom of the picture shall be displayed.

Chapter16 ANNEX
Click Report(L), entering Report treatment part of the program, please refer to section 16.1.4 for
details.
Click Status(Z), entering Sampled value display part of the program, see section 16.1.2 for details
Click Message(M), data flow between RCSPC program and the protection equipment will be
displayed. This is used not for the user version but development version of the program.
4) Set
There are five items in pull-down menu Set: Switch_CPU_MON(P), Parameter(C), Back_color(B),
Font-Color(F) and Font(O).
If there is a symbol ―√‖ before item Switch_CPU_MON(P), that means data acquired by module
CPU are displayed currently, see Figure 16.1-1. If the item Switch_CPU_MON(P) is clicked then,
the data displayed will be changed to those acquired by module MON, see Figure 16.1-5.
Meanwhile, symbol ―√‖ will disappear.
Figure 16.1-5 Switching on data acquired by module MON
Function of item Parameter(C) is the same as the first button of tool bar parameter. Click this
item, dialog box of communication parameters will be displayed, see Figure 16.1-3.
Click Back_Color(B), dialog box of background color is displayed. The user can select preferred
color for background displayed.
Click Font_Color(F), dialog box of font color is displayed. The user can select preferred color for
font displaying.
Click Font(O), dialog box of name, style and size of the font is displayed. The user can select the
preferred ones for font displaying.

Chapter16 ANNEX
5) Help
There are three items in pull-down menu Help: Help(H), Version(N) and About RCSPC.
Click Help(H), commands used for the program will be displayed. It is not necessary for the user
to use these commands, and no further information about them is presented here.
Click Version(N), historical record about time and description of updating of this program is
displayed.
Click About RCSPC, developer of this program and copyright declaration will be displayed.
16.1.3 Tool bar

There are 23 buttons in the tool bar, in which 16 buttons are enabled. They are depicted in
sequence from left to right as follows:
1) Parameter
Function of this button is the same as that of item Parameter(C) of menu Set of the menu bar.
Click this button, dialog box of communication parameters will be displayed, see Figure 16.1-3.
2) Data parameter
Click this button, other parameters will be displayed. They are data start address, data block size,
single data block number, report data number, etc, 11 items in total. These parameters are
configured already in the coefficient y and needs no further Configuration on site.
3) Device type
Click this button, a small dialog box ―please enter device type‖ is displayed. Type of the
protection equipment shall be entered. In the RCS-985 case, the device type is 985B3YD. This is
used mainly for the user to make configuration in off line condition.
4) Setting
Function of this button is the same as item Setting(E) of menu Execute of menu bar. Click this
button, i.e. entering settings reading and modification part of the program; Please refer to section
16.1.3 for details.
5) Status
Function of this button is the same as item Status(Z) of menu View of menu bar. Click this button,
entering Sampled value display part of the program; Please refer to section 16.1.2 for details.
6) Report

Chapter16 ANNEX
Function of this button is the same as item Report(L) of menu View of menu bar. Click this button,
entering Report view part of the program; Please refer to section 16.1.2 for details.
7) Trip test
Click this button, entering trip test part of the program; Please refer to section 16.1.2 for details.
8) Switch to command
When several dialog boxes are displayed, and the operator wants to enter Command mode but
not close dialog box, this button can be used to switch on Command and hide dialog boxes.
However, it is not needed for the user on site generally.
9) Download program
This button is used not for this program but others.
10) CPU<–>MON
Function of this button is the same as item Switch_CPU_MON(P) of menu Set of menu bar. Click
this button, data displayed will be changed between those acquired by module CPU and module
MON one after another.
11) Set font
Function of this button is the same as item Font(O) of menu Set of menu bar.
12) Set font color
Function of this button is the same as item Font_Color(F) of menu Set of menu bar.
13) Set background color
Function of this button is the same as item Back_Color(B) of menu Set of menu bar.
Six buttons on right hand of are all gray. They are used not for this
version but others of this program.
14) SIG RESET
Click this button, all activated output relays and signal relays will be reset.
15) Synchronize time
This function is not used for the program of RCS-985.

Chapter16 ANNEX
16) Help
Function of this button is the same as item Help(H) of menu Help of menu bar.
Besides, some shortcut keys on keyboard of the computer have same functions with items of
menu of menu bar or buttons of tool bar:
F1 — same as item Help(H) of menu Help and button Help of tool bar;
F2 — same as item Parameter(C) of menu Set and button Parameter of tool bar;
F3 — same as item Switch_CPU_MON(P) of menu Set and button CPU<->MON of tool bar;
F4 — same as item Setting(E) of menu Execute and button Setting of tool bar;
F5 — same as item Status(S) of menu View and button Status of tool bar;
F6 — same as item Report(L) of menu View and button Report of tool bar.
16.1.3.1 Sampled Value Displaying
Click item Status(S) of menu View or button Status of tool bar, real time sampled analog
values will be displayed.
Click label , Figure 16.1-6 a) and b) will be displayed. They can be
exchanged to each other by clicking two arrows on left hand of the bottom or pull down
box on right hand of the bottom ―Virtual_binary

input/Others_Binary_Input‖.
Page 1 shows enabling (―1‖) and disabling (―0‖) of functions:
Figure 16.1-6 Binary input status（page 1, module CPU）

Chapter16 ANNEX
Page 2 shows mechanical protection inputs as well as others binary input status where ―1‖ is ―yes‖
and ―0‖ is ―no‖.
Page 3 shows pickup of protective elements where ―1‖ is ―activated‖ and ―0‖ is ―inactivated‖.
Figure 16.1-6 a) and b) are pictures of value of module CPU, and can be changed to value of
module MON by CPU-MON choose item at the right hand of bottom of this page.

Chapter16 ANNEX
Figure 16.1-9 Example1 of phase angle displaying
Figure 16.1-10 Example2 of phase angle displaying
Pull down box at right hand of the bottom is gray. That means these values exist only in module
MON and cannot be read from module CPU.
16.1.3.2 Settings Reading and Modification
This part is used for reading and modification of settings of the equipment. Click item Setting(E)
of menu Execute or the fourth button Setting of tool bar, settings will be displayed. For
example, Figure 16.1-9 shows the parameters of the equipment.
Click label in picture of Setting(E), parameters of the equipment will be displayed

as shown in Figure 16.1-9.

Chapter16 ANNEX
Figure 16.1-11 Parameter of the equipment
In the same way, user can click other labels in picture of Setting(E) to read and modification all the
settings of the equipment.
There are 7 buttons in bottom of every picture of the part Settings reading and modification. From
left to right, they are: PRINT, DEFAULT, UPLOAD, DOWNLOAD, READ, SAVE and CLOSE and
depicted as follows:
NO. Button Function
1. PRINT Print settings displayed in current picture.
2. DEFAULT Read and display default settings of RCS-985 from file of RCSPC.
3. UPLOAD Read and display actual settings of RCS-985 connected with the PC.
4. DOWNLOAD Send current settings displayed on PC to RCS-985 connected.
5. READ Read settings from a file saved in computer.
6. SAVE Save current settings displayed in the computer as a file.
7. CLOSE Close current dialog box.
If default settings are displayed and button UPLOAD is pressed, default settings displayed will be
replaced by actual settings of the protection equipment, in which, the settings different from default
settings will be displayed in red. Vice versa, if actual settings are displayed and button DEFAULT
is pressed, actual settings displayed will be replaced by default settings of the protection
equipment, in which, the settings different from actual settings will be displayed in red.

Chapter16 ANNEX
16.1.4 Report
There are 3 kinds of reports in this program: tripping report, self-diagnose report and change of
status report. The tripping report is displayed first.
16.1.4.1 Tripping report
Click item Report(L) of menu View, or click the sixth button of tool bar, tripping report will be
displayed for a moment. It is the report of operation of protection relays, including number of the
report, time of pickup of protection, time interval from pickup to operation, name of the operating
protection element and the faulty phase, see Figure 16.1-12.
Figure 16.1-12 Tripping report
In order to save time for displaying, report of the latest 3 tripping is displayed firstly. Click the fifth
button REFRESH of eight buttons in the bottom of the picture, complete tripping report will be
displayed after a longer delay.
If oscillogram record of a fault tripping is needed, the record item shall be clicked first, color of this
item will be changed to light blue, click the fourth button RECORD at the bottom, then RCSPC
starts to read oscillogram data from the protection equipment.
Oscillogram data is massive and more time is needed to read it. A dialog block of saving the data
displayed as a file will be displayed when data reading is completed. If these data are saved in a
file and then oscillogram recorded can be displayed by oscillogram analysis program Drawing.exe
or Wave.exe developed by our Company. The oscillogram can be analyzed also if needed.
The sixth button SAVE at the bottom is used for saving the report as a file in the computer. The
seventh button PRINT is used to print the report. All reports of this program can be saved as file
or printed in this way. The eighth button CLOSE is used to close the picture displayed.
16.1.4.2 Diagnose report
After click the second button FAIL at bottom of Figure 16.1-13, self-diagnose report will be

Chapter16 ANNEX
displayed for a moment. It is the report of hardware failures, overload, cooling system initiating or
other abnormal events detected by the equipment.
Figure 16.1-13 Diagnose report
The records are stored in cyclic non-volatile memory and up to 32 events can be recorded.
16.1.4.3 Change of status report
After click the third button SW CHG at the bottom of Figure 16.1-13, change of status input report
will be displayed for a moment. It is the report of binary input, starting status of the equipment,
including serial number of record, time of the change and brief description about the change.
The records are stored in cyclic non-volatile memory and up to 32 events can be recorded.
16.1.5 Trip Tests

The Trip tests comprise two items: protection tripping test and communication with the host
computer test.
Object of the tripping test is to check activation of the tripping or signal output relays of the
equipment during the test not by applying voltages and currents on the equipment but by operation
of the program.
Object of the communication with the host computer test is to check correctness of the message
sent from the equipment during the test not by applying voltages and currents on the equipment
but by operation of the program.
16.1.5.1 Protection tripping test (only for special type of equipment)
First, parameter [Test_Trip_Option] shall be set as enabled, if available.
Then, click item Trip_Test(T) in menu Execute, or click the seventh button of tool bar Trip
test, picture of protection tripping test will be displayed as shown in Figure 16.1-14.
There is only one item in the picture, i.e., Test_Differential_Trip, differential protection tripping test,

Chapter16 ANNEX
click the test button , related output relays will operate, and correspondent signals
will be sent. Correctness of these operations can be checked and this button changes to
then.
Click the red reset button again, all of the operated relays will dropout, test status will be resumed
and the reset button will return to .
Figure 16.1-14 Protection tripping test
16.1.5.2 Communication with the host computer test
First, the parameters of [Test_Trip_Option] and [Test_Comm_Option] (if available) shall be set
as enabled.
Click label in Figure 16.1-15, picture of communication with the host computer will
be displayed as shown in Figure 16.1-15.
Figure 16.1-15 Communication with host computer test (page 1)

Chapter16 ANNEX
Click test button of any item, relevant activation of this item will be recorded in the
report.
The report will be sent to the host computer, and correctness of the communication can be
checked then.

RCS-985G X Instruction Manual en Domestic General X R1.01 (En YJBH2041.0086.0002)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

RCS-985G X Instruction Manual en Domestic General X R1.01 (En YJBH2041.0086.0002)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

RCS-985G

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD i

ii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically,

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD iii

Health and Safety........................................................................................................................i

Instructions and Warnings ..........................................................................................................i

Table of contents ............................................................................................................................. i

Chapter1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Application .................................................................................................................. 1

1.1.1 Typical applications .................................................................................................. 1

1.1.2 Constitution of the scheme ....................................................................................... 2

1.2 Functions .................................................................................................................... 3

1.3.1 High performance hardware ..................................................................................... 5

1.3.2 New philosophy used in RCS-985G ......................................................................... 5

1.3.3 Intellectuality ............................................................................................................. 8

Chapter2 Technical Data ............................................................................................................. 11

2.1 Electrical Specifications ............................................................................................ 11

2.1.1 Power supply .......................................................................................................... 11

2.1.2 Analog current input ratings.................................................................................... 11

2.1.3 Analog voltage input ratings ................................................................................... 11

2.1.4 Binary input ............................................................................................................. 12

2.1.5 Binary output ........................................................................................................... 12

2.1.6 Power supply output for Optical isolators ............................................................... 12

2.2 Mechanical Specifications ........................................................................................ 12

2.3 Atmospheric Environment tests................................................................................ 13

2.4 Communication Interface ......................................................................................... 13

2.5 Type test ................................................................................................................... 14

2.5.1 Environmental tests ................................................................................................ 14

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD i

2.5.2 Mechanical tests ..................................................................................................... 14

2.5.3 Electrical tests ......................................................................................................... 14

2.5.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................... 14

2.6 Certifications ............................................................................................................. 15

2.7 Protective functions related parameters................................................................... 15

2.7.1 Accurate Operating scope ...................................................................................... 15

2.7.2 General error of analog input metering .................................................................. 16

2.7.3 Generator differential protection ............................................................................. 16

2.7.4 Phase-splitting transverse differential protection ................................................... 17

2.7.5 High sensitive transverse differential protection..................................................... 17

2.7.6 Longitudinal zero sequence voltage protection for turn-to-turn fault...................... 18

2.7.7 Earth fault protection of stator ................................................................................ 18

2.7.8 Earth fault protection of rotor .................................................................................. 19

2.7.9 Overload protection of stator .................................................................................. 19

2.7.10 Negative sequence overload protection ............................................................... 19

2.7.11 Overload protection of excitation winding (AC quantity) ...................................... 20

2.7.12 Overload protection of excitation winding (DC quantity) ...................................... 20

2.7.13 Loss of excitation protection of generator ............................................................ 20

2.7.14 Out-of-step protection of generator ...................................................................... 21

2.7.15 Voltage protection of generator ............................................................................ 21

2.7.16 Over excitation protection ..................................................................................... 22

2.7.17 Power protection of generator .............................................................................. 22

2.7.18 Frequency protection of generator ....................................................................... 22